[featured_image]
Download
Download is available until [expire_date]
  • Version 2.03
  • Download 5026
  • Tamanho do Arquivo 378.46 MB
  • File Count 1
  • Data de Criação 15 de março de 2018
  • Ultima Atualização 3 de julho de 2018

XP-Builder

Right choice for ultimate yield
LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your partner.
Human Machine Interface
XP-Builder
User’s Manual
z Read this manual carefully before
installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.
zKeep this manual within easy reach
for quick reference.
XGT Panel Series
http://eng.lsis.biz
Safety Precautions
1
Before using the product…
To use the product safely and effectively, please read this instruction manual thoroughly before use.
Please keep to the safety precaution, for it is to prevent accidents and potential danger from occurring.
Safety precaution is classified into ‘Warning’ and ‘Caution’ and their meanings are as follows.
Violating the instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
Violating the instruction may result in slight personal injury or product damage.
The indicated illustrations on the product and in the manual have the following meanings.
Be cautious, for danger may be present.
Be cautious, for there is a possibility of an electric shock.
After reading the instruction manual, keep it handy for quick reference.
Warning
Caution

Safety Precautions

2

Design Precautions
Design Precautions
Installation Precautions
 Install a safety circuit external to the HMI to protect the whole control system in case of
external power supply trouble.
Serious trouble may occur to the entire system due to erroneous output/operation of the HMI.
Warning
 In/output signal or communication cable should be at least 100mm apart from
High-voltage/power wires.
Otherwise, it may cause erroneous output/operation.
 Use the HMI in an environment that meets the general specification contained in this
manual or datasheet.
Otherwise, it could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation or deterioration.
 In case of much vibration in the installed environment, be sure to insulate the HMI from
direct vibration.
Otherwise, it could result in electric shock, fire or erroneous operation.
 Be sure not to let foreign substances such as conductive debris inside the product.
Otherwise, it could result in electric shock, fire or erroneous operation.
Caution
Caution

Safety Precautions
3
Wiring Precautions
 Be sure to turn off the HMI and external power before wiring.
Otherwise, it may result in an electric shock or damage to the product.
 Wire correctly by checking each of the product’s rated voltage and terminal layout.
Otherwise, it may result in fire, electric shock or erroneous operation.
 Tighten terminal screws with specified torque when wiring.
If terminal screws are loose, it may result in short circuits, fire or erroneous operation.
 Use the exclusive HMI 3-type grounding for the FG terminal.
If not grounded, it may result in erroneous operation.
 Be sure not to let any foreign substances such as wiring debris inside the module.
Such debris may cause fire, damage or erroneous operation.
Caution
Warning

Safety Precautions

4

Startup and Maintenance Precautions
Disposal Precaution
 Do not touch the terminals while power is on.
Otherwise, it may cause electric shock or erroneous operation.
 Turn off the PLC and external power when cleaning or tightening the terminal.
Otherwise, it may cause electric shock or erroneous operation.
 Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short circuit, solder, etc. the battery.
Mishandling the battery may cause overheating, crack, fire and may result in injury or fire.
 Do not disassemble PCB from the product case or modify the product.
Otherwise, it may result in fire, electric shock or erroneous operation.
 Use cellular phone or walky-talky at least 30cm away from the PLC.
Otherwise, it may result in erroneous operation.
 When disposing of this product or battery, treat it as industrial waste.
Otherwise, it may cause poisonous pollution or explosion.
Warning
Caution
Caution

Revision history
Revision History
Version Date Contents Revised chapter
V 1.0 ’07.10 First Edition -
V 2.1 ’10. 6 Contents modified and added -
V 2.2 ’10. 8 1. Contents added
(1) Precaution in installing under Windows 7
(2) Transparent setting of device and object ID
(3) 256 color mode
(4) Password device mode in security setting
(5) Flow alarm location setting
(6) Function deleting the history alarm area of NVRAM
(7) Device saving the number of the not restored alarms
(8) Function backing up the logging data by adding at the
end of logging CSV file
(9) CSV file format modification and the number of
backup setting
(10) InitHistoricalAlarm, InitLogging script function
and communication script function added
(11) Display trigger
2. Function modified
(1) Clock object modified
Ch1.3
Ch3.8
Ch8.1, Ch13.2
Ch13.4
Ch14.3
Ch14.4
Ch14.4
Ch14.5
Ch14.5
Ch15.9, Ch18.4
Ch16.9
Ch17.16
V 2.3 ’10.9 1. Contents added
(1) HTML device copier
(2) SMTP server setup
(3) N:1 communication
Ch9.12
Ch13.9
Ch19
The user manual’s number is indicated at the right of back cover.
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2007 All Rights Reserved.
About the Manual
3
Thank you for purchasing the HMI of LS Industrial Systems Co., LTD.
For right use of the product, read carefully the manual to understand the functions, performance, installation and
programming of the product you have purchased before use it and make sure that this manual is delivered to the final user
and person in charge of maintenance.
The following manual deals with use of the product.
When necessary, read the following manuals and place an order.
Otherwise you can download PDF files by signing in our company’s home page
http://eng.lsis.biz/.
Related Manuals

Title Contents Serial Number
XGT Panel
Communication User’s
Manual
This manual describes the line diagrams and communication
settings necessary for connecting the XGT Panel products to
control devices such as the PLC or inverter.
10310000857
XP-Builder User’s Manual This is the XGT Panel software manual describing the functions
such as the display data, communication and environment
setting, logging/recipe data backup, simulator and printing to use
the XGT Panel products.
10310000876
XGT Panel User’s
Manual
This manual explains the specifications, features and system
composition of the XGT Panel series.
10310000867

Table of Contents
4
Chapter 1 How To Start...........................................................................................................1-1~1-15
1.1 Features of the XP-Builder.................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 System Requirements for Operation of XP-Builder.........................................................................................................1-8
1.3 Setup of XP-Builder ............................................................................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel....................................................................2-1~2-36
2.1 Overview of XGT Panel......................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Introduction of XGT Panel.......................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Data Displayed in XGT Panel ...............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.3 Examples of Simple Operation of XGT Panel.......................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Basics of XGT Panel...........................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.1 Project Creation........................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.2 Project Properties Change......................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.3 Window Creation and Properties Change.............................................................................................................2-8
2.2.4 Display Editing..........................................................................................................................................................2-14
2.2.5 State and Address Check ......................................................................................................................................2-28
2.2.6 Project Saving and Data Error Check ..................................................................................................................2-30
2.2.7 Simulation and Transfer .........................................................................................................................................2-32
Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder..................................................................................3-1~3-22
3.1 Display Composition...........................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Menu Composition..............................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................................................................3-8
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................
3.4 Status Bar.............................................................................................................................................................................3-8
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................
3.5 Docking Window.................................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.6 Screen Tap Group ..............................................................................................................................................................3-12
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................
3.7 User Specific........................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.7.1 Tool Bar ...................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.7.2 Shortcut Key Setting ................................................................................................................................................3-16
3.7.3 Tool Box Option Setting ...........................................................................................................................................3-18
3.8 Option...................................................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.8.1 Editing Option ...........................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.8.2 Project Management Option...................................................................................................................................3-22
Chapter 4 Project.....................................................................................................................4-1~4-10
Table of Contents
5
4.1 Project File Management .................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Creating New Project...............................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Opening Project........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 Saving Project...........................................................................................................................................................4-5
4.1.4 Saving as Project......................................................................................................................................................4-6
4.1.5 Closing Project..........................................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2 Project Password................................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Password Setting .....................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.2 Password Change ...................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Password Deletion...................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.3 Make-up of Project..............................................................................................................................................................4-9
Chapter 5 Screen Editing .......................................................................................................5-1~5-44
5.1 Overview of Screen.............................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Basic Screen.............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Window Screen........................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Part Screen...............................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.1.4 Key Window Screen................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.1.5 Global Window Screen............................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2 New Window Insertion ......................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Setting as Start Screen.......................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.4 Opening/Closing Screen ..................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.4.1 Opening Screen.......................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.4.2 Closing Window........................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5 Renaming ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-12
5.6 Screen Properties .............................................................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.1 General Properties .................................................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.2 Background Properties............................................................................................................................................5-14
5.6.3 Other Properties.......................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.7 Screen Editing ...................................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.7.1 Copying Screen and Pasting Screen.....................................................................................................................5-19
5.7.2 Cut and Paste...........................................................................................................................................................5-20
5.7.3 Deleting Screen........................................................................................................................................................5-21
5.8 Drawing Figures/Objects....................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.8.1 Using Editing Tools...................................................................................................................................................5-22
5.9 Drawing Figures..................................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.9.1 Overview of Figures.................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.9.2 Drawing a Figure by Type........................................................................................................................................5-28
5.10 Drawing an Object............................................................................................................................................................5-38
5.11 Drawing Figure or Object from Library............................................................................................................................5-44
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing....................................................................................6-1~6-49
6.1 Selection ..............................................................................................................................................................................6-1
Table of Contents
6
6.2 Size Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.3 Properties Change..............................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.4 Delete...................................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.5 Cut - Paste...........................................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.6 Copy - Paste........................................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.7 Multi Copy ..........................................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.8 Drag and Drop.....................................................................................................................................................................6-11
6.9 Undo and Redo of Editing..................................................................................................................................................6-13
6.10 Group and Ungrouping.....................................................................................................................................................6-14
6.11 Rotation..............................................................................................................................................................................6-16
6.12 Symmetric Movement ......................................................................................................................................................6-17
6.13 Arrangement ....................................................................................................................................................................6-19
6.14 Change of Drawing Order................................................................................................................................................6-20
6.15 Same Size.........................................................................................................................................................................6-22
6.16 Justification to the Center.................................................................................................................................................6-24
6.17 Same Space......................................................................................................................................................................6-25
6.18 Paste ................................................................................................................................................................................6-26
6.19 Movement by a Dot ..........................................................................................................................................................6-29
6.20 Change of Location and Size of Figure and Object .....................................................................................................6-30
6.21 Auxiliary Functions for Editing Object and figure ..........................................................................................................6-32
6.21.1 Thumbnail...............................................................................................................................................................6-32
6.21.2 Pan Window...........................................................................................................................................................6-33
6.21.3 Zooming..................................................................................................................................................................6-34
6.21.4 Grid and Gridding...................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.21.5 View/Hide of Margin Line and Guide Line .........................................................................................................6-36
6.21.6 Object ID Viewer ..................................................................................................................................................6-39
6.21.7 Object Address Viewer..........................................................................................................................................6-42
6.21.8 Object Status Viewer..............................................................................................................................................6-43
6.21.9 IME Viewer .............................................................................................................................................................6-47
6.21.10 Enlargement and Reduction of Editing Window...............................................................................................6-48
6.21.11 Auto Pan................................................................................................................................................................6-49
Chapter 7 Online......................................................................................................................7-1~7-29
7.1 Connection Composition....................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Serial(RS232) Connection.......................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Ethernet Connection................................................................................................................................................7-4
7.2 Project Transfer...................................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3 Transfer to Removable Device..........................................................................................................................................7-14
7.4 Receiving Project File.........................................................................................................................................................7-16
7.5 Receiving Backup...............................................................................................................................................................7-19
7.6 XGT Panel Update.............................................................................................................................................................7-23
7.7 Change and Display of XGT Panel Information...............................................................................................................7-25
7.8 Communication Errors and Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................7-29
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library....................................................................................... 8-1~8-40
Table of Contents
7
8.1 Graphic Library....................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Graphic Library Window Composition ..................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Library Insertion, Editing and Background Image Setting ....................................................................................8-4
8.1.3 User Graphic Library List Creation, Deletion and Name Change........................................................................8-8
8.1.4 Registration and Deletion of User Graphic Library ..............................................................................................8-11
8.1.5 User Graphic Library Send Out/Invocation ..........................................................................................................8-15
8.1.6 User graphic library; Saving image/Image information/ Changing image/Applying transparency ...................8-20
8.1.7 Registering the selected figure to graphic library as WMF format.......................................................................8-25
8.2 Object Library ....................................................................................................................................................................8-27
8.2.1 Library Window .......................................................................................................................................................8-27
8.2.2 Library Insertion and Editing ..................................................................................................................................8-29
8.2.3 User Object Library list Creation, Deletion and Name Change ...........................................................................8-31
8.2.4 User Object Library Registration, Deletion and Icon Change ............................................................................8-33
8.2.5 User Object Library Export/Import ........................................................................................................................8-36
8.2.6 Name Change of the Object User Library..............................................................................................................8-40
Chapter 9 Useful Tools............................................................................................................9-1~9-25
9.1 Finding and Replacing Devices .......................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Finding/Replacing All Devices............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.1 Find All .....................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.2 Replace All................................................................................................................................................................9-6
9.3 Memory Use Status ............................................................................................................................................................9-8
9.4 Device Cross Reference ..................................................................................................................................................9-10
9.5 Data Check..........................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.6 Viewing Device Map...........................................................................................................................................................9-12
9.7 Script Cross Reference......................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.8 Moving to Next/Previous Screen.......................................................................................................................................9-15
9.9 Property Screen..................................................................................................................................................................9-17
9.10 Font Export/Installation.....................................................................................................................................................9-20
9.10.1 Font Export.............................................................................................................................................................9-20
9.10.2 Font Installation......................................................................................................................................................9-21
9.11 Automatically Registering string into string table............................................................................................................9-22
9.12 HTML Device Copier........................................................................................................................................................9-24
Chapter 10 Project Printing................................................................................................10-1~10-17
10.1 Print Setting .....................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 List .........................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.2 Page Setting...........................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.1.3 Header/Footer ......................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2 Print Contents ..................................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2.1 Project Property......................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.2 Screen Thumbnails................................................................................................................................................10-10

Table of Contents
8
10.2.3 Screen.....................................................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.4 Text Table................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.5 Scheduler................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.6 Logging ...................................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.2.7 Flow Alarm..............................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.2.8 System Alarm.........................................................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.9 History Alarm ..........................................................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.10 Recipe .................................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.2.11 Script ....................................................................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.12 Tag.........................................................................................................................................................................10-17
10.2.13 Cross Reference..................................................................................................................................................10-17
Chapter 11 Simulation......................................................................................................... 11-1~11-10
11.1 Simulation Display.............................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 Starting Simulation..................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.2 Device Monitoring...................................................................................................................................................11-4
11.1.3 Device Value Change............................................................................................................................................11-8
11.1.4 Screen Viewer of Device List.................................................................................................................................11-10
Chapter 12 Bar Code Setting...............................................................................................12-1~12-3
12.1 Use and Setting Procedure..............................................................................................................................................12-1
12.2 Example of Use of Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................12-2
Chapter 13 Project Properties ...........................................................................................13-1~13-30
13.1 Summary...........................................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 XGT Panel Settings..........................................................................................................................................................13-3
13.3 Screen Change Switch.....................................................................................................................................................13-15
13.4 Security Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................13-16
13.5 Key Window Settings .......................................................................................................................................................13-19
13-6 Language ..........................................................................................................................................................................13-20
13-7 Storage Settings................................................................................................................................................................13-24
13-8 Global Script Settings.......................................................................................................................................................13-26
13-9 Auxiliary Settings...............................................................................................................................................................13-27
13-10 Extended Controller Settings.........................................................................................................................................13-30
Chapter 14 Common Data................................................................................................14-1~14-104
14.1 Tag......................................................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.1 Use of Tag...............................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.1.2 Tag Setting..............................................................................................................................................................14-5

Table of Contents
9
14.1.3 Entry of Device Address by Tag............................................................................................................................14-7
14.1.4 Tag Name Rule ......................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.1.5 Tag Entry Window Device Setting........................................................................................................................14-10
14.1.6 Deletion of Tag........................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.1.7 Tag Type Change...................................................................................................................................................14-12
14.1.8 Importing XG5000 Symbol ..................................................................................................................................14-12
14.2 Text Table...........................................................................................................................................................................14-15
14.2.1 Text Table................................................................................................................................................................14-15
14.2.2 Text Table Setting...................................................................................................................................................14-18
14.2.3 Text Selection Dialog Box......................................................................................................................................14-19
14.2.4 Bit Message Setting...............................................................................................................................................14-20
14.2.5 Word Message Setting ........................................................................................................................................14-22
14.2.6 Object Caption........................................................................................................................................................14-23
14.2.7 Flow Alarm..............................................................................................................................................................14-24
14.2.8 History Alarm Contents/Alarm Navigator.............................................................................................................14-25
14.2.9 Multilanguage Entry Setting (Editing Language) ...............................................................................................14-27
14.2.10 Runtime Language Setting.................................................................................................................................14-29
14.2.11 Language Change...............................................................................................................................................14-31
14.2.12 Multi-Language Supporting Font........................................................................................................................14-36
14.2.13 Font.......................................................................................................................................................................14-39
14.3 FlowAlarm.........................................................................................................................................................................14-40
14.3.1 Use of Flow Alarm..................................................................................................................................................14-40
14.3.2 Flow Alarm Setting.................................................................................................................................................14-41
14.3.3 Display of Details of FlowAlarm............................................................................................................................14-43
14.4 History Alarm.....................................................................................................................................................................14-46
14.4.1 Alarm History Setting.............................................................................................................................................14-46
14.4.2 Use of History Alarm..............................................................................................................................................14-50
14.4.3 Setting of No. of Alarms Occurred........................................................................................................................14-54
14.4.4 Setting of HistoryAlarm Sampling Time ..............................................................................................................14-55
14.4.5 History Alarm Occurrence and Restoration.........................................................................................................14-57
14.4.6 History Alarm Structure..........................................................................................................................................14-61
14.4.7 History Alarm Group Setting..................................................................................................................................14-62
14.4.8 Setting of Detailed Display of History Alarm........................................................................................................14-62
14.4.9 Saving History Alarm Data ....................................................................................................................................14-65
14.4.10 Device displaying selected alarm.......................................................................................................................14-67
14.4.11 Function to send alarm data via E-Mail..............................................................................................................14-68
14.5 Logging..............................................................................................................................................................................14-70
14.5.1 Use of Logging.......................................................................................................................................................14-70
14.5.2 Logging Setting Display.........................................................................................................................................14-72
14.5.3 Setting of Device to Log.........................................................................................................................................14-77
14.5.4 Periodical Logging(Time) Setting..........................................................................................................................14-78
14.5.5 Periodical Logging(Bit Device) Setting.................................................................................................................14-79
14.5.6 Conditional Logging Setting..................................................................................................................................14-79
14.5.7 Logging Control Device Setting............................................................................................................................14-80
14.5.8 Logging Area Setting .............................................................................................................................................14-82
14.5.9 Logging Data Saving .............................................................................................................................................14-83
14.5.10 Logging Data Backup..........................................................................................................................................14-85
14.6 Recipe................................................................................................................................................................................14-88

Table of Contents
10
14.6.1 Use of Recipe.........................................................................................................................................................14-88
14.6.2 Recipe Setting........................................................................................................................................................14-89
14.6.3 Recipe Action Trigger ...........................................................................................................................................14-91
14.6.4 Recipe Control Device...........................................................................................................................................14-93
14.6.5 Storage of Recipe Data .........................................................................................................................................14-93
14.6.6 Saving file recipe data............................................................................................................................................14-94
14.7 Scheduler .........................................................................................................................................................................14-95
14.7.1 Use of Scheduler....................................................................................................................................................14-95
14.7.2 Scheduler Setting...................................................................................................................................................14-96
14.7.3 Scheduler Operation Setting.................................................................................................................................14-98
14.7.4 Scheduler Operation Priority Setting....................................................................................................................14-100
14.8 Script ..................................................................................................................................................................................14-102
14.8.1 Use of Script ...........................................................................................................................................................14-102
14.8.2 Global Script Setting ..............................................................................................................................................14-104
14.8.3 Display Change Script Setting..............................................................................................................................14-105
14.8.4 Scheduler Script Execution Setting......................................................................................................................14-106
14.8.5 Object Script Setting ..............................................................................................................................................14-106
Chapter 15 Common Data Editing....................................................................................15-1~15-37
15.1 Editing ................................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.2 Tag......................................................................................................................................................................................15-12
15.3 Text Table...........................................................................................................................................................................15-18
15.4 FlowAlarm.........................................................................................................................................................................15-23
15.5 History Alarm.....................................................................................................................................................................15-23
15.6 Logging..............................................................................................................................................................................15-26
15.7 Recipe................................................................................................................................................................................15-26
15.8 Scheduler...........................................................................................................................................................................15-28
15.9 Script ..................................................................................................................................................................................15-29
Chapter 16 Object Setting ..................................................................................................16-1~16-44
16.1 Device Setting...................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2 Display Function Setting...................................................................................................................................................16-8
16.3 Text Setting........................................................................................................................................................................16-17
16.4 Conditional Sentence Setting...........................................................................................................................................16-24
16.4.1 Area Editing Dialog Box.........................................................................................................................................16-24
16.4.2 Condition List Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................16-26
16.5 Offset Setting.....................................................................................................................................................................16-28
16.6 Operating Condition Setting.............................................................................................................................................16-30
16.7 Security Setting ...............................................................................................................................................................16-34
16.8 Script ................................................................................................................................................................................16-36
16.8.1 Cautions in Script Operation ...............................................................................................................................16-36
16.8.2 Direct Variables and Internal Variables within Script...........................................................................................16-36
16.8.3 Examples of Script Result.....................................................................................................................................16-38

Table of Contents
11
16.8.4 Script Setting Items ..............................................................................................................................................16-40
16.9 Setting Display Trigger Function......................................................................................................................................16-41
Chapter 17 Object..............................................................................................................17-1~17-379
17.1 Lamp Object......................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.2 Lamp Types............................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.3 Bit Lamp Setting Items...........................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.4 Word Lamp Setting Items......................................................................................................................................17-6
17.1.5 Items to establish N-Phase Lamp........................................................................................................................17-13
17.2 Switch Object.....................................................................................................................................................................17-17
17.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-17
17.2.2 Switch Types...........................................................................................................................................................17-17
17.2.3 Bit Switch Setting Items.........................................................................................................................................17-17
17.2.4 Word Switch Setting Item......................................................................................................................................17-25
17.2.5 Change Screen Switch Settings...........................................................................................................................17-33
17.2.6 Special Function Switch Settings..........................................................................................................................17-39
17.2.7 Multi Action Switch Settings ..................................................................................................................................17-59
17.3 Message Object................................................................................................................................................................17-67
17.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-67
17.3.2 Message Types......................................................................................................................................................17-67
17.3.3 Bit Message Settings.............................................................................................................................................17-69
17.3.4 Word Message Settings........................................................................................................................................17-76
17.4 Numeric/Text Object .......................................................................................................................................................17-90
17.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-90
17.4.2 Types of Numeric/Text Objects.............................................................................................................................17-90
17.4.3 Numeric Input Settings ..........................................................................................................................................17-91
17.4.4 Numeric Display Settings......................................................................................................................................17-116
17.4.5 Text Input Unit Settings..........................................................................................................................................17-128
17.4.6 Text Display Settings..............................................................................................................................................17-142
17.5 Window Object ................................................................................................................................................................17-150
17.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-150
17.5.2 Types of Window Invocation.................................................................................................................................17-150
17.5.3 Bit Window Settings...............................................................................................................................................17-150
17.5.4 Word Window Settings..........................................................................................................................................17-156
17.6 Part Object.........................................................................................................................................................................17-167
17.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-167
17.6.2 Types of Part Invocation........................................................................................................................................17-167
17.6.3 Bit Part Settings ....................................................................................................................................................17-171
17.6.4 Word Part Settings.................................................................................................................................................17-177
17.7 Animation Object .............................................................................................................................................................17-188
17.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-188
17.7.2 Animation Settings .................................................................................................................................................17-188
17.8 Graph Object ...................................................................................................................................................................17-190
17.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-190

Table of Contents
12
17.8.2 Types of Graph Objects.........................................................................................................................................17-190
17.8.3 Bar Graph Settings ................................................................................................................................................17-191
17.8.4 Pie Graph Settings.................................................................................................................................................17-204
17.8.5 Meter Graph Settings.............................................................................................................................................17-216
17.8.6 Closed Curve Graph Settings...............................................................................................................................17-227
17.8.7 Trend Graph Settings.............................................................................................................................................17-240
17.8.8 Items to set Logging Trend Graph........................................................................................................................17-254
17.8.9 Items to set Logging Distribution Graph...............................................................................................................17-271
17.8.10 Items to set Real-Time Distribution Chart Graph..............................................................................................17-287
17.9 History Alarm Viewer Object ............................................................................................................................................17-307
17.9.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................17-307
17.9.2 History Alarm Viewer Settings...............................................................................................................................17-308
17.10 Data List Object...............................................................................................................................................................17-319
17.10.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-319
17.10.2 Data List Settings.................................................................................................................................................17-320
17.11 Logging Viewer Object ...................................................................................................................................................17-329
17.11.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-329
17.11.2 Logging Viewer Settings......................................................................................................................................17-329
17.12 Alarm Navigator Object ..................................................................................................................................................17-341
17.12.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-341
17.12.2 Alarm Navigator Settings.....................................................................................................................................17-342
17.13 Recipe Explorer..............................................................................................................................................................17-344
17.13.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-344
17.13.2 Items to set Recipe Explorer Object...................................................................................................................17-345
17.14 Data List Editor ...............................................................................................................................................................17-350
17.14.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-350
17.14.2 Items to set Data List Editor Object....................................................................................................................17-351
17.15 File Recipe Editor...........................................................................................................................................................17-359
17.15.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-359
17.15.2 File Recipe Editor Object Setting Items.............................................................................................................17-360
17.16 Clock Object....................................................................................................................................................................17-366
17.16.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-366
17.16.2 Clock Object Settings ..........................................................................................................................................17-366
17.17 Screen Insertion Object..................................................................................................................................................17-372
17.17.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-372
17.17.2 Items to set the object to be inserted to a screen .............................................................................................17-375
17.18 Memo Pad Object..........................................................................................................................................................17-376
17.18.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................................................17-376
17.18.2 Items to set Memo pad object ............................................................................................................................17-377
Chapter 18 Script.................................................................................................................18-1~18-95
18.1 Characteristics of Scripts..................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2 Script Specifications..........................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2.1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2.2 Detailed Specifications...........................................................................................................................................18-4

Table of Contents
13
18.3 Application Data and Expressions...................................................................................................................................18-56
18.4 XGT Panel Control Functions..........................................................................................................................................18-67
18.4.1 System function......................................................................................................................................................18-67
18.4.2 Print function...........................................................................................................................................................18-68
18.4.3 Script function.........................................................................................................................................................18-69
18.4.4 Device function.......................................................................................................................................................18-70
18.4.5 Communication function........................................................................................................................................18-72
18.4.6 Memory function.....................................................................................................................................................18-76
18.4.7 Data convert ...........................................................................................................................................................18-79
18.4.8 Others......................................................................................................................................................................18-81
18.5 Using Script Tool Bar ........................................................................................................................................................18-84
18.6 Error during Script Execution...........................................................................................................................................18-88
18.7 Script Watchdog and Sleep .............................................................................................................................................18-89
18.8 Error Message...................................................................................................................................................................18-90
Chapter 19 N:1 Communication..........................................................................................19-1~19-8
19.1 N:1 Communication..........................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.2 N:1 Communication Principal ..........................................................................................................................................19-3
19.2.1 Principal ..................................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.2.2 Operating flow diagram.........................................................................................................................................19-4
19.3 Setup..................................................................................................................................................................................19-5
19.4 Regulation and Restriction...............................................................................................................................................19-6
19.5 Token Hold Function and System Device.......................................................................................................................19-7
19.5.1 How to use Token Hold Function .........................................................................................................................19-7
19.5.2 N:1 System Device................................................................................................................................................19-8
19.6 N:1 Communication supported PLC driver.....................................................................................................................19-8
Appendix 1 Device Setting..................................................................................................A1-1~A1-8
A1.1 Connectable PLC Types..................................................................................................................................................A1-1
A1.2 Device List by PLC Type ................................................................................................................................................A1-1
1.2.1 XGK Series...............................................................................................................................................................A1-1
1.2.2 GLOFA-GM Series .................................................................................................................................................A1-3
1.2.3 MASTER-K Series .................................................................................................................................................A1-4
1.2.4 MELSEC-QnA/Q Series ........................................................................................................................................A1-4
A1.3 How to Express Device Address.....................................................................................................................................A1-6
1.3.1 Address Input Control ..............................................................................................................................................A1-7
1.3.2 Address Setting Dialog Box.....................................................................................................................................A1-8
Appendix 2 Problems That Might Occur in XP-Builder Operation.............................A2-1~A2-40
A2.1 Types of Problems............................................................................................................................................................A2-1
A2.2 Problems with Device Setting..........................................................................................................................................A2-2

Table of Contents
14
A2.3 Problems with Common Data Editing ............................................................................................................................A2-5
A2.4 Problems with Communication.......................................................................................................................................A2-13
A2.5 Problems with Download.................................................................................................................................................A2-16
A2.6 Problems with Project Properties Setting.......................................................................................................................A2-34
A2.7 Other Problems ................................................................................................................................................................A2-38
Appendix 3 XP-Util..............................................................................................................A3-1~A3-12
A3.1 Connection Composition.................................................................................................................................................A3-1
3.1.1 Connecting Serial Communication(RS232)..........................................................................................................A3-1
3.1.2 Ethernet Connection................................................................................................................................................A3-4
A3.2 XGT Panel Program Update...........................................................................................................................................A3-9
A3.3 XGT Panel Driver Update ...............................................................................................................................................A3-11
3.3.1 Updating the driver for XGT Panel .........................................................................................................................A3-11
3.3.2 Changing the property of XGT Panel Program Monitor Driver............................................................................A3-12
3.3.3 Driver Deletion..........................................................................................................................................................A3-12
Appendix 4 Program Monitor...........................................................................................A4-1~A4-63
A4.1 Available PLC Type..........................................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2 The property of HMI type.................................................................................................................................................A4-2
A4.3 Starting...............................................................................................................................................................................A4-3
4.3.1 Starting with PLC Information..................................................................................................................................A4-3
4.3.2 Starting with a special switches...............................................................................................................................A4-4
A4.4 The Composition of a Screen..........................................................................................................................................A4-6
A4.5 Program Monitor...............................................................................................................................................................A4-8
4.5.1 Selecting Monitor Program......................................................................................................................................A4-8
4.5.2 Displaying Monitor Data ..........................................................................................................................................A4-10
4.5.3 The Display Format of Monitor Data......................................................................................................................A4-11
4.5.4 Changing the current device value.........................................................................................................................A4-12
A4.6 Program List Management..............................................................................................................................................A4-14
4.6.1 Displaying Program List...........................................................................................................................................A4-14
A4.7 Device Monitor..................................................................................................................................................................A4-20
4.7.1 Composition of Device Monitor...............................................................................................................................A4-20
4.7.2 Screen Display Option.............................................................................................................................................A4-20
A4.8 Device Edition...................................................................................................................................................................A4-22
4.8.1 Adding Device..........................................................................................................................................................A4-22
4.8.2 Inserting Device........................................................................................................................................................A4-25
4.8.3 Editing Device...........................................................................................................................................................A4-27
4.8.4 Deleting Device........................................................................................................................................................A4-29
4.8.5 Changing the current device value.........................................................................................................................A4-30
A4.9 Reference..........................................................................................................................................................................A4-33
4.9.1 Device Reference ....................................................................................................................................................A4-33
4.9.2 Label Reference.......................................................................................................................................................A4-40
4.9.3 Sub-routine Reference............................................................................................................................................A4-42

Table of Contents
15
4.9.4 Step Reference ........................................................................................................................................................A4-44
4.9.5 Touch Reference......................................................................................................................................................A4-46
4.9.6 Checking Touch History...........................................................................................................................................A4-54
A4.10 Option Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................................................A4-56
4.10.1 Displaying Option Dialog Box...............................................................................................................................A4-56
4.10.2 File Saving Option..................................................................................................................................................A4-57
4.10.3 Monitor Display Option..........................................................................................................................................A4-58
4.10.4 LD Option................................................................................................................................................................A4-59
Appendix 5 XP-VSP............................................................................................................A5-1~A5-23
A5.1 Characteristics of XP-VSP..............................................................................................................................................A5-1
A5.2 System Requirement to execute XP-VSP.....................................................................................................................A5-2
A5.3 XP-VSP Installation..........................................................................................................................................................A5-3
A5.4 XP-VSP Outline................................................................................................................................................................A5-9
5.4.1 XP-VSP.....................................................................................................................................................................A5-9
5.4.2 Virtual Serial Port......................................................................................................................................................A5-9
5.4.3 Communication through XP-VSP ..........................................................................................................................A5-10
A5.5 Simulation..........................................................................................................................................................................A5-11
5.5.1 Registering Virtual COM Port..................................................................................................................................A5-11
5.5.2 Connecting PLC through ladder software..............................................................................................................A5-12
5.5.3 Undoing Virtual COM...............................................................................................................................................A5-14
A5.6 The composition of a screen ...........................................................................................................................................A5-16
A5.7 The Composition of Menu...............................................................................................................................................A5-17
A5.8 Virtual COM Control.........................................................................................................................................................A5-18
5.8.1 Registering Virtual COM..........................................................................................................................................A5-18
5.8.2 Direct Add for Virtual COM......................................................................................................................................A5-19
5.8.3 Undoing Virtual COM...............................................................................................................................................A5-21
A5.9 PLC Drivers that support XP-VSP..................................................................................................................................A5-21
A5.10 Setting.............................................................................................................................................................................A5-22

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-1
Chapter 1 How to Start
1.1 Features of the XP-Builder
XP Builder is a software tool configuring project data (display data) operated by the XGT Panel series.
XP Builder has the following features and advantages.
(1) It provides various and convenient display editing.
(a) You can edit the display in great detail by freely adjusting the display size.
(b) You can edit the display more conveniently and rapidly by adding or modifying hot keys as you wish.
(c) By using icons, you can use the functions more conveniently and easily.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-2
(d) You can operate multiple XP Builders to use other project data.
(e) Importing and exporting functions are provided for quicker editing.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-3
(f) You can use tabs for convenient editing of multiple displays.
(g) Vast space and efficient editing functions are provided with each tool window arranged as you wish.
(h) Project work space is provided so that you can check the data configuration at a glance.
(i) The drag and drop function is provided for quick and convenient editing.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-4
(j) It provides the convenient editing tool.
(k) You can see all the display lists at a time.
(l) The preview function is provided.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-5
(m) You can check errors of edited data.
(n) Undo and Redo functions are provided without a limit.
(2) A variety of image libraries and graphic files are provided so that you can configure refined displays.
(a) An image library is provided which maintains the configuration when it is zoomed in or out.
(b) You can edit the displays with a variety of graphic files (WMF, JPG, BMP, etc.).

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-6
(c) Animation file (GIF) can be edited as well.
(3) Advanced functions are provided in addition to basic objects.
(a) A variety of alarms such as history/system/flow alarms
(b) Logging
(c) Recipe
(d) Scheduler
(e) Project Print
(4) Easy and convenient scripts are provided.
(a) By using the script tool box, a beginner can use the script easily.
Chapter 1 How to Start
1-7
(b) The script debugging function is also provided.
(5) Multi-language and various fonts are available.
(a) Multi-language is available.
(b) You can edit with up to four languages at a time.
(c) You can edit characteristics by using the window/user fonts.
(6) The simulation function is available.
(a) You can verify the project data in advance.
(7) A variety of communication methods are provided.
(a) Ethernet communication of project data is provided, which is more rapid than the serial communication.
(b) You can transfer data to the USB memory and conveniently replace the project data for maintenance.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-8
1.2 System Requirements for Operation of XP-Builder
(1) PC and Memory
CPU over Pentium 4 and memory of 512MB or above
(2) COM Port
RS-232C serial port or Ethernet port
(3) Hard Disk
Capacity above 1GB
(4) Mouse
A mouse connectable to the PC
(5) Monitor
The resolution should be above 1024 X 768.
(6) OS
Windows 2000/XP
1.3 Setup of XP-Builder
[Procedure]
(1) Start the setup file.
(2) Select installation language.
(3) The Installation wizard prepares the setup.
(4) You are asked to start setup of XP Builder as shown in the following window. Click on [Next] to proceed.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-9
(5) You are asked to enter the user’s information. Specify the user. If you want to use the XP Builder exclusively, click on
‘Only for me’.
(6) You are asked to specify the folder in which the XP Builder is to be set up. XP Builder requires space of about 100 MByte.
Check whether there is sufficient space in the folder where you want to set up the XP Builder. If there is not enough
space, a warning message pops up and you cannot go on. Select the folder and click on [Next].

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-10
(7) The window below displays the user information and setup path entered by you. To proceed with the setup, click on the
Next button.
(8) The progress of the setup is displayed.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-11
(9) The window below shows that the setup has been successfully completed.
(10) You can start XP Builder in the [Start] menu or use the shortcut created in the desktop.
[Uninstall]
(1) To remove the XP Builder, execute the Uninstall file or execute [Add or Remove Programs] in the control panel.
Chapter 1 How to Start
1-12
(2) An uninstall confirmation message pops up.
(3) To start uninstall, click on the OK button.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-13
Note
1. The minimum capacity of PC for installation is as below.
(1) At least 700MB is required for a system driver (where OS is installed, normally, C:) regardless of installation route. (It is the
minimum size to operate Window OS and install XP-Builder)
(2) The driver for established route needs at least 250MB for its saving capacity.
(3) Although a system driver is more than 700MB, if the capacity is below than the above or it can not meet the minimum size
(may be different depending on OS version, computer specifications) to operate stably Windows OS, some installation
problem may be raised.
2. Please note the below for installation under Windows Vista.
(1) To install XP-Builder, log-in with Administrator account all the time.
(2) Security process is needed after installation as below.
2.1) Click Start->Settings and execute a control board
2.2) Click Control Panel
Æ User accounts
Chapter 1 How to Start
1-14
2.3) Click the user accounts from User Accounts settings screen.
2.4) Click the menu Turn User Account Control on or off -> User Account Setting screen.

Chapter 1 How to Start
1-15
2.5) Cancel the menu at the “Turn User Account Control On or Off” screen
3. Please note the below for installation under Windows 7
(1) Install the XP-Builder with Administrator account
(2) After installation, security setting is needed as follows.
3.1) Execute the control panel
3.2) Click “Control Panel
Æ User account and family protection” icon
3.3) Click “User account” icon at the user account setting screen.
3.4) Click “Change user account control setting” at the “User account
Æ User account setting screen”
3.5) Set the user account control as [Don’t notify] at the user account control setting screen.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-1
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2.1 Overview of XGT Panel
2.1.1 Introduction of XGT Panel
XGT Panel is a graphic control device which can monitor and control the PLC and control device of various makers including
our company’s PLC. You can monitor the information of each control as you set in the tool by arranging various figures and
objects on the screen through an editing tool for transferring data to XGT Panel, setting them simply and transferring them to
XGT Panel. In addition, simple control is also available through the switch and writing object. Moreover, XGT Panel provides
advanced functions such as scripts, loggings, recipes and alarms so that diverse needs of uses can be met.
2.1.2 Data Displayed in XGT Panel
XGT Panel transfers and displays a variety of objects and figures through XP Builder, an editing tool. In more detail, XGT
Panel creates a project in the XP Builder tool, arranges the switch, lamp and numeric/text input and output devices on the
screen and sets the address and action for each of them (setting, unsetting, adding, subtracting). When necessary, you can
set the condition of more details. You can check whether the switch, lamp, numeric/text input and output device which are
arranged on the screen are operating as you have set through communication to XGT Panel by media such as Ethernet or
serial.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-2

2.1.3 Examples of Simple Operation of XGT Panel
The following is examples of operation of the XGT Panel connected with the programmed PLC.
Ladder Program
Operating lamp setting
-Bit
-reading device P00010
Stop switch setting
-On only when pressed
-writing device P00001
Operating switch setting
-On only when pressed
-writing device P00000
Numeric output setting
-Word, unsigned decimal
-reading device D00010

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-3
An example of an action:
MOV K123 D10
P0 P1 P10
P10
P10
동작버튼을 누른다
P0가 켜진다
MOV K123 D10
P0 P1 P10
P10
P10
P10
이 켜진다
램프가 켜진다
.
MOV K123 D10
P0 P1 P10
P10
P10
123
D10에 저장된다
123이 나타난다

MOV K123 D10

P0 P1 P10
P10
P10
If you press stop button, the lamp is turned off
P0 is on, P1 is off
(1) If you press the ‘Start’ button on the left,
the bit device is turned on.
(2) With the bit device PO being on, the
bit device P10 is turned on. The
operating lamp set as P10 is turned
on.
(3) If the P10 bit is turned on, 123 are
saved in the word device D10.
Now, 123 are displayed on the
numeric display device set as D10.
(4) If you click on Stop touch switch, the bit
device P1 set in the Stop button is
turned on. Bit device P1 is the condition
in which P10 is turned off, so the
operating lamp set as P10 is turned off.
Press operating button
P0 is on
Lamp is on
P10 is on
123 shows up
123 is saved at the D10

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-4

2.2 Basics of XGT Panel
Follow the examples to get a rough idea how to use XGT Panel.
2.2.1 Project Creation
(1) Project Creation
[Procedure]
(a) Select Project – New Project in the menu.
(b) Select the XGT Panel type, the PLC product to connect and its maker.
Note
(1) The PLC product and maker you select here are the basic settings. If you want to add an additional PLC, select and use
1:N connections in Menu
ÆCommonÆProject Property SettingÆXGT Panel Settings.
In the following example, XP30-TTA has been selected as the device type and the GM (CPU) of LSIS has been selected as
the PLC. Detailed communication settings are conducted in the project properties dialog box. Press the OK button after setting.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-5
As the project is created, the following basic window is invoked at the center of the frame of XP Builder.
2.2.2 Project Properties Change
When a project is created, the basic properties are accompanied. However, to set a parameter such as communication or to
configure a project as you want, be sure to change the project properties. The following is the procedure of adjusting the
communication parameter of the project.
[Procedure]
(a) Select Project Property Setting in the common menu.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-6

The following project information dialog box is invoked on the screen.
(b) If you click on [XGT Panel Settings], the second tab of the dialog box, the following text boxes is displayed.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-7
(c) To change the current transfer speed of RS-232C, this is the default access setting, click on [Detail Settings]. As the access
method of RS-232C is serial, the following serial setting dialog box is invoked.
(d) Change the transfer speed from 38400 to 19200 and click on the OK button.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-8

(e) Now the serial setting dialog box is closed. Click on the OK button to finish the settings.
2.2.3 Screen Creation and Properties Change
(1) Screen Creation
The screen is the area where you can put figures and objects, so the first thing you have to do after creating a project is create
a screen.
The initial display refers to the screen that first appears when you have transferred the project you have configured in XGT
Panel. The initial display can be set only from the basic screens that you have configured.
From now on, we are going to follow the procedure of creating window #2 and setting it as the initial display.
(For details, see Chapter 3.)
[Procedure]
(a) Press the right button on the mouse on the project list and select [Insert] or click on the hot key.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-9
(b) The following screen is created and a tab of which the name is B-2 is also added.
(c) As shown below, [2 Base screen] has been added to the project list.
(d) To change the initial display number to 2, press the right button on the mouse on [2 Base screen] in the project list and then
select [As Start Screen] or press the function key [F2] on the keyboard.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-10

The [2 Base screen] caption in the project list is now shown in bold characters.
(2) Check and Change of Screen Properties
XP-Builder provides the function of changing the screen properties such as the background color and background image
specification of the created window. You can check the properties of the display and change the background color in the
following method.
You can check the properties of the screen as shown below.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the right button on the mouse on a point of the space of the window such as the base screen, window screen or part
screen.
(b) Click on [Screen Property] or press Alt + C.
(c) The following dialog box is invoked to display the information on the properties of the screen.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-11
The description of each dialog box is as follows.

Type Description
Screen type(a) The type of the current window such as the base screen, window screen or part screen is indicated
Screen No(b) The number of the present window is indicated.
Screen name(c) Indicates the specified name in the project tree
Window title(d) Available at window screen. Indicates the window title when window object appears.
From text table(e) Available at window screen. You can get the text from text table for window title not inputting text
directly.
Text table(f) Available at window screen. If you press this button, the text table dialog box appears where you can
select text.
Font (g) Available at window screen. In case of inputting the window title directly, you can select the font from
combo box. And in case of inputting the window title from text table, font of text table is indicated at the
combo box.
Description(h) The user can enter the description on the display and the description previously entered is also
shown.
Memory size(i) The size of the memory currently used in the window is indicated in the unit of Byte.
Screen size(j) The width and height of the present window is indicated.

a
b
c
d
h
e
g
f
i
j

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-12

In addition to the display properties, you can change the current background color of the screen to blue as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the right button on the mouse on a point of the space of the window such as the base screen, window screen or part
screen. Click on [Screen Property] or press Alt + C.
(b) The following dialog box is invoked to display the information on the properties of the display.
(c) Click on [Background] and then [Use BG Color].
(d) You can set the [FG color (Foreground Color)] and [BG color (Background Color)]. Set the background color as blue and
as pattern #1.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-13
Note
(1) The relationship between the pattern number and foreground and background colors is as follows.

Pattern Number Application
Pattern 1 Pattern not used
Pattern 2 The background color applied to all the patterns.
Pattern 3 The foreground color applied to all the patterns.
Pattern 4~42 The background and foreground colors apply to the background and foreground
colors of the pattern respectively.

#1 #2 #3
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-14

2.2.4 Screen Editing
Screen editing refers to configuring the contents of the window. That is, this is arranging the dynamic objects changing the
address value of the control or expressing the value of the control through connection with the figures and the static objects
changing the window background or deliver information and the PLC control as the user wants
Below, we are going to make some simple base screens consisting of a RoundRect, Text, Switch, Lamp and Number input
device.
(1) Drawing a RoundRect
You can edit a RoundRext on the screen as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [RoundRect] in [Tool Box]-[Diagram].
(b) Drag the figure until it becomes as large as you want and place the figure at a desired point.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-15
(c) Modify the ‘Fill’ properties as follows in the dialog box invoked when you release the mouse button and then click on the
OK button.
Note
(1) You cannot select the texture in XP30-BTA.
(d) The properties of the RoundRect has been changed as shown below.
(2) Drawing a Text
You can edit a Text on the screen as follows.
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-16

[Procedure]
(a) Select the Text in the tool box.
(b) Put the Text in the RoundRect.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-17
(c) Modify the ‘text’ properties as follows in the dialog box invoked when you release the mouse button and then click on the
OK button.
(d) The properties of the Text (text, font, size) have been changed in the window. Adjust the size of the Text so that the entire
text is shown.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-18

(3) Bit Lamp Setting
You can edit the bit lamp, which is an object expressing the address value and state of the PLC control through connection to
the address of the PLC control, as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Bit Lamp] in [Tool Box].
(b) Drag the bit lamp until it becomes as large as you want and place the figure at a desired point.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-19
(c) Modify the basic properties of the bit lamp as follows in the dialog box invoked when you release the mouse button and
then click on the OK button.
(d) Modify the [Display] properties of the bit lamp as follows and click on the OK button.
The settings are now shown in the display.
Set the address as %MX0.
Press the library button and change the image
corresponding to On as shown.
Press the library button and change the image
corresponding to Off as shown.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-20

(4) Bit Switch Setting
You can edit the bit switch, which is an object expressing the address value and state of the PLC control through connection
to the address of the PLC control, as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Bit Switch] in [Tool Box].
(b) Drag the bit switch until is becomes as large as the bit lamp.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-21
(c) When the dialog box is invoked, modify the basic properties of the bit switch and press the OK button.
(d) Modify the properties of the [Text] of the bit switch and press the OK button.
Select %MX0 as the device
address and Alternative as the
Action type.
Enter On as the caption of the On state. Enter Off as the caption of the Off state.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-22

(5) Word Lamp Setting
You can edit the word lamp, which is an object expressing the address value and state of the PLC control through connection
to the address of the PLC control, as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Word Lamp] in [Tool Box].
(b) Drag the word lamp until it is properly far from the bit switch.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-23
(c) Modify the basic properties of the word lamp as follows in the dialog box invoked when you release the mouse button.
(d) The list is created in the Case List of the [Basic] item.
Set the device as %MW0.
Add the case list by using the range
editing dialog box invoked when you
press the folder button.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-24

You can enter the first item of the case list above in the range editing dialog box as follows.
Now you should enter the display information of each condition.
Each of the three condition lists can have their own lamp state and up to four states as well if the scope beyond it is included.
(e) Create a list in the case list of the [Display] item. You can set the pattern and color of the lamp for the case corresponding
to each case list of the display item.
This is the lamp setting for the value corresponding to the basic case, that is, the three conditions above.
- Set the image type as [Sample Image & Change Color/Pattern] and select the second pattern, which
means expressing the entire image in the pattern background color.
For details on image types, see 16.2 Display Function Settings of Chapter 16 Object Setting.
Press operand A and enter the fixed value 100.
Press operand B and click on the $V (reference device)
radio button.
Press operand C and enter the fixed value 200.
The $V (reference device) refers to %MW0 which has been
set in the basic item.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-25
This is the lamp setting for case 1, that is, the first of the case list above.
Set the pattern as ‘hatch 27’, the foreground as white, background blue and frame color as yellow.
This is the lamp setting for case 2, that is, the second of the case list above. Use the first pattern. The
green color here consists of phases according to the saturation and value. This is the HSV vector
image processing method which changes only the color factors of the original image to green and
maintains the value and saturation of the original image.
z HSV: the method of expression colors in the computer. (Hue, Saturation, Value)
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-26

After setting is finished, click on the OK button.
This is the lamp setting for case 3, that is, the third of the condition list above. Set the pattern as ‘hatch20’
in the form of sloped lattice, pattern foreground color as blue, background color as sky-blue and frame
color as the jade color.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-27
(6) Numeric Input Device Setting
The following is the procedure of setting the numeric input device, the last object in this chapter. The numeric input device has
two functions of output (reading device) and input (writing device) at the same time as its basic operation. It usually expresses
the value of a particular address of the control, but when the user clicks on the object to write a value in the connected device,
a keypad dialog box is invoked so that the value can be entered.
(a) Select the numeric input device in the object tool box.
(b) Drag the Numeric Input until it becomes properly far from word lamp.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-28

(c) Set the properties of the numeric input in the dialog box as follows and click on the OK button.
2.2.5 Case and Address Check
Case and address check is the function of previewing the major properties of the case in order to reduce input errors of the
previously set data. You can check the basic address or case properties (e.g. color or caption of the lamp) of the set control in
advance without transferring them to XGT Panel. Therefore, if you have finished editing each object, you can reduce errors by
checking the case or address in order to confirm the setting information of each object.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-29
(1) Case Check
(a) Click on the On/Off tool bar twice in the information tool bar to check the bit case.
What you entered at On and Off is displayed on the screen respectively when you press the object On/Off tool bar.
Off On
(b) To check the case of the word lamp, while changing the case in the ’condition no. of word object’ combo box of the
information tool bar as follows, check whether the color and pattern of the lamp is changed on the screen as you set above.
(2) Address Check
Address check is the function or previewing the major addresses which you have entered on the screen in advance without
clicking on and checking them one by one.
To check the major addresses of the object, click on the ‘Toggle the object addrs’ twice in the information tool bar.
Basic Case
Address Viewer Off Address Viewer On
Condition 1 Case Condition 2 Case
Condition 3 Case

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-30

2.2.6 Project Saving and Data Error Check
After you have finished editing, you should save the project.
(1) Project Saving
(a) Select Project – Save Project in the menu.
(b) When the saving dialog box is invoked, select the folder, enter the file name and click on the Save button.
(2) Project Error Check
If there is an error in the project, it cannot be transferred to XGT Panel. Therefore, you can enhance the efficiency by checking
whether there is any error in the data and if any, modifying it before transferring it.

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-31
(a) Select Tool – Data Check.
(b) The output box and output window is activated to display the errors. If there are no errors, a message appears to say that
0 number of errors and 0 number of warnings have occurred as shown below. If there is any error, double-click on the relevant
line and then you can shift to the screen and object where the error is. Modify the error and click on ‘Data Check’ to check the
error.
(
For details on errors, see Appendix 2. Problems)
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-32

2.2.7 Simulation and Transfer
(1) Simulation
Simulation is the function of checking the appropriateness of the data before it is transferred to the XGT Panel and predicting
the operation of the control. If the project has been saved and it has been confirmed that there is no error, you can predict the
operation and response of the control through the simulator in advance.
(a) Select [Tool]-[Simulation]. As shown below, a simulation window is invoked in the same resolution as when it was
downloaded in XGT Panel except the main menu and title.
(b) Click on the bit button to check the operation.
(c) Enter some values randomly, say, 100,200,300 and 400 in the numeric input device.
1) Touch the numeric input device on the simulator, enter 100 and click on the Enter key (on the keypad).
If you click on the bit button, the left bit lamp
light is turned on.
If you click on the bit button once again, the left bit lamp light
is turned off because it is an alternative switch.
Case Condition 1: 0 < $V <= 100

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-33
As the word lamp color meets the first case of the case conditions which were set above, the lamp is displayed in the color
and pattern as it was set.
2) Touch the numeric input device on the simulator, enter 200 and click on the Enter key.
3) Touch the numeric input device on the simulator, enter 300 and click on the Enter key.
4) Touch the numeric input device on the simulator, enter 400 and click on the Enter key.
Case Condition
1: 100< $V <= 200
Case Condition 1: 200< $V <= 300
Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-34

(2) Data Transfer
After the window editing has been finished and if you have found no error, check whether it normally operates by transferring
data to XGT Panel. The following is the procedure of transferring data to XGT Panel.
(a) Transfer Setting
1) Select [Communication]-[Send] in the menu.
The following communication dialog box is invoked. If the previously set connection information is the same as the information
you are currently transferring, click on the ‘Download’ button in the illustration below. Otherwise, set the connection information
in the same procedure as 2).

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel
2-35
2) Click on [Communication Settings].

Function Description
Connecting method (a) Setting Serial and Ethernet. The default value is set as Ethernet.
Detailed settings(b) Detailed settings area based on current connecting type. While Ethernet can display the
established IP and Port, RS232 can set up COM Port and transmission speed.
1:1 Connection(c) When there are different PC and XP Panel for former 3 digits from IP
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, 1:1 connection is recommended.
Search(d) It is used to search for XGT Panel list that can be connected now. The function is
available only under Ethernet, which shows the list of all XP Panels that can be sent.
Press the check box of light side to select IP to be transmitted and press ‘OK button.

(b) Transfer of Project and Execution Data
1) Select Transfer Project.
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
d
e
f g

Chapter 2 Overview and Basics of XGT Panel

2-36

 

Function Description
Download to XGT Panel (a) It is to send the project through Communication(Ethernet, RS_-32C)
Download project all forcibly (b) Normally, XP-Builder judges if it sends only revised project or whole project through its
internal algorithm. If the function is activated, the whole project will be sent.
Update XP-Runtime forcibly (c) Normally, XP-Builder judges if it sends engine files of XP-Runtime folder in the
installed XP-Builder through its internal algorithm. If the function is activated, the files
will be sent.
Save to removable device (d) It is to save the project to external equipment including USB based on Offline type by
inserting UPB into the devices.
Delete all monitoring data(e) The option is to judge if it deletes or reserves the alarm, logging, recipe data saved at
SRAM of XP Panel.
Include upload project file(f) The option is to send the compressed data for upload. To set up the saving position of
these uploaded files, refer to Chap.13.7 ‘Setting storage devices’.
Download (g) It starts sending the project based on user’s setting.

2) Click on the OK button, check the cables and check whether the data is being transferred to XGT Panel.
If it is not transferred, see the Troubleshooting or Manual.
3) Check whether what you edited in XGT Panel and checked in the simulator is all displayed and operated.
Send
Write
Backup Read
Backup
Receive

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-1

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder
3.1 Display Composition
The display of XP-Builder has the following composition.
[Dialog Box]
a

b
c g f k j
d h
h
l m
e
i

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-2

[Description of Dialog Box]

Item Description
Title Displays the path name and window number.
Menu (a) The basic menu for the program.
Tools (b) Provides methods of conveniently executing the menu.
Project window (c) Displays the components of the currently opened project.
Data view (d) Displays the ID and location information of the objects and figures.
Status bar (e) Displays the state of XP Builder, product name of the XGT Panel, information of the connected PLC,
location of the mouse pointer and location and size of the object. Displays the progress bar during
transferring or saving as well.
Tool box (f) Gives tools that you can use to select and edit various objects.
Graphic library (g) Has various image registered in the system library and is used as the background image of a figure or
object. It provides the user library and can be registered or deleted whenever necessary.
Object library (h) Provides frequently used objects and their combinations as the system library. It provides the user
library and can be registered or deleted whenever necessary.
Output bar (i) Consists of the message box displaying errors and user interface messages and the [Find Result 1]
and [Find result 2] boxes which displays the result of search.
Editing window (j) The window where you can edit objects and figures and can give the screen properties.
Device map(k) Provides information on the device used in the entire project as map type
Script tool box(l) Helps make script by providing the script-related control sentence and function list
Property viewer(m) Displays the properties of diagram, object and helps change them individually or simultaneously.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-3

3.2 Menu Composition
If you select a menu, commands appear and you can execute them by clicking on them with the mouse or using the keyboard. If
there are hot keys in the menu, you can use the keys to execute the command.
(1) Project

Command Description
New Project Creates a new project.
Open Project Opens an existing project.
Save Project Saves the present project.
Save As Project Saves the present project as another name.
Close Project Closes the project.
Base screen Adds a new basic screen to the project. Action menu
(Item addition)
Window Screen Adds a new window screen to the project.
Part Screen Adds a new part screen to the project.
Text Table Adds a new Text table to the project.
History Alarm Adds a new history alarm to the project.
Recipe Adds a new recipe to the project.
Script Adds a new script to the project.
Print Prints the contents of the activated window.
Print Preview You can previews what is going to be printed.
Project Print Selects and prints an item of the project.
Print setting Sets the printer option.
Project Password Sets the password in the current project.
Exit Ends XP-Builder.

(2) Edit

Command Description
Undo Cancels editing in the program editing window and goes back to the previous
display.
Redo Restores the action of which the editing has been cancelled.
Delete Deletes a block or selected item.
Cut Copies a block in the clip board while deleting the block.
Copy Copies a block in the clip board.
Paste Paste the selected item in the editing window from the clip board.
Multi Copy Copies multiple figures or objects at a time.
Select All Make a block of all the contents of the currently activated window.
Delete All Delete all the contents of the currently activated window.
Group Groups the selected figures, objects or groups. Grouping
UnGroup Ungroups a group.
Rotate left Turns the selected figure, object or group anticlockwise by 90 degrees. Rotate or Flip
Rotate Right Turns the selected figure, object or group clockwise by 90 degrees.
Flip Horizontal Moves the selected figure, object or group to the opposite side horizontally.
Flip Vertical Moves the selected figure, object or group to the opposite side vertically.
Align Left Aligns the selected figures at the left. Align
Align Center Aligns the selected figures at the center.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-4

 

Command Description
Align Right Aligns the selected figures at the right. Align
Align Top Aligns the selected figures at the top.
Align Middle Aligns the selected figures at the middle.
Align Bottom Aligns the selected figures at the bottom.
Bring to Front Moves the selected figure, object or group to the first. Order
Send to Back Moves the selected figure, object or group to the last.
Bring Forward Moves the selected figure, object or group forward.
Send Backward Moves the selected figure, object or group backward.
Width Adjusts the width of the two or more selected figures, objects or groups so that their
widths become as long as the longest one of them.
Make Same Size
Height Adjusts the width of the two or more selected figures, objects or groups so that their
heights become as long as the longest one of them.
Both Adjusts the width of the two or more selected figures, objects or groups so that their
widths and heights become as long as the longest one of them.
Horizontal Moves the two or more selected figures, objects or groups to the horizontal center of
the screen.
Center in Page
Vertical Moves the two or more selected figures, objects or groups to the vertical center of
the screen.
Across Moves the two or more selected figures, objects or groups so that the horizontal
space between each of them is equal.
Space Evenly
Down Moves the two or more selected figures, objects or groups so that the vertical space
between each of them is equal.
Snap to grid Places objects or figures within the grid.
Glue to Guide Line Arranges the figure or object on the guide line. Glue
Glue to Handles Arranges the figure or object at the handle.
Glue to Verties Arranges the figure or object at the vertex.
Glue to Intersect
Point
Arranges the figure or object at the intersection.
First Point As Center You can make the point on which you clicked the center of an object or figure.
Nudge Left Moves the selected figure, object or group to the left by a dot. Nudge
Nudge Right Moves the selected figure, object or group to the right by a dot.
Nudge Up Moves the selected figure, object or group up by a dot.
Nudge Down Moves the selected figure, object or group down by a dot.
Position/Scale change Changes the location and size of the object or figure.

(3) Tool Box

Command Description
Bit Switch Enters the mode of drawing the bit switch.
Word Switch Enters the mode of drawing the word switch.
Special Switch Enters the mode of drawing the special switch.
Change Screen Switch Enters the mode of drawing the display switching switch.
Multi Switch Enters the mode of drawing the multi switch.
Bit Lamp Enters the mode of drawing the bit lamp.
Word Lamp Enters the mode of drawing the word lamp.
N-state Lamp Enters the mode of drawing the N-state lamp.
Clock Enters the mode of drawing the clock.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-5

 

Command Description
Bit Message Enters the mode of drawing the bit message.
Word Message Enters the mode of drawing the word message.
Numeric Display Enters the mode of drawing the number output.
Numeric Input Enters the mode of drawing the number input.
Text Display Enters the mode of drawing the character output.
Text Input Enters the mode of drawing the character input.
Animation Enters the mode of drawing the animation.
Bit Window Enters the mode of drawing the bit window.
Word Window Enters the mode of drawing the word window.
Bit Part Enters the mode of drawing the bit part.
Word Part Enters the mode of drawing the word part.
Bar Graph Enters the mode of drawing the bar graph.
Pie Graph Enters the mode of drawing the pie graph.
Trend Graph Enters the mode of drawing the trend graph.
Logging trend graph Enters the mode of drawing the logging trend graph
Scatter graph Enters the mode of drawing the real-time scatter graph or logging scatter graph
Meter Graph Enters the mode of drawing the meter graph.
Closed Graph Enters the mode of drawing the closed graph.
History Alarm Viewer Enters the mode of drawing the history graph viewer.
Datalist Enters the mode of drawing the data list viewer.
Logging Viewer Enters the mode of drawing the logging viewer.
Alarm Navigator Enters the mode of drawing the alarm navigator.
Memo pad Enters the mode of drawing the memo pad
Recipe navigator Enters the mode of drawing the recipe navigator (file or basic recipe)
Data list editor Enters the mode of drawing the data list editor
File recipe editor Enters the mode of drawing the file recipe editor
Line Enters the mode of drawing the straight line.
Circle Enters the mode of drawing the circle.
Pie Enters the mode of drawing the pie.
Chord Enters the mode of drawing the chord.
Multi line Enters the mode of drawing the multi line.
Polygon Enters the mode of drawing the polygon.
Ellipse Enters the mode of drawing the ellipse.
Rectangle Enters the mode of drawing the rectangle.
RoundRect Enters the mode of drawing the round rectangle.
Text Enters the mode of drawing the text.
Image Enters the mode of drawing the image.
Scale Enters the mode of drawing the scale.

(4) View

Command Description
Toolbars Displays or hides the tool bar.
Status bar Displays or hides the status bar.
Project Displays or hides the project.
Tool Box Displays or hides the tool box.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-6

 

Command Description
Data Viewer Displays or hides the data component window.
Property Viewer Displays or hides the property viewer
Output Bar Displays or hides the output window.
Graphic Library Displays or hides graphic library window.
Object Library Displays or hides object library window.
Device Map Displays or hides device map window.
Script Toolbox Displays or hides script toolbox.
Pan Window Displays or hides Pan window.
Screen Thumbnails Displays or hides thumbnail.
Grid Displays or hides the grid.
Grid Setting Sets the alignment and girding methods.
Margin Line Displays or hides the space line.
Guide Line Displays or hides the guide line.
Show Shape Center Displays or hides the center of an object or figure.
IME Displays or hides the IME.
Auto Pan Displays the hidden screen by scroll.
Zoom to 25% Zooms an object or figure by 25%. Zoom
Zoom to -25% Collapses an object or figure by 20%.
Zoom to 50% Collapses an object or figure by 50%.
100% Maintains an object or figure by 100%.
200% Zooms an object or figure by 200%.
Within Rectangle Justifies an object or figure to the set area.
Page Width Justifies an object or figure to the page width.
Page Height Justifies an object or figure to the page height.
Whole Page Justifies an object or figure to the full page.
Fit Selection Justifies an object or figure to the set area.
Show/Hide Object ID Displays or hides the object ID.
Show/Hide Object address Displays or hides the device address of the object.
Show/Hide Object On/Off Displays the device value of the object when it is 0 or 1.
Redraw Updates the window.

(5) Common

Command Description
Project Property Setting Sets the project data.
Recipe Setting Sets the recipe data.
Tag Setting Sets the tag data.
Scheduler Setting Sets the reservation.
Logging Setting Sets the logging data.
Flow Alarm Sets the flow alarm. Alarm Setting
History Alarm Sets the history alarm.
System Alarm Checks the contents of the system alarm.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-7

(6) Tools

Command Description
Cross Reference Displays the devices used.
Find in active screen Searches for a device in the activated window.
Replace in active screen Changes the retrieved device.
Find/replace All Retrieves all the devices in the area specified by the user or changes all the devices
Memory Statistics Displays the device memory status which has been used.
Data Check Checks the errors of the display data and common data configured by the user.
Script Check Checks errors of scripts.
Find all script Finds All scripts such as global script and script used in screen, object
Register object caption to text table
automatically
Creates the text table and registers the static caption or static character string of
diagram text automatically to text table
Option Specifies related options of the editing color and work space.
Customization The user can set the tool bar as he wishes.
Simulation Simulates the display data configured by the user in the PC.
Previous screen Activates previous screen
Next screen Activates next screen
Export Font Exports all fonts used in the current project into user-specified folder
Install Font Takes the font from user-specified folder and registers it as window font
Starting a XP-PD Configuration tool for Optional board such as XPO-EIMT

(7) Communication

Command Description
Comm. setting Sets communication with XGT Panel.
Send Sends data to XGT Panel.
Receive Receives data from XGT Panel.
XGT Panel Information Displays information on XGT Panel
XGT Panel Update Upgrades the XGT Panel S/W.

(8) Window

Command Description
Close All Closes all the windows of XP-Builder.
Window manger Activate, save or close window.

(9) Help

Command Description
About XP-Builder You can view some information such as the XP Builder version information.
Help You can view help.
Update You can check whether the current version is the latest and update it.
LSIS Online Moves to the home page of the LSIS.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-8

3.3 Title Bar

Item Description
Path name (a) Displays the path name and window title of an opened project.
If it is closed, nothing is displayed.
Minimize (b) You can minimize the window.
Recover/maximize (c) You can either maximize the window or recover the window by using the icon.
Close (d) Closes the program.

3.4 Status Bar

Item Description
Message (a) Displays the message describing the job currently conducted by XP Builder.
Progress bar (b) Displays the progress rate of project saving or opening or executable file saving.
XGT Panel model type (c) Displays the selected type of the present project of the XGT Panel types.
Control name (d) Displays the name of the selected control.
If there are multiple controls in a single project, the control of the device tab in the project
properties dialog or the control selected as the wizard is displayed.
Mouse pointer location (e) Displays the coordinate of the mouse pointer.
top and left Coordinates of an
object or figure (f)
Displays the top and left coordinates of a selected object or figure.
Width and height of an object or
figure (g)
Indicates the height of a selected object or figure.
CAP/NUM/SCRL (h) If one of Caps Lock/Num Lock/Scroll Lock is pressed, the characters are shown in bold
style.

a b c d e f g h
a
b c d

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-9

3.5 Docking Window
All the windows in the viewer menu (project window, result window, library window, etc.) can be docked. You can adjust the position
and size of the window by using the mouse and docking is available at any position.
You can also keep the docking window floating or set it so that it is automatically hidden.
(1) Docking Window Movement
The following illustrates the docking position guides shown when you move the tool window. If you move the tool window as
shown below, the docking guide appears in the window. If you take the window near the docking guide, you can easily dock it at
a desired position.
Docking location
Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-10

(2) Change to Floating Window
Select [Floating] by pressing the right button on the mouse on the docking window title or clicking on the arrow-shaped button at
the bottom.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-11

(3) Automatic Hiding Mode
To have the window automatically hidden, press the right button on the mouse on the desired docking window title and select
[Auto Hide] in the menu or click on the pin-shaped button in the docking window as shown below to shift to the hiding mode.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-12

3.6 Screen Tap Group
It is the function to edit multi-screen at the same time. If the screen is divided into several tab groups, it is possible to edit the
multi screens simultaneously and move the screen freely by dragging and dropping tab groups.
(1) Creating horizontal tab groups
Click right mouse button at the tab and select [New horizontal tab group] and then, you can see the screen will be divided
into new horizontal tab groups.
(2) Creating vertical tab groups
Click the tab with a right mouse button and select [New vertical tab group]. Then, you can see the screen will be divided into
new vertical tab groups.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-13

(3) Moving to next tab group
It is used to move to other tab groups from the current tab groups. Furthermore, it can be dropped into other tab groups by
dragging the tap of the intended screen.
(4) Moving to previous tab groups
It is used to move to the previous tab groups from the current tab groups. Furthermore, it can be dropped into other tab
groups by dragging the tap of the intended screen.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-14

3.7 User Specific
3.7.1 Tool Bar
XP-Builder provides icons of frequently used menus.
[Tool Bar]
(1) New Tool Bar Creation
You can make a new tool bar by grouping the tools you frequently use.
[Dialog Box]

Item Description
Toolbars (a) You can set the tool bar so that it is displayed or hidden by checking or leaving
unchecked the check box before the name of each tool bar.
Reset (b) Initializes the tool bar.
Reset All (c) Sets the basic font size displaying the ID and address of the device and object.
New (d) Creates a new tool bar.
Rename (e) Changes the name of the tool bar which the user has made.
Delete (f) Deletes the tool bar which the user has made.
Show text labels (g) Displays the name of the tool bar.

b
c
a
d
f
e
g

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-15

[Procedure]
(a) Select [Tool]-[Customization]-[Toolbars] in the menu.
(b) Click on [New].
(c) When the dialog box for entering the tool bar name, enter the desired name.
(d) Press the OK button. Then an empty tool box is created and ‘TEST’, which is a new tool bar, is added to the tool bar list.
(2) Filling Tool Bar
This is the command tab of the user specific dialog box. You can create a new tool bar by configuring new commands.
[Dialog Box]
a
b
c

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-16

 

Item Description
Categories (a) Arranges the menu list.
Command (b) Arranges the list of commands belonging to the same menu.
User tool bar (c) You can add a new tool by dragging a desired command on the user tool box.

The following describes the procedure of filling the tool bar created in (1) with commands.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Commands].
(b) Drag a desired command and place it on the tool box created above.
(c) Repeat (2) until you finish adding all desired commands.
(d) When finished, press the Close button.
3.7.2 Shortcut Key Setting
You can set a shortcut key for all commands. In such a case, the previously specified shortcut key is deleted.
[Dialog Box]
a
b
c
d
e
f

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-17

 

Item Description
Category (a) Select the menu of which the hot key want to specify in the scope list.
Current Keys (b) Displays the currently allotted key.
Press New Shortcut Key (c) Enter a new hot key here if you want.
Assign (d) A new hot key entered for the selected menu is allotted.
Remove (e) Deletes the present hot key.
Reset All (f) Deletes all the user hot keys and sets all the hot keys by default.

[Procedure]
(a) Select the keyboard tab in [Tool]-[Customization] in the menu.
(b) Select the category of which the hot key to set in the menu selection list.
(c) Enter the hot key you want. For example, if you would like to specify Ctrl + H, hold the Ctrl key and press H. Now the hot key
is shown in the editing window. If this combination of keys is already being used, a message pops up saying that it has
already been allotted and the hot key cannot be selected.
(d) Click on [Assign].
(e) Click on [Close].
Message displaying the allotment status
Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-18

3.7.3 Tool Box Option Setting
You can set options of the menu or tool box.
[Dialog Box]

Item Description
Show Screen Tips on toolbars (a) Displays the tool tip when the mouse pointer stays in the tool bar.
Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips (b) Displays the hot key when the mouse pointer stays in the tool bar.
Large Icons (c) Displays the tool bar icons in a big size.
Menus show recently used commands
first (d)
Displays the lately used menu only
Show full menus after a short delay (e) Displays the full menu after a short period of time when d) is set.

[Example of ‘Show Screen Tips on toolbars’]
[Example of ‘Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips’]
a
b
c
d
e
If you place the mouse pointer on the simulation tool, a tool tip saying ‘simulation’ is
displayed.
If you place the mouse pointer on the tool for canceling execution, a tool tip saying
‘Undo (Ctrl + Z)’ is displayed.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-19

[Example of a Big Icon]
[Example of ‘Menus show recently used commands first
]
[Example of ‘Show full menus after a short delay’]
As shown above, if ‘Menus show recently used commands first
is set, the menu is displayed like the left image, but if you stop
holding the mouse button, the full menu is unfolded after a short period of time.
All the menus except only the lately used menu ([Send]) in the communication
menu on the left are not hidden.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-20

3.8 Option
3.8.1 Editing Option
You can set the editing option.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Tool]-[Option] in the menu.
(b) Select the color tab of [Default Color]
[Dialog Box]
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-21

[Description of Dialog Box]

Item Description
Object ID/Address Text Color (a) Sets the basic color displaying the device and object ID.
Background AlphaBlend Use (b) Indicates the ID color of a device and object semi-transparently on the white
background
Object ID/Address Font Size (c) Sets the default font size displaying the device and object ID and address.
Default Text Color of Diagram/Object (d) Sets the basic color of the character string figure or object containing character
properties.
Default Line Color of Diagram/Object (e) Sets the basic color of the figure or object containing line properties.
Use background color from new screen (f) Uses the background color which is applied from new screen
Default BG color from new screen (g) Sets the background color which is applied from new screen
Screen Limit Check on Object/Diagram’s
Editing (h)
Allows object and diagram to go out of the screen or not. If you check this option,
there is no check on going out of the screen when downloading.

Note
(1) The editing options are applied at the following points of time.
1) (a) (b) (c) (h) apply immediately.
2) (d) (e) apply after the new object or figure is created.
3) (f) (g) apply after a new window is created.

Chapter 3 Composition of XP-Builder

3-22

3.8.2 Project Management Option

Item Description
Show File Dialog At Start Up (a) Decides whether to display the project opening selection dialog box when starting
the program.
Recent Files (b) You can set the maximum number of the lately used file lists.
Auto Save (c) Sets the automatic project saving and saving interval.
Show Property Dialog on New
Diagram/Object (d)
Decides whether to display the properties dialog box when the figure/object is
created.

a
b
c
d

Chapter 4 Project
4-1
Chapter 4 Project
4.1 Project File Management
4.1.1 Creating New Project
You can create a new project.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[New Project] in the menu.
(b) Select the device type and connection controller and click on the OK button.
[Dialog Box Description]

Type Description
XGT Panel Type (a) Selects the XGT Panel type.
Maker (b) Selects the PLC maker.
Product (c) Selects the detailed product name of the controller to be connected with XGT Panel and
monitor the data.
Communication
Settings (d)
Selects the detailed communication settings.

a
d
c
b

Chapter 4 Project

4-2

(c) An empty basic window appears on the screen and the XGT Panel type and controller information set in the dialog box are
displayed in the status bar.
4.1.2 Opening Project
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Open Project] in the menu.
(b) Select the project file and click on the Open button.
Now the file is opened and the progress is displayed in the progress message and progress bar in the status bar just as it was
saved.
The opening process is displayed at the status bar through process message and progress bar like the saving process.
In the title bar, the project path name is displayed and in the status bar, the XGT Panel information and connection control
information of the opened project file are displayed.
[The Message and Progress Bar When a File is being Opened]

Chapter 4 Project
4-3
Note
(1) Back-up
(a) When saving the project, previous project is saved in the back-up file. Extension of back-up file is ‘bak’.
(b) In case you open the project file written in old version builder, when saving the project, project is backed up as old version
form. Backup file name is ‘project name.xpd_V1.00’
(2) When the file is not opened:
(a) You can open the file by dragging and dropping the project file from the search panel to the editing window. If the extension is
not ‘*.xpd’, the following error message is issued and the file stops opening.
(b) Another case when the file is not opened is when the there is an error in the file header although the extension is the same. In
such a case, a message is issued saying ‘The project header information is wrong’ and the progress stops.

The project path name and
information and number of the
opened window are displayed.
The HMI type and control information saved in the
opened project are displayed.
Frame information saved as OSTS file before the project is closed
1. Information of the window opened before the program was
closed
2. Whether to the docking window is displayed, its location and
docking status, hidden mode, tab window status
3. Whether to the tool bar is displayed and its position

Chapter 4 Project

4-4

Note
(1) Extension
(a) The extension of the XP-Builder project file is ‘*.xpd’.
(b) The extension of the backup file is ‘*.bak’.
(c) The extension of the file storing the current project frame status is OSTS.
(d) The extension of the executable file transferred to XGT Panel has a project file name ending with *.hmi.
(e) The extension of the user object library has a library file name ending with *.xpo.
(f) The extension of the user graphic library has a library file name ending with *.xpg.
(g) The export/import extensions of the common data are as follows.

Item File Extension
Text table, recipe, tag .CSV
History alarm .HAL
Flow alarm .FAL
Logging .LOG
Scheduler .SCH
Script .SPT

(2) MRU
MRU refers to the list of frequently used files and the latest used file is displayed in the menu first.
To open a project file, select the menu of the file you want to open.

Chapter 4 Project
4-5
4.1.3 Saving Project
You can save a changed project.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Save Project].
(b) As a new project has never been saved, a saving dialog is displayed.
Choose the location where you want to save, enter the file name and click on the [Save] button. Unless you enter the extension
in the file name, ‘*.xpd’ automatically comes after the file name.
The saving progress is displayed through the progress bar and message of the status bar.
Note
(1) ‘*’ sign
(a) If the ‘*’ sign appears to the right of the project name in the tree in the project window, that means the current project
has been modified.
(b) ‘*’ sign also appears in the window tab of the modified window.
(c) After saving, the ‘*’ sign disappears from the project name and the window tab.

Chapter 4 Project

4-6

4.1.4 Saving As Project
You can save a project as another file name.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Save As Project].
(b) Enter the location and file name to save and click on the Save button.
.
The path name of the project saved as another name is indicated in the title bar as shown below.
4.1.5 Closing Project
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Close Project].
(b) If the project has yet to be saved after being edited, the following message is issued.
If you want to save it, click on Yes and if you click on No, the project is closed without being saved. If you click on Cancel, the
project is not closed.

Chapter 4 Project
4-7
4.2 Project Password
You can prevent others from opening the project file by entering a password in the project file.
Note
(1) The password does not tell the Korean language from English, but tells small letters from capital letters. The password
can be up to 8 letters long.
(2) Note that you cannot open the project file if you forget the password.
4.2.1 Password Setting
You can set a new password for the project in the following procedure.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Project Password].
(b) Enter a new password.
(c) Re-enter in the [Confirm] text box the password which you just entered.
(d) Click on the Apply button.

Chapter 4 Project

4-8

4.2.2 Password Change
You can change the previously set password in the following procedure.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Project Password].
(b) Enter the present password in the Old Password text box.
(c) Enter a new password in the New Password text box.
(d) Re-enter in the [Confirm] text box the password which you just entered.
(e) Click on the Apply button.
4.2.3 Password Deletion
You can delete the password you have used so far in the following procedure.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Project]-[Project Password].
(b) Enter the present password in the Old Password text box.
(c) Click on the Delete button.

Chapter 4 Project
4-9
4.3 Make-up of Project
A project consists of the following items.
[Dialog Box]
[Dialog Box Description]

Item Description
Project (a) Shows the project name.
Project Property (b) Shows the project property. Especially, you can see and set communication setting
and special device setting among project properties.
Screen (c) There are three types of Screens, which are the base screen, window and part.
Base screen (d) The basic editing display
Window (e) A screen where a pop-up or insertion is available
Part (f) A screen used as an auxiliary means of the component object
Text Table (g) Defines the text used at the various objects and alarms.
Script (h) Defines the scripts to be used for various events, an object or schedule.
Tag (i) Gives another name to the device so that it can be used along with its original name.
Scheduler (j) Defines the schedule carried out under a particular condition.
Logging (k) Defines and sets logging

a
b
c
f
n
g
i
o
h
d
e
m
l
k
j

Chapter 4 Project

4-10

 

Item Description
Flow Alarm (l) Defines the flow alarm so that it is displayed at the bottom of the screen when it
occurs.
System Alarm (m) Defines the error items of XGT Panel so that the details can be referred to in case of
an error in XGT Panel.
History Alarm (n) A history alarm refers to an item that can save an alarm data as a history. History
alarms are divided into groups and lists.
Recipe (o) Defines the recipe data.

Note
(1) The window and part screen can be set between 1 and 4096.
(2) Four windows are already specified as key windows, so you can set the window number between 1 ~ 4090.
(3) When a key window is created by default, four types of window of DEC(4091), HEX(4092), ASCII(4093) and FLOAT(4094)
are created and the window number cannot be changed.
(4) History alarms are divided into groups and lists. The height of a list is 4 and there can be up to 32 groups.
(5) The recipe number can range between 1 and 255.
There are tree items where a window and various common components can be inserted in the project window.
Screen insertion is inevitable for project editing. You can insert the base, part and window screens.
A common item refers to an item that can influence the overall project, that is, object editing and overall performance of XGT
Panel.
Among tree items, the logging, recipe, text, tag and script are common items.
Each screen, text, history alarm and recipe can have multiple lower tree items.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-1
Chapter 5 Screen Editing
The basics of editing begin with creating a window and placing an object or figure on it. From now on, we are going to learn the types of
screen and how to edit a window.
5.1 Overview of Screen
There are three types of screen for creating and editing objects and figures provided by XP Builder, which are the base screen, window
screen and part screen. Their features are as follows.

Screen Type Description
Base screen This is the basic screen for editing objects. The screen size is fixed when a project is created.
XGT Panel Resolution
XP30-BTA 320 X 240 pixel, black-and-white 8-color
XP30-TTA 320 X 240 pixel, color 65535-color
XP30-BTE 320 X 240 pixel, black-and-white 8-color
XP30-TTE 320 X 240 pixel, color 256-color
XP50-TTA 640 X 480 pixel, color 65535-color
XP70-TTA 640 X 480 pixel, color 65535-color
XP80-TTA 800 X 600 pixel, color 65535-color
XP90-TTA 1024 X 768 pixel, color 65535-color
Window screen A screen which pops up on the base screen or is combined with it.
Part screen A screen used as a component in the bit part, word part object.

If you have edited a window screen and part screen and edited the bit window and bit part object which respectively invoke the window
screen and part screen created in the basic screen as shown below, the base screen is shown in XGT Panel. If the reference device of
the bit window and bit part is ON, each screen is invoked and shown. That is, you can invoke and use both the window screen and part
screen.
Base screen edited to invoke the window
and part screen
Window screen Part screen

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-2
5.1.1 Base Screen
(1) The base screen is the basic area for editing objects and figures. The screen size is fixed when a project is created.
(2) You can insert a variety of figures and objects in the base screen and you can especially drag and drop base and window
screens. In this case, the screens are directly inserted and shown in the present screen in XGT Panel. However, a screen
cannot be inserted into itself.
(See 6.8 Drag and Drop)
(3) If you drag and drop a part screen in the current screen, the contents of the former are copied as they are.
(4) You can make up to 65534 base screens of which the number ranges between 1 and 65534.
Base screen
The base screen for editing
XGT Panel
Window screen.
The window screen invoked
from the base screen
Part screen
The part screen invoked
from the base screen
drag
Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-3
5.1.2 Window Screen
(1) This is the screen which pops up on the base screen or combined with it.
(2) You can make up to 4090 window screens and those between 4091 and 4094 are allotted as the system key windows.
(3) You cannot create other window objects in a window and like the base screen, you can not only insert a figure or object but
also drag and drop a base screen and window screen.
(See 6.8 Drag and Drop) However, a base or window screen
cannot be inserted into itself.
(4) These screens are shown on the screen through the window objects on the base screen and up to 8 can be inserted or
arranged.
(5) The methods of displaying a window screen on the base screen are the pop-up method and overlap method, which can be
set in the bit window and word window.
(See 17.5 Window Object)
(6) You can close or move a window screen which pops up because it has the Close button and shift bar.
Note
(1) When a popup window appears first in XGT Panel, no shift bar appears. If you want to shift the pop-up window, click on a point
in the space of the window. Then the shift bar and Close button appear and you can move the window screen by using the
shift bar.
(2) If you want to remove the shift bar and Close button, click on a point on the space of the window screen.
(3) You cannot set a window object in the window screen. That is, a window screen cannot display another window screen.
(4) If a window screen has been set beyond the basic window, the part out of the maximum base screen size is cut off. Therefore,
when setting the position of the window screen, check the size the of the window screen before setting the position.
(5) When it comes to a bit window, you can check in advance the size of the window screen by selecting [View]-[Show/Hide Object
On/Off] or clicking on the icon ( ), which makes the window screen shown on the base screen.
(6) When it comes to a word window, if you change the ( ) value in the word status combo box in XP Builder, you can
check in advance the size of the window because the window screen appears on the screen according to the window number
allotted to the conditional sentence.
Shift bar
Window screen without a shift bar.
Click on the space.
The shift bar and Close button
appear.
Close button

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-4
5.1.3 Part Screen
(1) A part screen is an object used as a part in the part object. (See 17.6 Part Object)
(2) You can make up to 65534 part screens of which the number ranges between 1 and 65534.
(3) If you drag and drop an part screen in the current screen, the contents of the former are copied as they are.
(4) You cannot register an object in an part screen.
Note
(1) The differences and restrictions of the base, window and part screens above are as follows.

Type Number of screens Object editing Size adjustment
Base screen 1~ 65534 (65534) O X
Window screen 1~ 65534 (65534) O O
Part screen 1~ 65534 (65534) X O

(2) Window screen 65531~65534 is reserved area. 65531, 65532, 65533, 65534 indicates decimal keypad, HEX keypad, ASCII
key pad, Real key pad respectively.
5.1.4 Key Window Screen
(1) This is a special form of a window which pops up on or overlaps the numeric or text input object when you enter a value
there.
(2) XP-Builder provides four types of key pad, which are decimal, ASCII, hexadecimal and float.
(3) To use a user specific key pad, place it on the window screen by using the special function of the switch object or import and
modify one of the provided object libraries from the keypad library and use it directly.
Key Pad Object Library

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-5
Note
(1) If you want to set the key window number basically used in the text or numeric input devices as the desired window,
change the number in [Key Window Settings] of project properties.
(2) To specify the key window number basically used in the text or numeric input devices or prevent them from popping up
on the screen, set it in the [Detail] item of the text or numeric input devices.
(See [Detail] properties of 17.4.3
Numeric Input Settings or 17.4.5 Text Input Settings)
5.1.5 Global Window Screen
(1) This is a kind of window, but can appear regardless of the window switch of the base screen.
(2) You can set up to two of this screen.
(3) Set the address saving the numbers of ‘Window 1’ and ‘Window 2’ in [Screen Change] in project setting.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-6
If you set the device of the global window in screen change by the device, the device data value indicates the window screen
number. Therefore, if the value of HW0000 is 2, window #2 is the global window and indicated on the base screen regardless of
the screen change. Global window #2 is shown on the base screen in the same manner.
When you use a general window object as shown above, after the window is invoked in screen #1 and the screen changes, the
invoked window screen is no more shown on screen #2.
Unlike a general window object, if you use a global window, the window does not disappear after the screen change and
remains on the base screen.

Screen
Change

Screen #1 Screen #2

Screen
Switch

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-7
5.2 New Window Insertion
The procedure of creating a new window to edit the screen is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the left button on the mouse on the type of screen where you want to create a new window in the project window.
Press the right button on the mouse and select [Insert] or icon I in the menu.
In the case above, a new window is created on the base screen with the minimum number of the empty window numbers
given. That is, say, if basic screens 1 and 3 exist, the number of the newly created window is 2.
Note
(1) Dynamic Menu
You can also create a new window using the dynamic menu.
The dynamic menu refers to the menu changing according to the items of the activated menu in the list, which is the
menu appearing in the context.
The process of creating the base window through the dynamic menu is as follows.
(a) Click on base screen 2 in the list.
(b) Click on the project, which is the main menu.
(c) Among the menus that have popped up, select [Insert Base Screen]. The dynamic menu changes into the
corresponding context menu according to the activated items of the list item. As the basic screen list has been
activated here, [Insert Base Screen] is displayed on the menu.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-8
Meanwhile, click on the window screen and check the [Project] menu in the main menu. You will see the [Insert
window screen] menu.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-9
5.3 Setting as Start Screen
The start screen is the screen that first appears when the screen data is transferred to XGT Panel. In XP Builder, this screen number is
shown in black bold style in the list and the start screen can be chosen only from the base screens. The following is the procedure of
changing the start screen from base screen 1 to base screen 2.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the left button on the mouse on base screen 2 and select [As Start Screen].
Now base screen 1 changes into the normal text style and base screen 2 is shown in bold style. Transfer it to XGT Panel and
check whether screen 2 first appears.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-10
5.4 Opening/Closing Screen
You can open a configured screen or close a screen you have configured.
5.4.1 Opening Screen
[Procedure]
(a) Double-click on the left mouse button on the window you want to open in the project window or click on [Open] in the context
menu.
Note
(1) Opening Screen in Thumbnail
Double-click on the window you want to open among the window lists invoked when you execute [Screen Thumbnails] in the
[View] menu to open the window just like the procedure described above.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-11
5.4.2 Closing Window
Click on the left mouse button on the Close button at the left top of the window you want to close or click on [Close] in the context
menu.
Or Click

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-12
5.5 Renaming
You can change the number and name of the inserted basic, window and part screens.
[Procedure]
(a) Select a desired item in the project window.
(b) Press the right button on the mouse on [Rename] in the menu.
(c) Change the number and name and then press the Enter key.
After the number, leave a space before the name. There must be at least a space between number and name.
If you do not enter anything after the number, no name is recognized.
Note
(1) If you click on the list item of which the name you want to change, give a second and click on it again, the list item turns
into the editing mode, which has the same effect as using the renaming menu above.
(2) If window has the same number as another or there is an error of the entry (when the name has been entered without a
space before it), the previous value remains.
(3) In windows of DEC (4091), HEX (4092), ASCII (4093) and FLOAT (4094), the window number cannot be changed.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-13
5.6 Screen Property
You can make the properties displayed on the screen or change them.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the right button on the mouse on a point in the space on the screen, then the context menu appears. Select [Screen
Property].
5.6.1 General Properties
In the first properties showing the basic information, you can check and modify the type, number, name, description. The name,
number and description of the screen are changeable and the width and height of the screen can be changed only in the window
screen.

General properties Description
Screen Type The type of the current screen(base, window and part)
Screen No. Displays the number of the current screen. You can change the number.
Screen Name Displays the name of the current screen. You can change the name.
Window title Available at window screen. You can specify the title of popup window

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-14

General properties Description
From text table Available at window screen. If you check the box, you can specify the title of popup window from the text
table
Text table Available at window screen. Opens text table so that you can specify the title of popup window from text
table.
Font In case of directly inputting the title, specifies font of title. In case of taking the text from the text table, you
can’t specify the font. It only shows font of text specified in the text table.
Description Displays the description of the screen which has been entered. You can enter the description of the screen.
Memory size Displays the size of the current screen.
Screen Width/Height Displays the width and height of the screen, which are fixed according to the XGT Panel type.

Notes
In case of specifying the window title from the text table, the font is applied but other character string properties such as color, bold, italic,
strikeout, underline are not ignored. Title is displayed with white, 15 size character string properties.
5.6.2 Background Properties
In the background properties, you can set the background color, pattern type and background image. You can use both the
background color and image and in such a case, the latter has priority. That is, the background image properties come before
the background color properties.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-15
[Example of Use of Background Color]
Choose green as the FG color, violet as the BG color and hatch 10 as the pattern in the BG color.
[Example of Use of Background Image]
Open the image library and select the follfillback17 image of the PATTERN_R category.
Note
When adding the background image, applicable image types are BMP, JPG, GIF, TGA, PNG, TIF, WMF, ICO and PCX. But
for XP30-BTE, economic model, applicable image types are BMP, GIF and JPG.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-16
5.6.3 Other Properties
(1) In other properties, you can set the screen script information and whether flow alarm shows. If the flow alarm has been set in
XGT Panel, when it occurs, it is displayed in a stream at the bottom of the window.
(2) You can select and specify a script executed when a screen appears or disappears. When a script is set, it is executed once
at the time when each screen disappears or appears.
(3) You can select and specify a script executed when a screen is executed. When setting the script, you can select and specify
a script according to execution condition (Consecutive, Periodic, On Bit Rising, On Bit Falling, On Bit Changed)
[Example of Use of Screen Script]
(a) Register two scripts in the project and configure the contents.
(for cautions and common notes in configuration, see Chapter 18 Script)
Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-17
(b) Set up the screen script as below.
(c) Set up the screen script as below.
If you activate Add &Modify bar for screen script, the below properties box will be shown. It is possible to establish that the script
is executed based on screen refresh cycle (continuously), every certain time (regularly) or specified device value.
After setting [Screen1_start] script to be executed when screen starts and [Screen1_end] script to be executed when screen
ends, and setting [Screen1_consecutive], [Screen1_periodic], [Screen1_OnBitRising], [Screen1_OnBitFalling],
[Screen1_OnBitChanged] like above figures, the execution procedures of script is as below when the basic screen is
converted into No.2 from No. 1

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-18
Note
(1) Although execution condition is fulfilled during processing script, please be noted that there may be some difference of
script execution time since the conditions are checked after script completion.
Converted into screen no. 1
Executes [Screen1_start] script
Executes script
[Screen
1_periodic]
every 1 second
Executes script
[Screen
1_consecutive] every
time the screen is
refreshed
Executes script [Screen
1_OnBitRsing] every time
bit ‘HX0001’ is ‘ON’

Executes script [Screen
1_OnBit_Falling] every
time bit ‘HX0001’ is ‘OFF’
Executes script [Screen
1_OnBitChange] every
time bit ‘HX0002’ is ‘ON’
or ‘OFF’

Converted into screen no.2
Executes [Screen2_end] script

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-19
5.7 Screen Editing
The following are about editing screens.
5.7.1 Copying Screen (Ctrl + C) and Pasting Screen (Ctrl + V)
If you copy and paste a screen, the screen number increases along with the ID of the object of each screen. As it is when created,
the screen number is allotted from the minimum unoccupied number.
[Procedure]
(a) Select the screen to copy in the project window.
(b) Select [Copy] in the context menu.
(c) Select [Paste] or icon P in the context menu.
Note
(1) When there is the corresponding screen data in the clip board, the [Paste] menu means that the screen can be copied,
so the [Paste] menu is activated only in such a case.
(2) If you want to paste a screen using the hot key, the parent list of the list item you want to paste in the project window
should be activated because it is pasted below the parent list.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-20
5.7.2 Cut (Ctrl+X) and Paste (Ctrl+V)
[Procedure]
(a) Select the screen you want to cut in the project window.
(b) Select [Cut] in the context menu.
(c) The following message is issued asking whether you want to delete the window. If you click on the OK button, the window is
cut. If you click on [Cancel], it is not cut.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-21
(d) Select [Paste] in the context menu.
5.7.3 Deleting Screen
[Procedure]
1) Select the screen you want to delete in the project window.
2) Select [Delete] in the context menu.
A message is issued asking whether you want to delete the screen as it does when you cut it. If you click on the OK button, the
screen is deleted. If you click on [Cancel], it is not deleted.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-22
5.8 Drawing Figures/Objects
If a window is created, you can place figures or objects on it and enter the properties. From now on, let’s learn how to draw figures and
objects.
5.8.1 Using Editing Tools
Editing tools are used to change the mode of a figure or object so that they can be drawn. If you select an object in the tool box, the
object is ready to be drawn.
Select the figure or object to enter through the tool box menu or tool bar as shown below and insert them by clicking on them.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-23
(1) Diagram

Command Description
Select Enters the mode of selecting a figure or object.
Line Enters the mode of drawing a straight line.
Circle Enters the mode of drawing a circle.
Pie Enters the mode of drawing a pie.
Chord Enters the mode of drawing a chord.
Multi line Enters the mode of drawing a multi line.
Polygon Enters the mode of drawing a polygon.
Ellipse(Alt + B + E) Enters the mode of drawing an ellipse.
Rectangle(Alt + B + R) Enters the mode of drawing a rectangle.
RoundRect Enters the mode of drawing a round rectangle.
Text (Alt + B + G) Enters the mode of drawing text.
Image (Alt + B + X) Enters the mode of drawing a image.
Scale Enters the mode of drawing scales.

(2) Object

Command Description
Select Enters the mode of selecting a figure or object.
Bit Switch(Alt + B + S) Enters the mode of drawing a bit switch.
Word Switch Enters the mode of drawing a word switch.
Change Screen Switch Enters the mode of drawing a change screen switch.
Special Switch Enters the mode of drawing a special switch.
Multi Switch Enters the mode of drawing a multi switch.
Bit lamp (Alt + B + L) Enters the mode of drawing a bit lamp.
Word Lamp Enters the mode of drawing a word lamp.
N-state Lamp Enters the mode of drawing an N-state lamp.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-24

Command Description
Clock Enters the mode of drawing a clock.
Bit message(Alt + B + M) Enters the mode of drawing a bit message.
Word message Enters the mode of drawing a word message.
Numeric Display (Alt + B + N) Enters the mode of drawing a numeric display.
Numeric Input (Alt + B + I) Enters the mode of drawing a numeric input.
Text Display Enters the mode of drawing a text display.
Text Input Enters the mode of drawing a text input.
Bit Window(Alt + B + W) Enters the mode of drawing a bit window.
Word Window Enters the mode of drawing a word window.
Bit Part(Alt + B + P) Enters the mode of drawing a bit part.
A bit part is divided into fixed, XY, line and route.
Word Part Enters the mode of drawing a word part.
A word part is divided into fixed, XY, line and route.
Animation(Alt + B + A) Enters the mode of drawing an animation.
Bar Graph(Alt + B + B) Enters the mode of drawing a bar graph.
Pie Graph(Alt + B + P) Enters the mode of drawing a pie graph.
Meter Graph Enters the mode of drawing a meter graph.
Closed Graph Enters the mode of drawing a closed graph.
A closed curve graph is divided into elliptical and polygonal graphs.
Trend Graph(Alt + B + T) Enters the mode of drawing a trend graph.
Logging trend graph Enters the mode of drawing a logging trend graph
Scatter graph Enters the mode of drawing a scatter graph
This is classified into real-time scatter and logging scatter.
History Alarm Viewer(Alt + B + H) Enters the mode of drawing a history alarm viewer.
Datalist (Alt + B + D) Enters the mode of drawing a data list viewer.
Logging viewer Enters the mode of drawing a logging viewer.
Alarm Navigator Enters the mode of drawing an alarm navigator.
Memo pad Enters the mode of drawing a memo pad
Recipe navigator Enters the mode of drawing a recipe navigator

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-25

Command Description
Data list Editor Enters the mode of drawing a Data list Editor
File recipe Editor Enters the mode of drawing a File recipe Editor

Note
(1) With respect to the hot keys, S stands for Shift and C Ctrl.
(2) The hot keys described above are provided by XP Builder by default.
(3) You can specify a hot key in a tool. For more details, see
3.6.2 Hot Keys setting.
5.9 Drawing Diagram
5.9.1 Overview of Diagram
You can draw various figures such as lines, circles and pie using the tool box. A figure refers to a static element which is fixed at a
particular point on the screen and does not move when executed. The following are detailed description and types of figures.

Type Example Properties provided Cautions in using
XP30-BTA
Line Line color, line width, line style N/A
Circle Line color, line width, line style N/A
Pie Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
Texture filling not provided
Chord Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
N/A
Multi line Line color, line width, line style N/A
Polygon Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
Texture filling not provided
Ellipse Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
Texture filling not provided

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-26

Type Example Properties provided Cautions in using
XP30-BTA
Rectangle Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
Texture filling not provided
RoundRect Line color, line width, line style
Brush filling, texture filling
Texture filling not provided
Text Text string of XP Builder figures Font, text color, size, plate
color, type (bold, italic,
underlined, strikeout, horizontal
or vertical alignment)
N/A
Image System graphic library
User graphic library
N/A
Scale Point, plate color, border color,
color, direction, position and
width of scales
N/A

The properties provided with respect to diagram and related cautions are as follows.
[Table. Properties of diagram]

Type Description
Color of line and
text
In the case of TTA, up to 65535 colors can be expressed for the color of lines and texts of the figure.
In the case of BTA, up to 8 colors can be expressed for the color of lines and texts of the figure.
Line Style As shown below, two types of line can be expressed.
(solid line)
(dotted line)
Line width width 1: width 2 : width 3 :
width 5 : width 6: width 7:
width 11 : width 12 : width 14 :
Brush filling Up to 41 kinds of brush can be chosen including No Brush.
Brush 0: brush filling not used.
Brush 1: fill with the pattern background color.
Brush 2: fill with the pattern foreground color
Brushes 3~41: fill with the brush combining the pattern background and foreground colors.
Brush 35 which combines the pattern background and foreground colors is as follows.

Line type Line width
solid line Between 1 ~ 14
dotted line width 1 only

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-27

Type Description
pattern foreground color: black
pattern background color: white
Texture filling You can choose from 28 types of texture.
Font Style There are four types of text, which are bold, Italic, strikeout, underlined.
bold: Italic: Strikeout:: Underline
You can choose two or more of them.
Text alignment Horizontal alignment (left, center, right) and vertical alignment (top, middle, bottom) are available.
Points of scales The number of scales can range between 1 and 255.
Every fifth scale is larger than the others.
Scale
Location and
direction
The scales may have their position at the top, bottom, right and left of the window.
The directions available are left
-> right, right -> left, top -> bottom, bottom -> top.

Note
(1) In the case of XP30-BTA, the texture filling function is not provided.
(2) The textures expressed in XP Builder and XGT Panel might be different as shown below.
In XP-Builder In XGT Panel

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-28
5.9.2 Drawing a Figure by Type
(1) Line
There are two types of line, which are straight and multi lines. The procedure of drawing a line is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Line] or [Multi Line] in the tool box.
(b) Place the mouse pointer where you want to insert a line in the window. You can draw a straight or multi line as follows.

Type Method
Line 1) Press the left button on the mouse at the start point.
2) Press the left button on the mouse at the last point.
Multi
Line
1) Press the left button on the mouse at the start point.
2) Press the left button on the mouse at the center of the line.
3) Press the left button on the mouse at the last point

(c) If you want to change the properties of a figure, double-click on the left button on the mouse on the figure. Then a dialog box
is invoked for you to change the properties of the figure.
Start (click once) End (click once)
Start (click once) End (Double click)
Center (click once)
Line
Multi line

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-29
Note
(1) Multi line
(a) If you click on a point on the finished multi line and drag it to a desired point while holding the Ctrl button, another vertex
is created.
(b) If you click on a point on the finished multi line while holding the Ctrl button, the point is deleted.
Press the right button on the mouse at a point on the line while holding the Ctrl button
Click and drag
Press the right button on the mouse at a point on the line while holding the Ctrl button
Click
Delete
Drop
Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-30
(2) Circle, Pie and Chord
To draw a circle, pie or chord, click on two points on a circle. The procedure is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Circle], [Pie] or [Chord] in the tool box.
Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large as you want holding the right button on the
mouse.
(b) When it becomes as large as you want, release the right button on the mouse. Until you move the mouse on the screen,
nothing appears.
(c) If you release the right button on the mouse and move the mouse, the center of the circle is indicated at the center of the area
you have drawn. Press the right button on the mouse on the start point from the center of the circle.
(d) Draw a desired figure from the start point and double-click on the right button on the mouse.
Drag the mouse holding the right button. Release the right button on the mouse.
After deciding the start point, click on the right button.
Start Point
Double-click on the right button when you decide the
end point.
End Point
Pie Pie
Pie Pie

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-31
(3) Ellipse, Rectangle and RoundRect
You can draw an ellipse, rectangle and RoundRect in the same method described above. Below let’s learn how to draw an
ellipse.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Ellipse] in the tool box.
(b) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large as you want holding the right button on the
mouse.
(c) When it becomes as large as you want, release the right button on the mouse.
(d) When a dialog box is invoked, change the properties and click on the OK button. Drawing an ellipse, rectangle and
RoundRect has the common properties of ‘Line’ and ‘Fill’. For details, see [Properties of Tables and Figures].

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-32
(4) Polygon
The procedure is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Polygon] in the tool box.
(b) Click on every point of the polygon where you want on the screen. Then, the closed curve connecting each vertex of the
polygon is formed.
(c) Double-click on the last vertex.
(d) When a dialog box is invoked, change the properties and click on the OK button. For details, see [Properties of Tables and
Figures]
(5) Drawing
You can draw a system graphic image or user graphic image. The procedure is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Image] in the tool box.
(b) A dialog box is invoked where you can choose a drawing.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-33
(c) Choose the desired image from the images that you have added and the images provided by the system and click on the
OK button ( ). Or, double-click on the selected image.
(d) Click on the point where you want to insert the image. The image is created in its original size. You can adjust the size by
dragging and dropping it at a desired point.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-34
(6) Scales
Scales are used as the ruler. Below we are going to learn the detailed properties of scales.

Setting Items Description
Number of tick In case that [Using Small Tick] function is not applied, the total number of scales is marked as long scale only.
If it comes under the figure set by [Interval of Large tick] after marking small scale, it is marked as large scale.
Ex. From the above example, if the total number of scales is 18 and the 5
th small scale is marked as long
scale, it can be shown as below.
It is possible to express a table with two scaled figures.
Method)
1. After canceling [Use Small Tick] and [Plate color], designate [The number of Total ticks] equal to the
vertical number and set up the scale direction as [Up->Down].
2. After canceling [Use Small Tick] and [Plate color], designate [The number of Total ticks] equal to the
horizontal number and set up the scale direction as [Right->Left].
3. Overlap No.1 and No.2 figures each other.
Line width The width of the scales.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-35

Setting Items Description
Position and
direction of
scales
Color In case you don’t use plate color, plate color is displayed transparently.
Border color
Plate color
Scale color

Position Direction
Type Example
Left -> right
Top Bottom
Top, bottom
Right -> left
Top Bottom
Top -> bottom
Left Right
Left, right
Bottom -> top
Left Right

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-36

Setting Items Description
Plate color: Black Plate color: not used

The procedure of drawing scales is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Scales] in the tool box..
(b) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large as you want holding the right button on the
mouse.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-37
(7) Text
Texts are important part of editing. The procedure of drawing a text string is as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Text] in the tool box.
(b) Click on the desired point.
(c) When the dialog box is invoked, enter the properties and click on the OK button.
(d) Adjust its size so that the entire text can be seen.
Note
(1) Default Size
Although you can adjust the size when you create a figure or object by dragging and dropping them, you can also create
a figure by clicking on it just once in a default size set in the system. The size being different by object and figure, this
method applies to ellipses, rectangle, roundrect, polygons, image, text and all objects.
(2) Drawing from the Center
If you want the point you first clicked on to draw a figure or object to be the center of the figure or object, select [First point
as Center] in the edit menu. This method does not apply to some figures such as lines and polygons and objects.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-38
5.10 Drawing an Object
The object is the most important dynamic component of screen editing by differently displaying or operating according to the set device
value or condition.
The following limits apply to creating an object.

Item Limit per screen
Maximum number of figures No limit
Maximum number of objects No limit
History alarm viewer object 1
Logging viewer object 1
Alarm search object 1
Window object 8. In case of overlapped window, there is no limit.
Screen insertion An unlimited number of screens can be inserted except the screen it belongs to.
(See 17.14 Screen Insertion Object)
Memo pad 1
Recipe navigator Basic recipe navigator, file recipe navigator respectively 1 in a screen
Type of recipe navigator can be set in the dialog box.
If exceeded, error occurs in data check when downloading
Data list editor 1
File recipe editor 1

The following is an example of the general procedure of creating a bit switch on the screen.
[Procedure]
(a) Select the bit switch object in the tool box.
(b) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large as you want.

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-39
(c) In creating a figure or object in the option, if ‘Show Property Dialog on New diagram/Object’ is set, the dialog box is invoked
first on the screen. Set or change the properties and click on the OK button. The object is displayed on the screen.
(d) To change the properties of an object, just like a figure, select the object and double-click on it. Then the dialog box for you to
change the properties of the object is invoked. In this dialog box, change the properties.
The following is a simple explanation of the method and difference of object drawing. Note that it is assumed that the information tool
bar remains the same with respect to the inserted image.

Object Description
Bit switch Method 1) Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to
create it in the default size(48X48).
Method 2) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large
as you want. If the dialog box is invoked, set the desired properties and click on the OK
button.
(See 17.2.3 Bit Switch Setting)
Word switch Same as above
(See 17.2.4 Word Switch Setting)
Special switch Same as above
(See 17.2.6 Special Switch Setting)
Change Screen Switch Same as above
(See 17.2.5 Change Screen Switch Setting)
Multi switch Same as above
(See 17.2.7 Multi Switch Setting)
Bit lamp Same as above
(See 17.1.3 Bit Lamp Setting)
Word lamp Same as above
(See 17.1.4 Word Lamp Setting)

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-40

Object Description
N-state Lamp Same as above
(
See 17.1.5 N-state Lamp Setting)
Clock Same as above
(See 17.13 Clock Setting)
Bit message Same as above
(See 17.3.3 Bit Message Setting)
Word message Same as above
(See 17.3.4 Word Message Setting)
Numeric Display Same as above
(See 17.4.4 Numeric Display Setting)
Numeric Input Same as above
(See 17.4.3 Numeric Input Setting)
Text Display Same as above
(See 17.6 Text Display Setting)
Text Input Same as above
(See 17.5 Text Input Setting)
Animation Same as above
(See 17.7 Animation Setting)
Bit window Select the object in the tool box and click on a desired point. If you adjust the size with the
mouse, no change occurs.
(See 17.5 Window Setting)
Word window Select the object in the tool box and click on a desired point. If you adjust the size with the
mouse, no change occurs.
(See 17.5 Window Setting)
Bit/word part (fixed) Select the object in the tool box and click on a desired point. If you adjust the size with the
mouse, no change occurs.
(See 17.6 Part Setting)

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-41

Object Description
Bit/word part (XY) Select the object in the tool box and click on a desired point. If you adjust the size with the
mouse, no change occurs.
(See 17.6 Part Setting)
Bit/word part (line) Same as drawing lines of a figure
(See 17.6 Part Setting)
Bit/word part (route) Same as drawing lines of a figure
(See 17.6 Part Setting)
Bar graph Method 1) Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to
create it in the default size.
Method 2) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large
as you want. If the dialog box is invoked, set the desired properties and click on the OK
button.
(See 17.8.3 Bar Graph Setting)
Pie graph Same above
(See 17.8.4 Pie Graph Setting)
Trend Graph Same above
(See 17.8.7 Trend Graph Setting)
Meter Graph Same above
(See 17.8.5 Meter Graph Setting)
Closed Graph(ellipse)) Same as drawing an ellipse
(See 17.8.6 Closed Graph Setting)

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-42

Object Description
Closed Graph (polygon) Same as drawing a polygon
(See 17.8.6 Closed Graph Setting)
Trend graph Same as drawing a bar graph
(
See 17.8.7 Trend Graph Setting)
Logging trend graph Same as drawing a bar graph
(
See 17.8.8 Logging Trend Graph Setting)
Scatter graph Same as drawing a bar graph
Selects real-time scatter and logging scatter in the dialog and goes to drawing mode.
History alarm viewer Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to create it in the
size determined according to the font and default properties.
(See 17.9 History Alarm Viewer Setting)
Data list viewer Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to create it in the
size determined according to the font and default properties.
(See 4.10 Data List Viewer Setting)
Logging viewer Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to create it in the
size determined according to the font and default properties.
(See 4.11 Logging Viewer Setting)

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-43

Object Description
Alarm Navigator Method 1) Select an object in the tool box and click on a desired point on the screen to
create it in the default size.
Method 2) Place the mouse pointer at a desired point and drag it until it becomes as large
as you want. If the dialog box is invoked, set the desired properties and click on the OK
button.
(See 4.12 Alarm Navigator Setting)
Screen insertion object Select the number of the screen you want to insert and drag and drop it in the current
window.
(See 4.14 Screen Insertion Setting)
Memo pad Method 1) If you select object at a toolbox and click the intended position with a mouse, a
basic-sized memo pad will be create.
Method 2) Put a mouse point to the position to be inserted at the screen and drag it until
you can get the intended size. If a dialog box is shown, set up the properties that you want
and press ‘Check’ button.
(
See 17.15 Memo pad Settings.)
Recipe Explorer Method 1) If you select object at a toolbox and click the intended position with a mouse, a
basic-sized memo pad will be create.
Method 2) Put a mouse point to the position to be inserted at the screen and drag it until
you can get the intended size. If a dialog box is shown, set up the properties that you want
and press ‘Check’ button.
(
See 17.16 Recipe Explorer Settings)
Data List Editor Method 1) If you select object at a toolbox and click the intended position with a mouse, a
basic-sized memo pad will be create.
Method 2) Put a mouse point to the position to be inserted at the screen and drag it until
you can get the intended size. If a dialog box is shown, set up the properties that you want
and press ‘Check’ button.
(
See 17.17 Data List Editor Settings)
File Recipe Editor Method 1) If you select object at a toolbox and click the intended position with a mouse, a
basic-sized memo pad will be create.
Method 2) Put a mouse point to the position to be inserted at the screen and drag it until
you can get the intended size. If a dialog box is shown, set up the properties that you want
and press ‘Check’ button.
(
See 17.18 File Recipe Editor Settings.)

Chapter 5 Screen Editing
5-44
5.11 Drawing Figure or Object from Library
This is another way of drawing an object or figure. You can insert a figure or object in the window by using the library.
(See Chapter Graphic/Object Library)
[Procedure]
(a) Select the category and item you want to insert into the window in the graphic library window or object library window.
(b) Drag and drop it at a desired position. The selected item is displayed where you want it to be.
Note
(1) The library is divided into the vector figure (_V) and raster figure (_R) according to the shape. A vector figure maintains its
shape if you enlarge or reduce it and a raster figure is useful if you want to express details of the shape but its shape
might be distorted if you enlarge or reduce it.
(2) The image figure created by being dragged from the library is created in its original size, so their size might be different.
Select the category.
Select the item.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-1
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6.1 Selection
You can choose a figure or object as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Click on [Select] in the tool box.
(b) Select a desired or object with the mouse. If you want to select one of them, click on it. Then the handle of the selected figure
or object is displayed in green.
Note
(1) If you want to select all the objects and figures in the window, select [Edit]-[Select All] in the menu.
(2) If you click on the desired figure or object in the data View window, it is marked in the blue bar.
(3) If you have trouble selecting the desired figure or object, hold the Ctrl key in the selection mode and drag the tip of the
desired figure or object. Then the figure or object on the area is selected and displayed so.
(4) When selecting the diagram, in case internal of circle, rectangle, ellipse, chord, and polygon is not filled with pattern,
figure, etc, you have to touch outline to select the diagram. And in case internal is filled, if you touch the internal area,
you can select the diagram.
(5) As another method to select, click Ctrl key and right mouse then you can select the diagram and object in order.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-2
6.2 Size Adjustment
You can change the size as follows.
[Procedure]
(a) Click on the item you want to delete and place the pointer near the handle of which the size you want to change. The mouse
pointer changes into an arrow and it is ready to change the size.
(b) Adjust the size by dragging the mouse.
(c) Release the mouse button when it is as large or small as you want.
You can check the size information in the data view window.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-3
Note
(1) If you press the Ctrl key before dragging the mouse, the size is changed around the center of the object of which the size
you want to change.
(2) If you press the Shift key before dragging the mouse, the size of the object is changed with the ratio of the height and
width of the original object maintained.
Note
(1) The sizes of the Logging viewer, alarm viewer, data list viewer, window and part cannot be changed.
(2) What is a data view window?
(a) A data view window consists of three elements, which are the type item which indicates the representative name of a
figure or object, ID item representing the ID in the case of an object and location item indicating the coordinates of a
figure.
(b) In the case of a group, the ‘type’ is displayed as a ‘group’, an ‘object ID’ item is displayed as ‘GROUP’ and for ‘location’,
the maximum quadrangular coordinates of grouped objects are displayed.
(c) You can arrange by type, object ID and location by clicking on the title of each line.
(d) You can select, copy, cut and paste items in the data view window.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-4
6.3 Properties Change
You can change the properties of a figure or object in the dialog box invoked whey a figure or object is created. Moreover, after they
are created, you can simply change the properties of a figure or object in the properties dialog box.
[Procedure]
(a) Double click on the figure of which the properties you want to change.
(b) In the dialog box, change the properties and click on the OK button.
6.4 Delete
This is the function of deleting a figure or object in the window.
[Procedure]
(a) Click on the figure or object you want to delete.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Delete] or press the Delete key.
Note
(1) If you want to delete all the objects or figures in the window, select [Edit]-[Delete All].
(2) You can also delete an object by selecting the object in the data view window and pressing the Delete key.
6.5 Cut (Ctrl+X) – Paste (Ctrl+V)
[Procedure]
(a) [Cut]-[Paste] is cutting a selected figure or object and pasting it in another window. Then the selected figure or object is gone
from the original window and newly created in the other window.

Cut

 

Paste i
window 2

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-5
6.6 Copy (Ctrl+C) - Paste (Ctrl+V)
[Copy]-[Paste] is creating another of the selected figure or object. In the illustration below, if you paste a selected figure or object, it is
pasted in the new position with a certain offset. If you have pasted it in another window, it is displayed at the same location as it was in
the former window. You can check the information of the figure or object which has been pasted from the data component window.
Note
(1) If you copy, the ID of the object increases by 1.
(2) If you move a figure or object holding the Ctrrl key and release the mouse button at a desired point, it is copied there.
(3) You can paste general character strings by pasting them in the editor. In such a case, the figure is created in a character string.
6.7 Multi Copy
You can use the multi copy function when you want to create multiple objects with the address increasing or decreasing constantly.
In the illustrations below, you can copy the 12 bit switches with continuous device addresses against the HX0000 bit switch as follows.
Switch bit object set as HX0000 device 12 Multi copied with the address increasing by 1 against
the HX0000 device

Ctrl

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-6
[Procedure]
(a) Select the object you want to multi copy.
(b) Select [Menu]-[Edit]-[Multi Copy] or click on icon
.
(c) In the dialog box below, set the copy number, space and copy direction.

Item Settings
Columns(a) Sets the number of lines of objects to multi copy.
The maximum number of columns that can be copied in the window is indicated in the dialog box
(up to 5).
Make sure that the number of columns does not exceed the maximum number of columns that
can be copied.
Row(b) Sets the number of rows of objects to multi copy.
The maximum number of rows that can be copied in the window is indicated in the dialog box (up
to 4).
Make sure that the number of rows does not exceed the maximum number of rows that can be
copied.
Copy Direction(c) Sets the direction of the multi copy. Sets the increase direction of ID and address.
In the following example, address increases by 2 based on the HX00000
(1) : increases/decreases based on the left-top object as follows

(a)
(
b)
(
c)
(
d)
(
e)
(
f)
(
g)
(
h)
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-7

Item Settings
(2) : increases/decreases based on the right-top object as follows
(3) : increases/decreases based on the left-bottom object as follows
(4) : increases/decreases based on the right-bottom object as follows

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-8

Item Settings
(5) : increases/decreases based on the right-top object as follows
(6) : increases/decreases based on the right-bottom object as follows
(7) : increases/decreases based on the left-top object as follows
(8) : increases/decreases based on the left-bottom object as follows

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-9

Item Settings
Space(d, e) Sets the horizontal and vertical spaces between objects.
Offset (f) Sets how many address increase or decrease
If you want decrease of address, input negative value
If you click ‘Apply All’, same offset value is applied to offset of Address Increment one by one
Increasing individual
address (g)
Increasing Individual address is a useful function for copy with other address offsets when there
are other address properties within one object. The function can be applied only when one object is
multi-copied. Although figures are included, they do not affect increase in individual address
regardless of the kind of figures.
For example, in terms of bit switch, suppose you need to multi-copy bit switch address of basic tab
and lamp condition device of extended lamp condition tab with other offset. In this case, as the
below, if you set other offsets ; bit switch address offset of basic tab as 1, extended lamp condition
address as 3, they will be respectively copied with increased offset as the number of set rows and
lines.
Comment copy (h) Description note is common property of the object included object properties box’s basic tab as
below. In case that the property is activated, Description note will be copied, otherwise, it will be not
copied. Copying Description note is activated as default setting.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-10
Note
(1) Note the following objects.

Object type Cautions
Bit switch, word switch Continuously copied address: reference device
: lamp condition
Address not continuously copied: Action condition
: offset
Multi switch, special switch The same result as general copy because no device is set
Multi switch Continuous copy is not conducted for the device registered in the multi
switch list.
Numeric input device, Text
input device
Continuously copied address: reference device
: Read device
: Write Check device
Address not continuously copied: Action condition
: offset
Trend graph All the input devices(less than 9) are continuously copies and increase.

(2) If the number of input columns and rows exceed the maximum number of devices, the objects that exceed the maximum
number are not copied in the display. For example, the maximum range of P device of MASTER-K of LSIS is between 0
and 63. If 24 devices are continuously copied with the device P0042 being the reference device, only 22 of them are
copied. The 23
rd and 24th objects are not copied.
(3) The object specified as a tag is not copied.
Continuous copy with
P42 device being the
reference device
23
rd and 24th objects
that exceed the
maximum range of
device

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-11
6.8 Drag and Drop
There are two methods of drag and drop, which are [Cut]-[Paste] and [Copy]-[Paste].
If you drag and drop in the same window, it has the same effect as [Cut]-[Paste], but if you drag and drop in different windows, it has the
same effect as and [Copy]-[Paste].
[Drag and drop between windows]
If you drag a figure or object to the tab of the window where you want to drop it, the display is activated, that is, moves to the
window.
Now move the figure or object to a desired place and drop it.
[Drag and drop from the object/graphic library]
You can drag and drop an item from the object library or graphic library windows and in the object library, you can drag and drop a
selected object to the user category.
[Drag and drop in the base/window display]
You can drag a figure or object from the base or window screen tree of the project window into a new screen and in such a case,
the figure or object is created in a new screen as a screen inserted object.
Drag
An image of the graphic library has
been created in the window by the drag
and drop function.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-12
[Drag and drop in the part screen]
You can drag a figure from the part screen tree of the project window and in such a case, all the figures or objects inserted in the
part screen are copied in the new screen.
Note
(1) Cut, Copy and Paste are also available through the mouse context menu in the editing window. If you select an object to cut or
copy and press the right button on the mouse, the Copy, Paste and Cut context menus appear.
(2) In the following cases when drag and drop is not available, nothing happens if you drag and drop.
(a) You cannot drag and drop in the base and window screen which have the same number.
(b) The animation graphic library category has too big an image size, and affects the performance of XGT Panel. Therefore, it
cannot be inserted into another screen.
Base screen #1 original
screen
Drag and drop base screen 1 to base screen 2 Base screen #2
(contents of #1
are copied)

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-13
6.9 Undo and Redo of Editing
You can undo what you have edited or redo what you have undone.
(1) Undo (e.g. Deletion)
[Procedure]
(a) Select a figure or object you want to delete.
(b) Delete the selected XGT Panel by selecting [Edit]-[Delete] or clicking on the Delete key. Then the selected figure or object is
gone.
(c) Select [Edit]-[Undo] and the editing undo command appears in the menu. If you click on it, the deleted object is restored in
the screen.
(2) Redo (e.g. Deletion)
[Procedure]
(a) Undo the editing in the procedure of (1).
(b) Select [Edit]-[Redo] and the editing redo command appears in the menu. If you click on it, the restored object is deleted in the
screen.
Note
(1) You can undo or redo all figures and objects you have edited, but the screen related properties such as the screen
number and common properties cannot be undone or redone.
(2) There is no limit to the frequency of undo.
(3) You can select exactly the desired command because all commands are shown in the menu if you undo or redo.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-14
6.10 Group and Ungrouping
You can group or ungroup figures or objects.
[Procedure]
(a) Press the left button on the mouse on the objects you want to group.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Grouping]-[Group] or select the figure or object you want to group and select [Group] in the context menu, the
selected objects and figures are grouped.
You can confirm the grouped items in the data component window.
Group

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-15
(c) Select [Edit]-[Grouping]-[Ungroup] or select the figure or object you want to group.
(d) You can confirm the grouped items in the data view window.
Note
(1) There is no limit to grouping.
(2) A grouped figure or object can be recursively grouped with another figure or object and if they are ungrouped, each of
them is ungrouped one by one in the opposite sequence of grouping.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-16
6.11 Rotation
You can rotate a figure in a desired direction. You can rotate only figures but not objects.
Rotation of a figure (e.g. polygon)
[Procedure]
(a) Edit a polygon in the display.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Rotate or Flip]-[Rotate Left].
Now the polygon has turned about 90 degrees anticlockwise.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-17
(c) Select [Edit]-[Rotate Right].
Now the polygon has come to its original position.
Note
(1) Object can not be rotated.
(2) If there is object among groups or selected things, rotation is not available.
(3) Group or several figures are rotated around the center of maximum square area.
(4) Images are rotated as below.
->
90° CCW Rotation from the original ->90° CW Rotation from the original
6.12 Symmetric Movement
You can move a figure or object symmetrically.
Symmetric of a Figure (e.g. a polygon)
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-18
(b) Select [Edie]-[Rotate or Flip]-[Flip Horizontal].
The figure has now turned 180 degrees symmetrically and horizontally.
(c) Select [Edit]-[Rotate or Flip]-[Flip Vertical].
The figure has now turned 180 degrees symmetrically and vertically.
Note
(1) Object can not be moved symmetrically
(2) If there is object among groups or selected things, symmetric movement is not available..
(3) Group or several figures are moved symmetrically around the center of maximum square area.
(4) Images are moved symmetrically as below.
-> Flip horizontally ->Flip vertically

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-19
6.13 Arrangement
You can arrange a figure or object to the left, right, top, bottom and center.
Example of Arrangement of a Figure to the Left
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon, circle and rectangle.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Align]-[Align left].
Now the figures have been justified to the left of the first created figure, that is, the polygon shown in bold lines.
Note
(1) For arrangement, there must be at least two objects or figures.
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-20
6.14 Change of Drawing Order
You can change the order of drawing a figure or object in the order of the first, the last, one before and one after.
Example of Change of Figure Order
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon, circle and a rectangle and then select the polygon, which was first created.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Order]-[Bring to Front].
Now the first created polygon is the furthest to the front, that is, created last. You can also check the result in the data view
window.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-21
(c) Select [Edit]-[Order]-[Send to Back].
Now the result is the same when you created it first.
(d) Select [Edit]-[Order]-[Bring to Front].
Now the polygon is between the ellipse and circle.
(e) Select [Edit]-[Order]-[Send to Back].
Now the result is the same as (c).

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-22
6.15 Same Size
You can change the size of a figure or object to the width, height and size of another figure or object.
Example
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon, circle and rectangle and select them all.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Make Same Size]-[Width].
The widths of all the figures are equal to that of the polygon, which was first created. You can check the value in the data view
window.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-23
(c) Select [Edit]-[Make Same Size]-[Height].
The heights of all the figures are equal to that of the polygon, which was first created. You can check the value in the data view
window.
(d) Select [Edit]-[Make Same Size]-[Both].
The heights and widths of all the figures are equal to those of the polygon, which was first created. You can check the values
in the data view window.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-24
6.16 Justification to the Center
You can move a figure or object to the center of the width or height of the display.
Example of justification to the center
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon, circle and rectangle and select them all.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Center in Page]-[Horizontal].
The figures have now been moved to the horizontal center of the display.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-25
(c) Select [Edit]-[Center in Page]-[Vertical].
Now the figures have moved to the vertical center of the display.
6.17 Same Space
You can make the spaces of a figure or object constant vertically or horizontally.
Example
[Procedure]
(a) Create a polygon, circle and rectangle and select them all.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Space Evenly]-[Across].

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-26
Now the spaces of all the figures have been justified to the rectangle, which is located at the center as shown below.
(c) Select [Edit]-[Space Evenly]-[Down].
Now the vertical spaces of all the figures have been justified to the rectangle, which is located at the center as shown below
6.18 Paste
Using this function, you can paste a figure or object by moving it near the handle, vertex or intersecting point of a figure or object.
Example of pasting a figure to the grid
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Edit]-[Snap to Grid].

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-27
(b) Create a rectangle.
The corners of the rectangle fit in the grid.
(c) Select, move or change the size of the rectangle.
The rectangle moves along the gird.
Example of pasting a figure to guide lines
[Procedure]
(a) Create a rectangle.
(b) Drag the guide line from the edge of the left frame.
(c) Select [Edit]-[Glue]-[Glue to Guide Line].
(d) Move the rectangle around the guide line.
The rectangle fits onto the guide line.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-28
Example of pasting a figure to handle
[Procedure]
(a) Create a rectangle and a circle.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Glue]-[Glue to Handles].
(c) Move the rectangle around the circle.
(d) The rectangle fits onto the circle.
Example of pasting a figure to vertex
[Procedure]
(a) Create a rectangle and an ellipse.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Glue]-[Glue to Verties].
(c) Move the rectangle around the vertex.
(d) The vertex of the rectangle is tangent to the ellipse.
Example of pasting a figure to intersect point
[Procedure]
(a) Create a rectangle, ellipse and pie.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Glue]-[Glue to Intersect Point].
(c) Move the pie around the intersect point of the rectangle and ellipse.
(d) The pie is tangent to the intersect point of the rectangle and ellipse.
Note
(1) Pasting function is not only applied to one screen but to entire project.
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-29
6.19 Movement by a Dot
You can use this command to move a figure or object precisely.
Example of movement by a dot
[Procedure]
(a) Create an object.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Nudge]-[Nudge Left].
You can check that the object has been moved a dot to the left in the coordinates information in the data view window.
The following are hot keys for movement by a dot.

Shortcut key Description
Moves the selected item a dot to the right.
Moves the selected item a dot to the left.
Moves the selected item a dot up.
Moves the selected item a dot down.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-30
6.20 Change of Location and Size of Figure and Object
By using this function, you can move a figure or object to a particular point or change the width and height.
Example of changing the location and size
[Procedure]
(a) Create a switch object.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Position/Scale Change].
The following dialog box for adjusting the location and size is invoked. In the dialog box, the information of the location, width and
height is shown.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-31
(c) Enter a desired location, width and height in the text box of the dialog box.
With the object having moved to the following location(100,100), its width and height has also increased to 100 respectively in
the data view window and status bar.
Note
(1) The size of the history alarm viewer, data list viewer, logging viewer, screen insertion, part, window cannot be changed.
Upper left point Width and height
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-32
6.21 Auxiliary Functions for Editing Object and Figure
You can use auxiliary functions to edit the program.
6.21.1 Thumbnail
The thumbnail refers to the function displaying all the base, window and part screens of the current project in a single screen. You
can also directly shift to a desired window by double clicking on it.
[Procedure]
(a) Create a project with base screens 1 and 2 and fill the screens.
(b) Select [View]-[Screen Thumbnails].
All the base, window and part screens included in the project are displayed in a small size. To close the dialog box, click on the
OK button.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-33
(c) Double click on base screen B-1.
The dialog box is closed and the display B-1 is activated coming to the front.
6.21.2 Pan Window
You can see the editing status in a small size using the pan window in editing the entire display.
If there is a scroll area in the display, a dotted quadrangular area appears in the pan window so that you can see the area you
cannot see in the real display through the check box in the pan window.
[Procedure]
(a) Place an object and reduce the display so that there is a scroll in it.
(b) Select [View]-[Pan Window]. Then the following pan window appears with a solid line area where you can move the invisible
area. Check how the invisible area of the actual display is seen by moving the solid line transfer rectangle.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-34
6.21.3 Zooming
You can zoom in and out a figure or object.
You can edit details of a figure or object with various magnifications using [View].
The minimum unit of the magnification by zooming in and out is 25% and the magnification may range between 10% and 500%.

Item Description
Zoom in (a) Each click enlarged the screen by 25%
Zoom out (b) Each click reduces the screen by 25%
Magnification (c) You can enter a desired magnification.
Zoom Within Rect (d) The selected area is enlarged to fit into the screen.
100% (e) Goes back to the 100% size.
Zoom to fit page width (f) Enlarges to the full width of the screen.
Zoom to fit page height(g) Enlarges to the full height of the screen.
Zoom to fit whole page(h) Enlarges to the full size of the screen.
Zoom to fit selection(i) The selected object or figure is enlarged to the full size of the screen.

a b c d e f g h i
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-35
6.21.4 Grid and Grid setting
You can conveniently move and arrange objects and figures by using the grid.
The following is the procedure of displaying and hiding the grid.
[Procedure] Grid Display
(a) Select [View]-[Grid].
[Grid Hidden] [Grid Displayed]
When the grid is displayed, if you select [View]-[View/Hide Grid], the grid is hidden again.
The following describes grid setting.
[Procedure] Grid Setting
(a) Select [View]-[Grid Setting].

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-36
The following grid setting dialog box is invoked.
(b) Change the color or space of the grid and check whether the settings apply in the screen. The following “Snap to Grid”
function is same as that in “Edit” menu
.
Note
(1) You can also set [View/Hide Grid] in the tool bar and you can directly enter the space of the grid in the combo box. The
horizontal and vertical spaces are equal.
(2) Grid Setting is not only applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.
6.21.5 View/Hide of Margin Line and Guide Line
The margin line sets the furthermost boundary of the screen beyond which you do not want to edit.
A guide line provides the maximum quadrangular base line of the editing display, to which you can justify figures or objects.
The following is the procedure of viewing or hiding the border line.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-37
[Procedure] Viewing or hiding the border line
(a) Select [View]-[Margin Line]. A margin line is set in the screen by default, so you can check the margin line is gone.
(b) If you select [View]-[Margin Line] again with the margin line gone, it appears back.
The following is the procedure of viewing or hiding the guide line.
[Procedure] Viewing or hiding the guide line
(a) Select [View]-[Guide Line]. If you place the mouse pointer on the border of the screen frame at the top and on the left of the
screen, the pointer turns into a cursor with which you can create an Guide line.
(b) Press the left button on the mouse, drag it and release the mouse button, and then the guide line is created.
(c) If you click on [View]-[Guide Line] once again, the Guide line is removed from the screen.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-38
Note
(1) If you want to remove a particular Guide line, press the right button on the mouse on the Guide line you want to delete
and select [Delete Guide Line].
(2) If you want to fix a particular guide line, press the right button on the mouse on the guide line you want to fix and select
[Lock Guide Line].
(3) If you want to undo fixing an Guide line, press the right button on the mouse on the fixed guide line and select [Unlock
Guide Line].
(4) Show/hide Margin line/Guide line function is not only to applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-39
6.21.6 Object ID Viewer
Every kind of object is assigned an ID, which is the most important element that makes an object unique. The ID begins with 1 and
you can identify an object easily by viewing or hiding it.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [View]-[Show/hide Object ID].
(b) The ID of the object existing in the screen is displayed on the upper left of the object.
(c) If you click on [View]-[Show/hide Object ID] once again, the object ID is gone.
The IDs of objects are as follows.

Object ID Description
Bit switch SB0000X SB refers to the bit switch and 0000X refers to the number.
Word switch SD0000X SD refers to the word switch, 0000X refers to the number.
Change Screen Switch SS0000X SS refers to the change screen switch, 0000X refers to the number.
Special switch SP0000X SP refers to the special switch, 0000X refers to the number.
Multi switch SM0000X SM refers to the multi switch, 0000X refers to the number.
Bit lamp LB0000X LB refers to the bit lamp, 0000X refers to the number.
Word lamp LW0000X LW refers to the word lamp, 0000X refers to the number.
N-state lamp NL0000X NL refers to the N-state lamp, 0000X refers to the number.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-40

Object ID Description
Clock CL0000X CL refers to the clock, 0000X refers to the number.
Bit message MB0000X MB refers to the bit message, 0000X refers to the number.
Word message MW0000X MW refers to the word message, 0000X refers to the number.
Numeric Display ND0000X ND refers to the Numeric display, 0000X refers to the number.
Numeric Input NI0000X NI refers to the Numeric input, 0000X refers to the number.
Text Display AD0000X AD refers to the text display, 0000X refers to the number.
Text Input AI0000X AI refers to the text input, 0000X refers to the number.
Bit window WB0000X WB refers to the Bit window, 0000X refers to the number.
Word window WW0000X WW refers to the Word window, 0000X refers to the number.
Bit part (fixed) PBD0000X PBD refers to the Bit part (fixed), 0000X refers to the number.
Bit part (XY) PBS0000X PBS refers to the Bit part (XY), 0000X refers to the number.
Bit part (line) PBL0000X PBL refers to the Bit part (line), 0000X refers to the number.
Bit part (route) PBR0000X PBR refers to the Bit part (route), 0000X refers to the number.
Word part (fixed) PWD0000X PWD refers to the Word part (fixed), 0000X refers to the number.
Word part (XY) PWS0000X PWS refers to the Word part (XY), 0000X refers to the number.
Word part (line) PWL0000X PWL refers to the Word part (line), 0000X refers to the number.
Word part (route) PWR0000X PWR refers to the Word part (route), 0000X refers to the number.
Animation AM0000X AM refers to the Animation, 0000X refers to the number.
Bar graph GB0000X GB refers to the Bar graph, 0000X refers to the number.
Pie graph GP0000X GP refers to the Pie graph, 0000X refers to the number.
Meter graph GM0000X GM refers to the Meter graph, 0000X refers to the number.
Closed Graph (ellipse) GE0000X GE refers to the Closed Graph (ellipse), 0000X refers to the number.
Closed Graph (polygon) GPOL0000X GPOL refers to the Closed Graph (polygon), 0000X refers to the
number.
Trend graph GT0000X GT refers to the Trend graph, 0000X refers to the number.
Logging trend graph GLOGT000X GLOGT refers to the logging trend graph, 0000X refers to the number
Logging scatter graph GS000X GS refers to the logging scatter graph, 0000X refers to the number
Real-time scatter graph RGS000X RGS refers to the real-time scatter graph, 000X refers to the number.
History alarm viewer HA0000X HA refers to the History alarm viewer, 0000X refers to the number.
Data list DL0000X DL refers to the Data list viewer, 0000X refers to the number.
Logging viewer LG0000X LG refers to the Logging viewer, 0000X refers to the number.
Alarm Navigator HN0000X HN refers to the Alarm Navigator, 0000X refers to the number.
Memo pad MP0000X MP refers to the memo pad, 000X refers to the number.
Recipe navigator FM0000X FM refers to the recipe navigator,000X refers to the number
Data list editor CV0000X CV refers to the data list editor, 000X refers to the number
File recipe navigator FCV0000X FCV refers to the file recipe navigator, 000X refers to the number.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-41
Note
(1) If the height of the object is smaller than the object ID, the ID is displayed beyond the object area.
(2) All the object IDs are displayed as well when objects are overlapping.
(3) Show/Hide Object ID function is not only applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.
Height of the object is smaller
Object is overlapping

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-42
6.21.7 Object Address Viewer
Most objects have one or more addresses. You can see the representative address of the object without opening the properties
dialog box.
[Procedure]
(a) Select [View]-[Show/hide Object Address].
(b) The representative address of the object existing in the screen is displayed below the object ID on the upper left of the object.
(c) If you select [View]-[Show/hide Object Address] once again, the address of the object is gone.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-43
Note
(1) If the height of the object is smaller than the object address, the object address is displayed beyond the object range.
(2) The object address is displayed at the top when the objects are overlapping.
(3) Show/Hide Object Address function is not only applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.
6.21.8 Object Status Viewer
An object which has a different color or character with the bit address has the color or text corresponding to On/Off respectively.
Therefore, the editor provides the function of previewing the shape of On and Off. In addition, the color or text of an object is often
displayed according to the value of the word address and in such a case, it might have multiple cases according to the values unlike
the bit. Therefore, you can preview the shape of the object corresponding to each case in the editor before transferring it to XGT Panel.
The following is viewing On/Off of a bit object.
[Procedure] Bit object On/Off
(a) Register a bit lamp in the screen.
(b) Set the On case and Off case for the image, color and caption of the bit lamp by double clicking on them in the dialog box.
[On Properties]
Width of the object is smaller
Object is overlapping

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-44
Enter the Off properties as follows.
[Off Properties]
(c) Select [View]-[Show/hide Object On/Off].
(d) The default is Off , so the object existing in the screen is indicated as On.
[Off Case] [On Case]
Click

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-45
(e) If you select [View]-[Show/hide Object On/Off] once again, the object turns back to Off.
The following is viewing the case of the word object.
[Procedure] Viewing word object case.
(a) Register a word lamp.
(b) Enter two conditional sentences in the [Basic] properties in the dialog box as follows by double clicking on them and set the
properties corresponding to each condition.
Set as follows according to each condition in [Display] properties.
[Default Case]

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-46
[Case 1]
[Case 2]
(c) Change the case value in the word case change combo of the information tool bar. The value of XP Builder is set as the
default value, so the shape of the object in the display indicates the case of the default value.
Note
(1) There are nine word cases including 1 to 8 and each of them might have the default case or not, though it may vary
according to the object. 1 ~ 8 correspond to the conditional sentence. The objects without the default case are the
word message, word window and word parts set as indirect or case.
(2) This function is not only applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-47
6.21.9 IME Viewer
In XP-Builder, a variety of languages for entry are available with the soft key board (IME) of the language you want to use provided
when you enter texts. For details, see 15.3 Text Table. Below we are going to learn how to view or hide the IME.
The following shows how to use the IME viewer when you enter the bit switch caption.
[Procedure]
(a) Register the bit switch object.
(b) Set the language as Chinese in the information tool bar.
The default Chinese IME is shown on the lower right of the screen as follows. The IME continues to be display in the screen
until you hide the IME or close it.
(c) Select [Text] properties by double clicking on the bit switch and click on [Use Caption]. In the font list, ‘SimSun’, which is the
default Chinese font, is displayed.

Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-48
(d) Enter a caption using the IME or key board and close the dialog box.
(e) Select [View]-[IME].
The IME is gone now.
6.21.10 Enlargement and Reduction of Editing Window
You can enlarge or reduce the editing window.
The minimum unit of the magnification by Enlarge and Reduce is 25% and the magnification may range between 10% and 1500%.

Item Description
Zoom in(a) Each click enlarged the screen by 25%
Zoom out(b) Each click reduces the screen by 25%
Magnification(c) You can enter a desired magnification.
Zoom within Rect (d) The selected area is enlarged to fit into the screen.
100%(e) Goes back to the 100% size.
Zoom to fit page width(f) Enlarges to the full width of the screen.
Zoom to fit page height(g) Enlarges to the full height of the screen.
Zoom to fit Page(h) Enlarges to the full size of the screen.
Zoom to fit selection (i) The selected object or figure is enlarged to the full size of the screen.

Note
(1) You can enlarge or reduce by scrolling the mouse wheel up and down holding the Ctrl key.
(2) This function is not only applied to one screen but also applied to entire project.
a b c d e f g h i
Chapter 6 Object and Figure Editing
6-49
6.21.11 Auto Pan
The pan refers to the tool with which you can move in the screen. You can conveniently move to another area of the screen by using
the pan.
[Procedure]
(a) Fill the screen with objects and reduce the screen for there to be a scroll.
(b) Select [View]-[Auto Pan].
If you place the mouse pointer in the screen, a hand-shaped cursor appears.
(c) If you press the left button on the mouse, the mouse pointer turns into a hand-shaped cursor and you shift to the ready-tomove mode. If you drag the screen, the screen moves in the direction you are moving. You can see the objects in another
area by doing so.
(d) Select [View]-[Auto Pan] once again. The pan is released and the mouse pointer turns back into the arrow.
Chapter 7 Online
7-1
Chapter 7 Online
The windows edited in XP-Builder are sent to and executed in XGT Panel.
There are three transfer types, which are entire transfer, selected transfer of sending part of the edited data and modification transfer of
sending only modified edited part. In addition, data can also be received from XGT Panel and there are protocols receiving data
created in XGT Panel such as compressed project file reception, logging and recipe and so on.
In addition, there are further functions of reading and indicating or setting XGT Panel information.
7.1 Connection Composition
7.1.1 Serial (RS-232C) Connection
As the serial cable, the 6 pin cable is used which is included in the product package. The cable is connected to the RS-232C port of the
computer and the 6 pin cable is connected to Tool which is on the right of the back of XGT Panel.
Downloading through the serial is basic 1:1 communication.
Note
(1) Cable Connection Failure
Transfer failure errors occur frequently due to failed connection on downloading through the serial cable. The most
frequent error is TOOL port contact failure on the back of XGT Panel with the serial cable hung too long. Make sure that
the 6 pin port of the serial cable is correctly plugged into XGT Panel.
Another probable error is a case when the serial transfer cable passes the device with a lot of noise. For example, if it is
near a high voltage switch or motor, communication might not work well because of the noise during transfer.

Chapter 7 Online

7-2

(1) XGT Panel Connection Setting
Set computer connection option through serial in XGT Panel.
Close the monitored program and shift to the basic waiting window of XGT Panel.
Press [Settings]->[PC Conn Setting] on the window.
If the communication setting window is invoked, set the serial transfer speed used for connection to the computer in RS232
BaudRate item.
This transfer speed is used for setting XGT Panel to be connected in XP-Builder.

Chapter 7 Online
7-3
(2) XP-Builder Connection Setting
If the cable is correctly plugged and XGT Panel setting is finished, execute XP-Builder.
Create and save the project to download.
Start the project downloading window. Press [Communication] -> [Comm. setting].
Select [RS232C] picture in the [Communication Settings] list.
A combo box of the communication port and baud rate setting appears. Choose the value selected in XGT Panel as the baud
rate. If the baud rates are differently set, communication will not work.
Select the port of which the serial cable is connected to the computer.

Chapter 7 Online

7-4

7.1.2 Ethernet Connection
(1) Network Connection
Project.hmi
Project.zip
Gulim.ttf
This is available when the computer and XGT Panel are connected to the network. It is recommended that you use Ethernet
because downloading using Ethernet is rapid and it can be easily connected to a remote XGT Panel.
(2) 1:1 Connection by Cross Cable
Project.hmi
Project.zip
Gulim.ttf

Chapter 7 Online
7-5
Connection by cross cable is used for downloading through the Ethernet with the computer and XGT Panel not plugged to the
network. Setting for cross cable connection is the same as ordinary Ethernet use, but different in that a cross cable is used as the
Ethernet cable connecting the computer with XGT Panel.
Set the IP of XGT Panel and the connected computer so that they are in the same Subnet mask in using the cross cable
connection.
(3) XGT Panel Connection Setting
The Ethernet setting of XGT Panel is as follows.
Close the monitored program and shift to the basic waiting window of XGT Panel.
Set the Ethernet IP, Gateway and Subnet mask by pressing [Settings]->[Ethernet Setting] in the waiting window.

Chapter 7 Online

7-6

Ethernet TCP/IP connection consists of IP and Port number and indicates the destination.
Press [Settings]->[PC Conn Setting] in the waiting window to set the Port number to be used for connection to the computer.
When the following connection setting window is invoked, set the port number to be used for connection to the computer.
The default value is 2143.

Chapter 7 Online
7-7
(4) XP-Builder Connection Setting
When the cable is correctly connected and XGT Panel setting is finished, execute XP-Builder.
Create and save the project to download.
Execute the project download window. Press [communication] -> [comm. setting].
[Communication] dialog box is invoked as above.
Select [Ethernet] image in [Communication Settings] list.
The information to set for XGT Panel to be connected will appear below as in the figure.
In order to scan XGT Panel in the network, press “Scan XP” button.
If you check the XGT Panel to connect in the list and press OK, it is applied to connection setting. In case of checking several XGT
Panels, it is downloaded in order.
If XGT Panel is 1:1 connected to the computer by the cross cable, check the button and start download.
A device which is not on the XGT Panel list retrieved by XP-Builder can also be connected by entering yourself the network address in
[Currently selected XGT Panel]. In such a case, you should correctly know the network information of XGT Panel to be connected.
The information of [selected XGT Panel] has the address at the time of the last download or upload. The illustration shows a case
when the user last downloaded to XGT Panel at [165.244.149.113].

Chapter 7 Online

7-8

 

Note
(1) Automatic Search of XGT Panel Connected to Network
XP-Builder provides automatic search of the XGT Panel connected to the network.
UDP is used as the protocol for retrieval of XGT Panel.
Search Scope)
z XP-Builder uses UDP a Broadcast message to retrieve the connected XGT Panel. The Broadcast message sent
from XP-Builder is transferred to 255.255.255.255. This message is only used in the local network, so the
retrievable scope is limited to the local network.
z Even when it is connected in the local network area, if the gateway is between the computer executing XP
Builder and XGT Panel and if the gateway blocks the Broadcast message, retrieval might not work. In such a
case, ask the network technician.
UDP Broadcast
Retrieve message

Note
(1) Troubleshooting When XGT Panel is Not Retrieved
(a) Check whether the network cable is correctly connected.
(b) Check that the monitor program is normally executed in XGT Panel.
(c) Check that the network address in XGT Panel is normally set. For smooth communication, it must be in the same
subnet mask as the computer executing XP-Builder.
(d) In Window XP, personal firewall setting might block the UDP packet information. Make sure that personal firewall
setting is ON in the control panel. To open the windows firewall, click on Start, Control Panel and double click on the
Windows Firewall. Add XP-Builder in [Exceptions] in the dialog box [Windows Firewall].
If communication still does not work after the checks above, ask the service center.
Note
(1) 1:1 Connection by Cross Cable
In case of 1:1 connection between the computer and XGT Panel by the cross cable, if download through the Ethernet,
check and start download. Makes access easier by allotting virtual
IP of the subnet mask which is the same as the XGT Panel in windows.

Chapter 7 Online
7-9
7.2 Project Transfer
This is making the entire project file edited in XP-Builder into HMI files and transferring them.
(1) Project Transfer
[Procedures]
(a) If you press the menu [Communication]-[Send] (or select the image of tool bar ), the
below dialog box to send project.
(b) Checking the object to be connected
Check if the information on connected object is correct. If it is wrong, press connection setting button to change the settings.
(c) Password setting
If a communication password is set in XGT Panel, a communication password check dialog box is invoked. Enter a correct
password and press OK.

Chapter 7 Online

7-10

(d) Saving project
If the project has not been saved, a message box appears to tell you to save the project. Save the project and restart
project transfer.
(e) Sending project
When the project transfer is executed, a progress dialog box appears.
If the project transfer is normally completed, the download dialog box is automatically closed.
(2) [Send] Process
The following are a sequence of actions of XP-Builder when you press [Send].
If an error occurs during the process, the error is shown in the window and the process stops.
(a) In case that a password exists, input and check the password.
(b) After comparing equipment type, version with builder, judge if you stop Send process or transmit the whole or revised project
including XP-Runtime.
(c) If the project is not saved, try to save the project.
(d) Check the memory size of the data to be downloaded.
(e) If necessary, download XP-Runtime.
(f) Download the whole project or revised part based on your judgment.
(g) If the option ‘Including uploaded project file’ is activated, download the compressed project file.
Note
(1) If there is some project error, download will be suspended with the following message. You can see the error and alarm
history at output screen.

Chapter 7 Online
7-11
(2) Downloading the whole project or revised part under Project Sending.
If builder and device have the same project and project download is continuously performed for one device, proceed to
download the revised one. Downloading revised part can remarkably reduce the time required with a small size. However,
the whole project download should be exceptionally performed by XP-Builder for the below cases.
2.1) In case the project is downloaded to a device for the first time
2.2) In case the device’s project ID is deleted due to communication error and comparing ID is not allowable.
2.3) In case the project properties have been changed, which can affect the whole project.
2.4) In case Sending whole project option is established.
2.5) In case you try to download the project with several HMIs (multi-download)
2.6) In case the project included to HMI is different from the version provided by XP-Builder.
(3) The position of XP-Runtime Folder
XGP Panel program is installed at XP-Runtime folder below XP-Builder depending on each device. In the case of BTE
device, the program exists in BTE folder and for other devices, it is installed in GENERAL folder. You can also check the
XP-Runtime version of the folder through ‘Displaying XGT Panel file version of the selected folder of XGT Panel update
dialog box.
(4) Downloading XP-Runtime during Project Sending
If project download is not available since the version of a device and XP-Builder is different, try to proceed the task after
download XP-Runtime that builder has and match with builder’ version. Accordingly, XP-Runtime can be downgraded or
upgraded compared with the current XP-Runtime version. However, if ‘forcefully sending XP-Runtime’ option is activated
and the version of builder and XP-Runtime is the same, download XP-Runtime.
(5) Displaying the progress at output screen during SEND, RECEIVE
It displays the progress status at output screen during SEND, RECEIVE.

Chapter 7 Online

7-12

(3) [Download] Dialog Box Setting

Sending Items Description
Download to XGT
Panel (a)
The project can be transmitted to XGT Panel by online and the process is divided into 3 steps as below.
(1) XP-Runtime Download
If project download is not available since the version of device and XP-Builder is different,
downgrade XP-Runtime of installed XP-Builder. However, if XP-Builder’s version is lower than a
device’s one, ask a user about downgrade before download.
(2) Downloading the revised part of project
If the identical project is revised and continuously downloaded during Project Sending, the only
revised part will be downloaded except the initial download with a device.
(3) Communication Driver Download
Compare HMI device’s communication version with XP-Builder’s driver version and update
communication driver as the latest version.
Object to be
connected (b)
It displays setting description of the object that is already designated.
Save to removable
devices (c)
Data is not sent to XGT Panel through direct communication but it can be saved at USB, CF Card and
realize offline sending by inserting the related devices to XGT Panel. If you designate the folder route for
saving, the whole project and XP-Runtime will be saved at the folder. For details, refer to 7.5 Transmitting
through Portable Storage Devices and manual.
File path (d) It displays a saving route when the data is saved at external devices.
Download project
all forcedly (e)
It does not send the revised part only but downloads the whole project.
Update XP
Runtime forcedly(f)
When sending a project, it updates XGT Panel of the object to be connected forcefully and transmit the
project file. In the case of forceful download, if the XGT Panel version of XP-Runtime is different from the
device version supported by XP-Builder, transmission will be terminated with an error message.
Delete all
monitoring data (g)
The existing monitored data means recipe, logging, alarm history in SRAM of XGT Panel. The option is
established, the device will delete SRAM data when it starts download.
Include upload
project file (h)
In case the option is established, it compacts the project file and sends them to the device.
Settings (i) It can change the object and contents to be connected.
Browse (j) You can select the object to be transmitted. Under Ethernet, you can choose several objects and in this
case, downloading the whole project is available only.

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

Chapter 7 Online
7-13
Note
(1) Checking memory capacity for Project Sending
It is activated before transmitting HMI device to prevent memory capacity from exceeding in advance during download.
Before transmission, a user can compares the device’s Flash and USB memory capacity with the data capacity to be sent
and check previously if it exceeds limitation.
The whole flash memory of the device will be the basis to judge if download is allowable or not since downloading the
whole is performed after removing all flash data.
In the case of downloading revised part, check available flash capacity that remains at the device and the external devices
including USB, CF is bases on their available remaining capacity. Supposing that uploaded project is saved at USB, refer
to the below calculation process to judge if it exceeds memory capacity.
Capacity for the device’s flash = File size of the while download-Uploaded project’s capacity
Capacity for the device’s CF = Uploaded project’s capacity
1.1) Downloading the whole project
If the whole flash capacity of the current device is bigger than the capacity for the device’s flash and the current USB’s
available capacity is bigger than uploaded project size, download is allowable.
1.2) Downloading revised part
If the available flash capacity of the current device is bigger than the capacity for the device’s flash and the current USB’s
available capacity is bigger than uploaded project size, download is allowable.
(2) If download is not available, several messages will be shown as below and download will be suspended. It displays the
current download memory capacity of the device with project capacity for a user’s judgment.

Chapter 7 Online

7-14

7.3 Transfers to Removable Device
Transmitting through Portable Storage Devices sends the project file to XGT Panel with portable storage devices. After XP-Builder
saves the project file through portable storage devices, the saving equipment will be connected to XGT Panel and the project will be
brought through the menu of XGT Panel.
(1) Executing Project Sending
[Procedures]
(a) Press the Menu [Communication]–[Send] (or select a toolbar image
.)
(b) Check the menu [Saving through external storage devices] and select the folder for project
download at portable storage devices. Please make sure to select the drive including portable storage devices.
The project will be saved at the folder specified or input by a user under“XP_Project”of portable storage devices. If there is
no route, it will be automatically created.
H:XP_Project Folder for saving project
H: The drive indicates portable storage devices. In case of no portable storage devices, download is not allowable with
warning message.
XP_Project: XP-Builder downloads a project to this folder. The folder should be at the top directory of portable storage
devices and if it does not exist, it will be automatically created. The folder is the basis to search for the project from XGT Panel.
Folder for saving project: If a user input the name of folder for saving project, it will be created under XP_Project folder and
save project data.
(c) Press‘Send’button.

Chapter 7 Online
7-15
(2) [Send] Process
If you press [Send] button, XP-Builder’s operation procedures is as below.
If error occurs during progress, the process will be suspended with notice at output screen.
(a) Check error of the project.
(b) In case that the project is not saved, try it again.
(c) Make XP-Runtime folder under the folder for saving project and copy the XGT Panel program.
(d) Save the project file to the folder for saving project.
(e) If the project has a file recipe, try to save it after checking the saving route with a user.
Note How to download through portable storage devices
[Transmitting through Portable Storage Devices] provides only sending the whole project and XP-Runtime forcefully.
Furthermore, the options; Deleting all existing monitored data and Including uploaded project file are applied to the device
like normal online project.
Note
(1) In case that download is not available through portable storage devices
If XP-Builder’s HMI version is different from XGT Panel version of XP-Runtime, transmission process will be terminated
with error message for a user.

Chapter 7 Online

7-16

7.4 Receiving Project File
Receiving Project File is reading the project file from the XGT Panel.
1) Receiving Project file
[Sequence]
(a) Press [Communication] – [Receive] in the menu. (or select the toolbar image ).
(b) Receiving after checking the target
Check I target is correct or not. If not, press “Settings” button and change the connection setting.
Press “Upload” button and start receiving the project.
(c) If a communication password is set in XGT Panel, a communication password check dialog box is invoked. Enter a correct
password and press OK.

Chapter 7 Online
7-17
(d) If there is no project file downloaded in the HMI device, the following message will be invoked.
(e) If you execute project transfer, a progress dialog box will be invoked.
(f) If project reading is normally executed, XP-Builder closes the present project and opens the newly read project file.
2) [Receive] Process
The following are the sequence of actions of XP-Builder when you press [Read].
If an error occurs during the progress, the error is shown in the output window and the progress stops.
(a) Connect to XGT Panel
(b) Check the communication security password setting
(c) Read the XGT Panel information and check whether there is any project file
(d) Start receiving

Chapter 7 Online

7-18

3) [Download] Dialog Box Setting

Receiving Items Description
Connect to (a) Displaying the contents of designated connection settings.
File path (b) Displaying the saving route for interpreted data
Setting the object to be received
(c)
Setting the object to be received : Select to receive project file or backup file
Backup data (d) Displaying XGT Panel’s backup data list.
Settings (e) You can change XGT Panel to be connected.
Browse (f) Designating the folder to save interpreted data
Refresh(g) Refreshing backup data list

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)

Chapter 7 Online
7-19
7.5 Receiving Backup
Backup data download is reading various backup files saved in XGT Panel and saving them in the computer.
1) Execution
[Sequence]
(a) Press [Communication] – [Receive] in the menu. (or select the toolbar image ).
(b) Selecting backup data button
Select check-button .
If check-button is selected, XP-Builder reads backup data file list saved at XGT Panel and displays it at
the screen.
The below picture is the example of reading backup data file list from [165.244.149.113] XGT Panel and displaying it at the
screen.

Chapter 7 Online

7-20

(c) Select the backup data item to read and the folder to save the backup file.
Chapter 7 Online
7-21
(d) If a communication password is set in XGT Panel, a communication password check dialog box is invoked. Enter a correct
password and press OK.
(e) If backup file reading is normally executed, a following progress dialog box appears.
(f) When data download is completed, the read file is transformed into the CSV file format and copied in the folder designated
by the user.
2) [Receiving] Process
The following are the sequence of actions of XP-Builder when you press [Read].
If an error occurs during the progress, the error is shown in the output window and the progress stops.
1) Connect to XGT Panel
2) Bring the backup data file items to read and display the data list in the reading item tree
3) Checking communication password setting in the XGT Panel. Display password dialog box to check password
4) Start receiving
5) Saves the file in the designated file path.

Chapter 7 Online

7-22

Note
(1) Over-Write message during receiving project file and backup data
If there are the same files as the receiving file in directory under reception communication, you can select 5 operation mode; ‘Yes’,
‘Yes to all’, ‘Cancel’, ‘Cancel all’, ’No, as other folder’.

Items Description
Yes It executes to over-write the related file only shown at the message.
Cancel It cancels to over-write the related file only shown at the message.
Yes to all It executes to over-write not only the related file but also all duplicate files to be
generated in the future.
Cancel all It cancels to over-write not only the related file but also all duplicate files to be
generated in the future.
No, as other folder A user can select other folder and all files will be saved as the folder changed by a user
in the future.

(2) Backup data includes logging, alarm, recipe, screen capture, memo pad. While Logging, alarm, recipe is CSV file, memo pad
and screen capture is BMP type.
Select the items to read from the backup data tree list.
Designate the [Destination folder] folder to save the read files.

Chapter 7 Online
7-23
7.6 XGT Panel Update
XGT Panel Update is upgrading XGT Panel SW executed in XGT Panel.
(1) Update of XGT Panel
[Sequence]
1. Press [Communication]-[XGT Panel Update]
.
2. Check the target. You can change the target by pressing the “Settings” button.
3. Designate the location of the folder where the engine file you want send exists.
4. Press [Update].
If a password is set, a password check dialog box is invoked.
5. The progress dialog box is invoked.

Chapter 7 Online

7-24

 

Caution
Cautions in Sending Engine File
The Sending engine file is an important function executing XGT Panel. If execution fails, A/S service is
necessary and therefore caution is required. In program transfer, pay attention to the following.
1) Ending the XP-Builder during transfer
2) Deleting or shifting the program execution folder during transfer
3) Transfer of files on the Internet

(2) Setting [XGT Panel Update] dialog box

XGT Panel update items Description
Connected object (a) Displaying the contents of designated connection settings.
File path (b) Displaying the file position of XGT Panel to be transmitted.
File version of selected XGT
Panel (c)
Displaying the file version of XGT Panel in selected folder.
XGT Panel version that can
be updated (d)
Displaying the version that can be updated into XGT Panel of selected folder.
Connection settings (e) You can change XGT Panel to be connected.
Browse (f) You can change the file position of XGT Panel

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Chapter 7 Online
7-25
7.7 Change and Display of XGT Panel Information
This is displaying XGT Panel information data or changing the time or connection password
[Sequence]
1. Press [Communication] – [XGT Panel Information] in the menu and press Connected XGT
Panel Tap.
2. The following dialog box is invoked and the description of each state is as follows.

Device Information Description
XGT Panel Displaying the kinds of connected XGT Panel.
Operation status Displaying the current status ; menu, operation, program update
Engine version Displaying the engine version.
XP Builder version Displaying the XGT Version supported by an engine
Flash memory Displaying used capacity from the whole flash capacity.
CF Card Displaying used capacity from the whole CF capacity
USB memory Displaying used capacity from the whole USB capacity
PLC0 ~ PLC3 Displaying the name of PLC Driver that is under operation from connected XGT Panel.

Chapter 7 Online

7-26

 

Device Information Description
Buzzer Output When pressing a buzzer at XGT Panel, you can select if the buzzer rings or not.
Basic time to keep
connection
When XGT Panel is connected through controller and Ethernet, it sets up the time to judge the
controller’s connection status. If there is no specific request from the controller during the fixed time, XGT
Panel will regard the controller as not being connected and terminate connection.
Alias name You can create the name of XGT Panel to distinguish easily several XGT Panels of network.

Chapter 7 Online
7-27

Device Information Description
Date, Time It displays the date and time at the present. If you press [Read Again] button, correct time will be shown
again.
Time setting There are two methods to establish XGT Panel time.
1. Setting the time equally to the current PC
2. Setting specific date and time
If you press [OK] button after setting the date, time through the above methods, XGT Panel’s date and
time will be changed.

Chapter 7 Online

7-28

 

Device
Information
Description
Setting connection
password
If you press [Apply] button after establishing the existing password and inputting new one, XGT
Panel’s connection password will be established. The password is needed to [Send] to XGT Panel. If
you press Deletion button, password will be deleted. However, if there is no established password, you
can not inputting previous password.

Note
(1) You can not see the device information right after completing to send project. Operation status is displayed but other
information is not displayed.

Chapter 7 Online
7-29
7.8 Communication Errors and Troubleshooting
There are three communication error codes, which are the lower error during communication, upper error sent from XGT Panel and
the error judged by the editor.
There are three error types that occur during communication.
(1) Project Error

Description How To Deal with the Error
The project ID is not correct. This occurs when the projects in the device and builder are different. Execute entire
download.
Save the project first. This appears when you attempt download without saving the project after creating
the project first. Try again after saving the project.
There is an error in the project. Check the message in the window.
The XGT Panel model does not match
the model set in the editor.
This is shown when you download the project file of which the XGT model is not
the same. Change the XGT model type in the project properties or transfer the file
of which the model is the same.
Shift to the XGT Panel program update
mode.
This is not the program update mode. Press program update button in the device.
The backup data you want to download
is not in XGT Panel.
When there is no backup data
The compressed project file you want to
download is not in the XGT Panel.
You last downloaded with the project file not included
File transformation error Reading is impossible because of an error in the file read from the device.
Download again.

(2) Data Management Error

Display Description How To Deal with the Error
The previous project information is not available. The previous project information cannot be found.
Execute entire download.
XP-Builder
The backup path has been incorrectly designated. The font or image download path is not correct.
Check that the USB or CF is installed in the device
and modify the download path in the project
properties information.
The file cannot be read. Check whether another
program is being used.
The download file is locked. Check whether two
projects of which the builders are the same are
opened.
The file is not writable. Check the disk memory. The file cannot be created in the device. Check the
memory.

(3) Communication Error

Description How To Deal with the Error
No reply within the set period or disconnected There is an error during data transfer. Check whether there is any problem
with the cable or electric supply.
Disconnected. Try again after connection. This is shown when the device is disconnected. Check the cable
connection and whether the transfer environment setting matches the
device.
Problem with data Wrong data is included in transfer. Try again.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-1
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
With various images registered, the Graphic Library can be used as the background or object image. The Graphic Library is divided
into the System Graphic Library and User Graphic Library.
The Object Library sets and registers frequently used objects so that the user can easily edit objects.
Note
(1) The differences between the Graphic Library and Object Library are as follows.
(a) The Graphic Library is saved in the form of an image file. It is used as an image element of Images or objects and created as
a Image when drawn onto the screen.
(b) The Object Library itself is saved as an object or figure, so has the original properties at the time of object registration and is
created equally.
8.1 Graphic Library
Graphic Library is divided into System Graphic Library and User Graphic Library.

Type Description
System Graphic Library z About 1,000 images are put into and registered in 26 categories and the user can not edit
them as they want.
It is possible to select images according to projects by adding 256-color Raster
Graphics library category available for 256-color device type(XP30-TTE) or 256-color
mode. It is helpful in reducing drawing capacity by half since the image size is lowered
by half than 65535 library and in mitigating image spread phenomenon in 256-color
economic device or 256mode device. If the last caption of the category shows‘256_R’, it
means that it is 256-color library.
User Graphic Library z The user cannot register or delete the image and when it is saved, it is not saved in the
Graphic Library but the present editing project.
z User Graphic Library can be used by invoking the User Graphic Library of another project in
the present project.
z The User Graphic Library registered in the current project can be used in another project by
transferring it.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-2

8.1.1 Graphic Library Window Composition
Library List
Image List Window
Screen
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-3

Type Description
Library List About 1,000 images are put into and registered in 26 categories and displayed in the list.
Image List Window Displays the images registered in each list. If you click on an item, the image registered in it is displayed in
the image list window.
The image registered in ANIMATION list is
displayed
The image registered in BASIC_SQUARE list is
displayed
.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-4

 

Type Description
Screen The Graphic Library registered in this can be inserted and edited.

Note
- The System Graphic Library is divided into the Raster Image List and Vector Image List. The differences and features are as
follows.

Type Features
Raster Image List z Images are displayed in pixels as a bitmap image.
z An image can be damaged when it is zoomed in or out.
z If the Raster Image List is used as the background image in an object, the pattern and color
cannot be changed and only the original copy must be used.
z The names of the Graphic Library list are followed by [_R].
Vector Image List z Images are expressed by connected lines.
z Images are small and image information is not affected when the image is zoomed in or
out.
z If the Vector Image List is used as the background image in an object, the pattern or color
can be changed and applied.
z The names of the Graphic Library are followed by [_V].

8.1.2 Library Insertion, Editing and Background Image Setting
This provides the function of inserting, editing and setting the System Graphic Library or User Graphic Library as the background
image of the window.
The method of selecting the desired image from the graphic list and inserting it in the window is as follows.
[How to Insert]
(1) Click on the desired list in the Graphic Library list.
(2) The images registered in the list are displayed in the image list window.
(3) Select the desired image, drag it to a desired place on the screen with the left button on the mouse pressed and release the
button.
(4) An image is created on the screen.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-5
The method of selecting a desired image on a graphic list, creating it on the screen and editing it is as follows.
[How to Edit]
(1) If you want to modify a created image, double-click on it.
(2) An image list dialog box is invoked. Select the list and image you want to modify and click on [OK].
(3) The image has been changed.
Drag
Double-click
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-6

The result of changing Slide6Left image of SILDE_R list into Slide2criticalPnt is as follows.
You can set a desired image in a desired graphic list as the background image of the screen.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-7
[How to Set as the Background Image]
(1) Click on the desired list in the Graphic Library list.
(2) The images registered in the list are invoked on the image list window.
(3) Press the right button on the mouse on the desired image in the screen.
(4) Click on [As Background Image] or click on hot key B.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-8

Note
(1) You can remove the set background image as follows.
(a) Press the right button on the mouse.
(b) Click on [Screen Properties].
(c) Click on [Background] in the screen registration information dialog box.
(d) Uncheck [Use BG Image] setting.
8.1.3 User Graphic Library List Creation, Deletion and Name Change
The User Graphic Library list refers to the list of the graphic category list added by the user as well as the graphic category list provided
by the XP Builder system. That is, the user can register and delete lists other than the category list provided by XP Builder.
[How To Create User Library List]
(1) Press the right button of the mouse on the Library.
(2) Click on [Create User Library] or hot key C.
(3) A list of which the name is Graphic08193 is created.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-9
[How to Delete User Library List]
(1) Click on the User Graphic Library list you want to change.
(2) Press the right button of the mouse in the selected list.
(3) Click on [Delete Library] or hot key D.
The User Graphic Library created by the user is given a random name. After adding the list, the user can change the name as
he wants.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-10

[How to Change User Graphic Library List Name]
(1) Click on the User Graphic Library list you want to change.
(2) Press the right button of the mouse in the selected list.
(3) Click on [Rename] or hot key R.
(4) When the list name is changed into editing mode, change the name and press Enter.
(5) The name has been changed.
[How To Change User Graphic Library List Name 2]
(1) Click on the User Graphic Library list you want to change.
(2) Click on the selected list once again, and then it changed into the editing mode.
(3) Then change the name and press Enter.
(4) The name has been changed.
Note
(1) List number of user graphic library is from 2094 to 4095, 2047 categories can be made.
(2) If the user first adds a graphic list, the list name begins with Graphic08193. From then, every time the user adds another graphic
list, the number increases by 1, with the second list name being Graphic08194. That is, the graphic list name is given with the 5
digit number following Graphic increasing.
(3) The name of the System Graphic Library cannot be changed.
(4) User graphic library category is aligned in ascending order when creating or changing user graphic library.
Press the right button on mouse Editing mode List name changed

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-11
8.1.4 Registration and Deletion of User Graphic Library
User Graphic Library refers to the graphic image created by the user other than the graphic image provided by XP Builder. That is, the
user can register and delete Images other than the images provided by XP Builder.
The System Graphic Library provided by XP Builder cannot add any image and the lists in which an image can be added are as
follows.

Addable Graphic Library List Description
List created by the user The user creates the Graphic Library list and adds images to the list.
The USER list of the XP Builder graphic lists Images are added to the USER list previously created to the Graphic Library of XP
Builder.

The two lists have the same image adding methods, but in case of the former, you should add the user library list and then add an
image.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-12

There are two ways of adding an image as follows.

How To Add Image Description
In Category List 1. Select the list created by the user or USER list and press the right button of the mouse.
2. Click on [Insert Image] or hot key A.
3. Select the desired image in the folder where it exists.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-13

How To Add Image Description
In Image List Window 1. Select the list created by the user or USER list
2. The images registered in the list are displayed in the image list window.
3. Press right button of mouse on a point in the image list window.
4. Click on [Insert Image] or hot key A.
5. Select the desired image in the folder where it exists.

You can also delete the image added as above. You can delete it only in the image list window.
[How To Delete Image]
(1) Select the image you want to delete in the image list window.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse on the selected image.
(3) Click on [Delete Image] or hot key D.
(4) The image has been deleted in the image list window.
(You can also delete the image by pressing Delete key on the keyboard with the image clicked on)
You can also delete all the images registered in the USER list or added by you at a time. You can delete images only in the image list
window.
[How To Delete All Images]
(1) Press the right button of the mouse in the image list window.
(2) Click on [Delete All Images] or hot key D.
(3) All the images in the image list window have been deleted.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-14

Note
The following cautions should be made when adding images depending on device types. For more detail, refer to
the chapter 13
(1) In case that the device is not an economic-type device(XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE), available image types when
adding pictures are BMP, JPG, GIF, TGA, PNG, TIF, WMF, ICO and PCX. But, for economic devices,
available images types are limited to BMP, GIF, JPG and WMF
(2) When the user’s images are registered, for black-white device (XP30-BTE, XP30-BTA), image is converted
into black-white image and for 256 device (XP30-TTE) and device where 256 mode is
selected, image is converted into 256 color image.
(3) If 65535 color device type is changed to economic device (E.g. XP30-TTA->XP30-TTE) and
[Communication]-[Send] or [Tool]-[Data Check] is pressed when setting the project, error message will be
displayed on the output window if images other than BMP, GIF, JPG and WMF are included.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-15
8.1.5 User Graphic Library Import/Export
These are necessary for sharing User Graphic Library images between projects.
That is, you can export the images for another project to reuse the user image or invoke the send out files from another project.
User Graphic Library Export is saving the Graphic Library list and images registered by the user in a file.
There are two ways to export User Graphic Library as follows.

Export Description
In the category list 1. Select the Graphic Library list you want to export.
2. Press the right button on the mouse on the selected list.
3. Click on [Export] or hot key E.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-16

 

Export Description
In the image list
window
1. Select the list created by the user or USER list.
2. The image registered in the list is displayed in the image list window.
3. Press the right button on the mouse at any point in the image list window.
4. Click on [Export] or hot key E.

If you choose export as above, the User Graphic Library is saved in the form of a file and the saving path and file should be
selected.
The following is the process of invoking the file which has been exported to the User Graphic Library list from a new project.
User Graphic Library Import refers to reusing the User Graphic Library saved in a file by inserting it in the current project.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-17
There are three methods of importing User Graphic Library and the results vary according to the method.

Import Description
In the category route
list
1. Select a category route list.
2. Press the right button on the mouse in the route list.
3. Click on [Import Graphic Library] or hot key I.
4. Select the desired file name in the path of the file to import.
5. A new User Graphic Library list has been created.
[
In this case, a new User Graphic Library list has been created.
In the selected
category list
If you execute [Import] in a selected category list, it is tantamount to adding the image of the file
invoked to the present category.
1. Select the list to which to add an image.
2. Press the right button on the mouse in the selected list.
3. Click on [Import] or hot key I.
4. Select the desired file name in the path of the file to invoke.
5. An image has been added to the present list without a new list added.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-18

 

Import Description
Image registered in the previous [User List]
Image of the invoked file

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-19

Import Description
In the image list
window
1. Select the user-created list or USER list.
2. The image registered in the list is displayed in the image list window.
3. Press the right button on the mouse at a point in the image list window.
4. Click on [Import] or hot key I.
5. Select the desired file name in the path of the file to import.
6. An image has been added to the present list without a new list added.
Image registered in the previous [User List]
Image of the invoked file

Note
(1) In case of adding the user graphic library, it is added to project data transferred to XGT Panel. So register the image
used in the screen data to reduce the project data capacity.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-20

Note
1) When an image has not been added to the User Graphic Library list, you cannot set the [Export] function.
2) In [Export], the basic extension is xpg and if you do not enter the extension, it is automatically given.
3) The User Graphic Library list added by [Import] begins with Graphic08193 regardless of the file name. If the user invokes another
graphic list, the number increases by 1 and the name becomes Graphic08194. That is, the name of the graphic list added by
[Import] is given with the five digit number following Graphic increasing.
4) With respect to [Import] in the category list, the difference is as follows.

[Import] from the category list route A new User Graphic Library list is created.
[Import] from the selected list A new list is not created but the image registered in the selected
list is added.

5) If you bring data to the same category through [Import] after [Export], ID may be occupied by other image. In this case, ID can not
be duplicated due to the existing image and new ID will be allocated·added. Accordingly, if you copy the object or image from other
projects, the image may be different from the original one.
8.1.6 User graphic library; Saving image/Image information/ Changing image/Applying transparency
User graphic library image file provide the functions; Saving image/Image information/ Changing image/Applying transparency
for a user to edit control the image. Saving image provides the function to save the registered image as a file and it is also useful
when you try to register the image to user library again after changing it.
Image Information function gives the current image’s size, namely, BYTE data. When download is not available due to HMI
capacity since too big image size is registered, through Image Information, you can check the image size and delete or re-register
it. When too many objects are registered at user library and you delete the existing image and add new one, the ID will be
changed and you need to adjust the object image newly. In this case, through Changing Image function, you can just change the
image easily at user library without repeating adjusting procedural all over again; therefore it is very useful function.
In the meanwhile, when you register the picture at a library and place it to the screen, you may want some area to be
transparent. In this case, if you replace the area into RGB (2, 5, 2) color at image editor (ex: drawing board) and register it at a
library after saving, you can see the intended area will be transparent.

Item Description
Save as a file Save the registered imaged as a file.
(1) For the registered image at user library, press a right button and select the menu [Save as
file].
(2) Then, the below file dialog will be shown and you can see the file type of original image at
file format. After selecting the route and inputting file name, save it at right place.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-21

Item Description
(3) You can edit image file and re-use for your own purpose with image making tools including
drawing board.
Image Information It displays the information on image size, namely BYTE.
(1) For the registered image at user library, press the right button and select the menu
[Image Information].
(2) The information on the image size will be displayed as BYTE as below.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-22

 

Item Description
Changing Image It changes the image into other one.
(1) For the registered image at user library, press the right button and select the menu
[Changing Image].
(2) If a file dialog is shown, select the image to be changed and press Open button.
(3) You can see user graphic image of the related position has been changed with the
objects registered to the screen provided that the image is applied.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-23

Item Description
Applying transparency If you use the function, the area applied default value RGB (2, 5, 2) will be transparent. This
property is not activated as a default value. If you want to designate other transparent color
instead of RGB (2, 5, 2), refer to the below explanation to select transparent color.
1) Open the intended image file at a drawing board.
2) Change the area to be transparent with RGB(2,5,2) function and save it.
3) After registering it to a library, check ‘Apply Transparent Color’.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-24

 

Item Description
4) Register it to the screen and check if the area where RGB(2,5,2) is applied seems to
be transparent.
Selecting transparent
color
The default value for the above transparent color is RGB(2,5,2). However, when a user tries to
apply other transparent color to the existing image, refer to the following.
(1) After register image and select ‘Apply transparent color’, click the menu ‘Selecting
transparent color’
1) If the dialog box to select transparent color is shown, the RGB value of current color
will be displayed at the bottom.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-25

Item Description
2) Click the transparent color of intended area and press ‘OK’ button.
3) Accordingly, Preview for the related graphic image library and RGB(255,0,255) area of
inserted image will be displayed as transparent color.

8.1.7 Registering the selected figure to graphic library as WMF format
Through the function, figures registered by a user can be entered into a graphic library as WMF image format used for XP Panel
only. A user can make WMF format at the device and edit·save·re-use unbroken image regardless of magnification, reduction
since WMF can realize graphic computation with vector format.
[How to register the selected figure to graphic library as WMF format]
(a) Create one user category at graphic library.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-26

(b) Place the figure at the screen and click right mouse button to select the menu [Insert the selected shapes to active graphic
library].
(c) Through the above category, the figures will be registered to graphic library as WMF format.
Note
(1) When registering a figure as WMF format, object and string can not available.
(2) If some brush and texture marked with a red box are elected for colorfill of the figure, please be noted that
registration is not available. In the case of WMF registration, the below restricted figure image, brush, texture require
much data during saving, so they are limited.
(3) In the case of unregisterable figure due to the above restrictions, the menu will be disable and the message will be
shown at status bar.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-27
8.2 Object Library
In Object Library, frequently used objects and figures can be made into a library and reused. Like Graphic Library, Object Library has
the System Graphic Library and User Graphic Library and can register and delete the User Graphic Library only.
The Object Library is divided into the system Object Library and user Object Library.

Type Description
System Object Library zFrequently used objects with the switch and lamp are registered in 7 categories and the user
can not edit them.
User Object Library zThe user can register and delete the objects and when saved, they are not saved in the Object
Library but in the present editing project.
zThe user Object Library of another project can be invoked and used from the present project.
zThe user Object Library registered in the present project can be sent out to another project so
that it can be used there.

8.2.1 Library Window

Library List
Image List Window
Window
Image List Window

Library List

Screen

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-28

 

Type Description
Library List About 1,000 images are put into 26 categories and displayed in lists.
Image List Window Images registered in each list are displayed. If you click on a list, the images registered in the list are
displayed in the image list window.
Images registered in the ANIMATION list Images registered in the BASIC_SQUARE list
Window You can insert and edit the object Library.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-29
8.2.2 Library Insertion and Editing
This is the function of inserting and editing in the windows the system Object Library or user Object Library.
The method of selecting an object in the desired object list and inserting it in the window is as follows.
[How To Insert]
(1) Click on the desired list in the Object Library list.
(2) The objects registered in the list are displayed in the object list window.
(3) Select a desired object, drag it to a desired place with the left button on the mouse pressed and then release the left button.
(4) The object has been created in the window.
Drag
Drag
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-30

The method of selecting an object in the desired object list, creating it in the window and editing it is as follows.
[How To Edit]
(1) If you want to change the created object, double-click on the object.
(2) The object dialog box is invoked. Change the properties as you want and click on [OK].
(3) In the following, if you have changed the object image properties, the image has been changed.
Double-click
Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-31
8.2.3 User Object Library list Creation, Deletion and Name Change
The User Object Library refers to the object category list added by the user other than the object category list provided by XP Builder.
That is, the user can register and delete the lists other than the category list provided by XP Builder.
[How to create the user Object Library list]
(1) Press the right button on the mouse in the Object Library route.
(2) Click on [Create Object Library] or hot key C.
(3) A list of which the name is Object08193 has been created.
[How to delete the user Object Library list]
(1) Click on the user Object Library list you want to delete.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse in the selected list.
(3) Click on [Delete library] or hot key D.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-32

The user Object Library list created by the user is given a random name. The user can change the list name after adding the list.
[How to change the User Object Library list name]
(1) Click on the User Graphic Library list you want to change.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse in the selected list.
(3) Click on [Rename] or hot key R.
(4) When the list name becomes the editing mode, change the name and press Enter.
(5) The name has been changed.
[How to change the User Object Library list name 2]
(1) Select the User Object Library list you want to change.
(2) If you click on the selected list once more, it turns into the editing mode.
(3) When the list name becomes the editing mode, change the name and press Enter.
(4) The name has been changed.
Note
1) List number of user object library is from 8193 to 65535. 57343 categories can be made.
2) When the user first adds an object list, the list name begins with Object08193. Every time the user adds another graphic list, the
number increases by 1 and the name becomes Object08194. That is, the name of the graphic list is given with the increasing
five digit number.
3) The System Object Library name cannot be changed.
4) User object library category is aligned in ascending order when creating and changing name.
Press the right button on the mouse Editing mode List name changed

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-33
8.2.4 User Object Library Registration, Deletion and Icon Change
The User Object Library is the objects created by the user other than the objects provided by XP Builder system. That is, the user can
register and delete objects other than the objects provided by XP Builder system.
The objects cannot be added to the System Object Library provided by XP Builder and the lists to which objects can be added are as
follows.

List of addable Graphic Libraries Description
List created by the user The user creates the Object Library list and adds an object to the list.
USER list of XP Builder object lists An object is added to the previously created USER list in the Object Library of XP
Builder.

The two methods above are equal, but in case of the former, the user should add an Object Library list before adding an object.
Objects can be added as follows.

How to add
object
Description
In image list
window
1. Edit the object in XP Builder windows.
2. Select the list created by the user or USER list.
3. The object registered in the list is displayed in the object list window.
4. Drag the object to register in the XP Builder windows with the left button on the mouse to the object list item.
Drag

You can delete the object added as above. Deletion is possible only in the image list window.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-34

[How to delete image]
(1) Select an image to delete in the object list window.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse on the selected object.
(3) Click on [Delete] or hot key D.
(4) The object has been deleted in the object list window.
(You can also delete an object using the Delete key on the keyboard with the object selected)
You can delete all the objects registered in the list added by the user or USER list. Deletion of all objects is possible in the image list
window only.
[How to delete all objects]
(1) Press the right button on the mouse in the object list window.
(2) Click on [Delete All Objects] or hot key D.
(3) All the images have been deleted in the object list window.
You can transform the images of the objects registered in the list added by the user or USER list for the user to easily recognize them.
That is, the images of the objects can be transformed into icons as follows.
[How to transform the object image into an icon]
(1) Select the object to transform into an icon in the object list window.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse and select [Load Icon] or hot key I.
(3) The object has been transformed into an icon in the object list window.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-35
The name of the object added by the user is given a random name of Object. The user can change the automatically created
object name as follows.
[How to change the added object name 1]
(1) Click on the object to change in the object list window.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse on [Rename] or hot key R.
(3) Change the name after the object name turns into the editing mode and press Enter.
(4) The name has been changed.
[How to change the added object name 2]
(1) Click on the object you want to change in the object list window.
(2) Click on the list once more and it turns into the editing mode.
(3) When the list name becomes the editing mode, change the name and then press Enter.
(4) The name has been changed.
Note
1) When the user first adds an object list, the list name begins with Graphic08193. Every time the user adds another graphic list, the
number increases by 1 and the name becomes Graphic08194. That is, the name of the graphic list is given with the increasing
five digit number.
2) The name of the System Graphic Library cannot be changed.
Press the right button on the mouse Editing mode List name changed

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-36

8.2.5 User Object Library Export/Import
This is the function for sharing the user library objects between projects.
That is, you can export an object or inport such a file from another project for the present project to reuse the user object of another
project.
Export of the user object library refers to saving the Object Library list and the object registered by the user in a file.
You can export the User Graphic Library in two ways as follows.

Export Description
In the category list 1. Select the Object Library list to send out.
2. Press the right button on the mouse on the selected list.
3. Click on [Export] or hot key E.
In image list window 1. Select the list created by the user or USER list.
2. The image registered in the list is displayed in the object list window.
3. Press the right button on the mouse on a point in the object list window.
4. Click on [Export] or hot key E.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-37

Export Description

In such a case as above, the User Object Library is saved in a file and the saving path and file should be set.
The following is the process of importing the file which has been exported to the user project from a new project. User Graphic
Library invocation refers to inserting the User Object Library saved in a file into the present project for reuse.
You can import the User Graphic Library in two ways as follows and the results vary according to the method.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-38

 

Import Description
In category route list 1. Select the category route list.
2. Press the right button on the mouse on the route list.
3. Click on [Import Object Library] or hot key I.
4. Select the desired file name in the path of the file to invoke.
5. A new User Object Library list has been created.
In this case, a new User Object Library list has been created.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library
8-39

Import Description
In the image list window 1. Select the list created by the user or USER list.
2. The objects registered in the list are displayed in the image list window.
3. Press the right button on the mouse on a point in the image list window.
4. Click on [Import] or hot key I.
5. Select the desired file name in the path of the file to import.
6. The object has been added to the present list without a new list added.
Object registered in the previous
‘user object’
Image of the file imported by [Import]

Note
1) In case of Export, the basic extension is xpg and if you do not enter an extension, it is automatically given.
2) When the user first adds a user object list by [Import], the list name begins with Object08193 regardless of the file name. Every
time the user imports another graphic list, the number increases by 1 and the name becomes Object 08194. That is, the name
of the graphic list added by [Import] is given with the five digit number following Graphic increasing.
3) The difference in [Import] in the category list is as follows.

[Import Object Library] in the category list route A new User Graphic Library list is created.
[Import] from the selected list A new list is not created and the image registered in the
selected list is added.

Chapter 8 Graphic/Object Library

8-40

8.2.6 Name Change of the Object User Library
The Object Library has no file name, so requires the function of changing the caption into a name that can be memorized unlike the
Graphic Library.
[Sequence]
(1) Select the tree with the library of which the name you want to change and select [Rename] in the context menu of the object
you want to change.
(2) When the library label turns into the edit mode, change the caption and press Enter. Name change has been completed. If
you change the name into the same name as another category or entered unchangeable characters, a message appears to
tell you that you cannot change the name.
The name of the category can also be renamed in the same way as changing the name of each item of the library.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-1
Chapter 9 Useful Tools
The editor has a variety of functions that help you edit conveniently in many ways.
9.1 Finding and Replacing Devices
This function is finding the addresses of objects in an opened window and displaying them in the form of being selected in
the window.
The following is the procedure of finding for addresses.
[Procedure]
(a) Register two word lamps and enter HS0000 as their addresses in the basic tab.
(b) Select [Tool] - [Find in active screen].
(c) The Find Device dialog box is invoked on the screen. If an object is selected, the address of the selected object is
displayed in the text box of the device in the dialog box as shown below.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-2
(d) Click on the Find Next button.
As there is another lamp object with the same address, the second lamp object is displayed in the form of being selected
as shown below.
Note
(1) If there is no device to find, the following message is issued reading that it has searched by the end of
document. Search again?
(2) When search of the objects of all windows is finished, the object that was first searched for is searched for
again.
The following procedure is changing the address.
[Procedure]
(a) If you click on the Replace button, a text box is activated where you can enter the desired address.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-3
(b) Enter the desired address and click on the Replace button.
Then the address of the selected object is changed as you specified and the object is retrieved which has the next
address you are going to change is displayed as the Selection Mode.
If you click on the Replace button, the address of the selected object is changed and the “It has searched b the end of
document. Search again?” message is issued because there are no more objects that have an address to be changed
in the screen.
(c) Confirm that the address has been changed by opening the dialog box.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-4
Note
(1) There are options of the address retrieving the direct address or tag or both of them in Find/Replace
Device. That is, if the option of finding both the direct address and tag is selected, both are searched for
regardless of whether the address being searched for is a tag or direct address. With this option released,
if the address being searched for is a tag, the tag is found and if the direct address, it is also found.
(2) There is also the option of finding the consecutive device. If you do not use this option, only one
address you want to find is searched for.
If you use the consecutive device option and enter the number of consecutive devices, this option
retrieves or changes all the address within the entered range from the address that you want to find or
replace.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-5
9.2 Finding/Replacing All Devices
This function is for the user to find or replace the address of all the objects in the selected range.
9.2.1 Find All
[Procedure]
(a) Register two word lamps in the display and enter all the addresses as HSO in the basic tab.
(b) Select [Tool]–[Find/Replace All].
(c) The dialog box for finding/replacing all is invoked as follows. If an object has been selected, the address of the
selected object address is shown in the ‘Find what’ device text box.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-6
(d) Click on the Search Area Setting button and check the retrieval area to find. The entire project is selected by default.
(e) Click on the Find All button.
(f) The output window is activated and the information on the retrieved address is shown.
(g) If you double click on a particular column of Find result in the output window, the corresponding display and object are
activated.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-7
9.2.2 Replace All
[Procedure]
(a) Register two word lamps and enter all the addresses as HS0000 in the basic tab.
(b) Select [Tool]–[Find/Replace All].
(c) The dialog box for finding/replacing all is invoked as follows. Set the address and retrieval area to change and click on
the Replace All button.
A message saying that the execution cannot be cancelled is issued and if you click on Yes, Replace All is executed.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-8
(d) Confirm that Replace All has been successfully executed by double clicking on each object.
Note
(1) What is displayed in the output window as a result of Find All is shown in the order of the address, tag name,
display name, object ID and description.
(2) You can use the extension function by using which you can find or change all the address within the range.
For example, if you want to find or change all the address in the address range between HS0 and HS5,
enter as shown below.
(3) In Find All and Replace All, there is the ‘Display in Find Result 2’ option, which is the option displaying the
result in Find 2 window.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-9
9.3 Memory Use Status
If the current project data is transferred to XGT Panel, the extension is saved and transferred as files ending with HMI.
The size of a HMI file must not exceed the memory limit of XGT Panel, so it is important to know the size of the HMI file
and each component of the current project.
[Procedure]
(a) Create a project and arrange objects or figures on the screen.
(b) Select [Tool]-[Memory Statistics].
Each memory size is displayed in the window from the screen to the common items as follows.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-10
Note
(1) The Memory Statistics does not include images but only figures and objects. The image and font displays the total
use. If images are overlapped, only one of them is transferred to XGT Panel.
(2) If the memory being used of the image or font is very large, it can also be set to be saved in an external storage unit
of XGT Panel.
(3) Additional information included size of communication driver module.
(4) The font includes not only the font used in the XGT but also code page used in multi-language display function of
Text Display object.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-11
9.4 Device Cross Reference
Device cross reference has the same function as Find All Devices, but is different in that it retrieves and displays all the
device addresses of the entire project in the output window rather than a specific area.
[Procedure]
(a) Register objects as shown below and enter the address of each of them.
(b) Select [Tool]-[Cross Reference].
The contents of the cross reference are displayed in the output window showing all the addresses in the project. If you
double click on a certain column, the screen or object where the address is activated.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-12
9.5 Data Check
Project data check is the function of checking the components of which an error might occur in XGT Panel when an HMI
file is transferred to XGT Panel.
You can check that the deleted image number, tag, display number or address exists and the errors unique to each
object or common item are filtered.
For the messages issued in Data Check and the trouble shooting, see Trouble Shooting.
[Procedure]
(a) Register a bit switch in screen1 and a meter graph in screen 2.
(b) Select [Tool]-[Data Check].
(c) The error number and description are displayed in the output window as shown below.
That is, messages are issued saying that there is no error
If you close all the windows and double click on a certain column, the screens and objects corresponding to the errors of
the output window are activated and you can modify them.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-13
9.6 Viewing Device Map
The function displays the device information used for drawing as a picture for user’s convenience. Device searching
function that is the same as [Too]-[Device Cross Reference] indicates whether reference is applied or not.
[Screen composition of Device Map]

Item Description
Device type(a) Inputting the device type to be searched; Bit/Word.
Device Searching(b) Input the device address to be searched. After inputting device and pressing
Enter key, it will move to the related device.
Device Map(c) Displaying Device Map for user’s convenience.
Device Reference List (d) Arranging all position using the current devices selected by Device Map
Selecting direct address/tag view(e) Moving to the tab using direct address or tag
Tag List(f) Displaying tag list registered to tag table.

a
b
c
d
e
f

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-14
[Show]
(a) Select [View]-[Device Map screen] from the menu.
(b) When Device Map screen is shown, input the device area to be checked
(c) If the device is selected, the position that uses the selected device will be shown at device reference list in the bottom
of the screen
(d) If you select one of reference list and double-click a mouse button, it will move to the using position.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-15
9.7 Script Cross Reference
Script Cross Reference function displays the object or common properties used for script at output screen. When the
project is executed in XGT Panel, unexpected computation results may sometimes occur and it is likely to be the script
executed in a certain position of the project. In this case, the function supports debugging of the device by catching the
position used for script without complicated processes; opening and checking every property screen where all object,
common data, global·local script are applied.
[Procedures]
(a) Register the scripts of 4 projects as below.
(b)If you register global script as script_0001 and No. 1 screen is shown, register script_0002. Add pie graph object to
No.1 screen and register script_0003 to manipulation page with adding number input unit. Then, activate ‘Using input
script’ at the manipulation page for number input unit and register script_0004.
(c) Select [Tool]-[Searching all script] from the menu.
(c) You can see script name, position, object format and explanation will be shown at output screen. The above all
registered scripts will be also shown.
In the same way as other Search functions, if you double-click a certain line, you can see it will move to the object or
screen where the related script exists.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-16
9.8 Moving to Next/Previous Screen
Moving to Next/Previous screen provides plainly easy screen conversion function for edition; from the activated screen currently,
while you press Previous button ( ), the previous screen will be activated, you press Next button( ), the next screen will be
activated.
[Procedures]
(a) Register 3 screens as below.
(b) Open the screens in order [B-2], [B-1] and arrange them.
(c) Select [Tool]-[Next/Previous] from the menu or [Next/Previous] from toolbar.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-17
(d) If you select [Next], the existing [B-2] position will be replaced into [B-3] screen tab and [B-3] screen will be activated.
(e) If you select [Previous], the screen will be replaced into [B-1] that has already existed in [B-3] tab and [B-1] screen will
be activated.
Note
(1) The function for moving screen is also applied to Home·Windows·Secondary screen equally.
(2) While the activated screen is the last one of the project, [Next] tool or menu are not available, the activated
screen is the first one of the project, [Previous] tool or menu are not available.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-18
9.9 Property Screen
Through the function, a user can check and change easily(Home·Windows·Secondary) Screen information, the properties of
object, figure without opening a dialog box. Furthermore, the properties of two identical objects·figures or more can be displayed
without opening a dialog box and a user can easily change them at once.
[In case of selecting number output unit, displaying the properties at a property screen]
[[Procedure]
(a) Create the object or figure at a (Home·Windows·Secondary) screen.
(b) If you select [Tool]-[Property Screen] from the menu, property docking screen.
(c) If you select the object or figure to be checked, the properties will be shown at a property screen.
(d) The properties of two identical object·figure or more will be shown. In case of other objects, nothing will be shown at a
property screen.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-19

Item Description
Tree type(a) They are displayed as major items, sub-items.
For example, sub-items(X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, width, height) belong to major items
(coordinate) organizationally.
Ascending(b) All items are aligned in ascending order [A,B,C]
Extension or
Reduction (c)
It extends or reduces all items.

a
b
c

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-20

[Extension Status] [Reduction Status]

Note
(1) If you select two objects or more, each property will be displayed at the screen and the value of different
properties are shown as a blank.
If you select two number output units that have the same properties except only device address and explanation as
above, identical items will be shown. However, the device address and explanation will be displayed as a blank.
(2) If you change the properties at a property screen, the related property of selected screen, figure, object will be
reflected immediately.
(3) [Display] and [Conditions] of the object are not shown at a property screen.
(4) (1) ~ (3) are applied to the group composed of identical object or figure.
Two bit
switches
selected

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-21
9.10 Font Export/Installation
When you try to apply XP-Builder project that adopts special font for other PC, font error can occur. In this case, through Font
Export/Installation function, install the using font to your PC to solve the error.
9.10.1 Font Export
The font that is applied for XP-Builder can be exported.
[Procedures]
(a) Select [Tool]-[Font Export] from the menu.
(b) Select the folder for saving font and press [OK] button to execute Font Export.
9.10.2 Font Installation
You can install the font that has been already exported to your PC.
[Procedures]
(a) Select [Tool]-[Font Installation] from the menu.
(b) Select the folder where the font file exists and press [OK] button to execute Font Export.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-22
9.11 Automatically Registering string into string table
‘Automatically Registering string into string table’ function creates string table and add the project’s strings and object’s static
captions to string table. This convenient function provides multi-language through string table.
[Procedures]
(a) Create a project and arrange the object with various static captions and string.
(b) Select [Too]-[Automatically Registering string into string table] from the menu.
(c) Input ·Select the name of string table with edition language to be added.
(d) Check if the input string table is created and static string is added properly.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-23
Note
(1) If the input string name is duplicate with the existing name, the below warning message will be show.
(2) The string can be added up 1000pcs per string table so in case that more strings are added, new string table will
be created under the name of incremental number ; ‘_01’, ‘_02’. However, if the number of strings to be
registered is around 1000pcs limit, although there are some spaces in the added sting table, new string table will
be created with being registered from the first index.

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-24
9.12 HTML Device Copier
You can monitor the device of the XGT Panel on the Internet. Write the HTML Web page and copy the address of the device
to be monitored by using this HTML device copier. And then paste it to the HTML.
[Sequence]
(a) Create the project.
(b) Select [Tool] - ]HTML device copier] on the menu
(c) Select the action and size of the device to be copied.
(d) Input the device.
(e) Copy it by pressing [Copy] button
(f) Paste it to HTML editor
[Description on the dialog box]

Items Description
Action (a) Select Read or Write
Size (b) Select the size of the device.
Type (c) Select the type of the device to be read or written
Device (d) Input the target device
Preview (e) Displays the character string to be copied
Copy (f) Copies the character string on the Preview into the clipboard

Chapter 9 Useful Tools
9-25
Note
(1) HTML grammar

Function Description
GetXPData Reads the value of the device and return it with character string
Parameter 1 4byte device address. Hexadecimal expression
Parameter 2 Device size (1: bit, 2: 16 bit, 3: 32 bit)
Parameter 3 Return data type
1: Signed decimal
2: Unsigned decimal
3: Octal
4: Hex
5: Bin
6: BCD
7: Real

 

Function Description
SetXPData Writes the value to device.
Parameter 1 4byte device address. 16 hexadecimal expression
Parameter 2 Device size (1: bit, 2: 16 bit, 3: 32 bit)
Parameter 3 Return data type
1: Signed decimal
2: Unsigned decimal
3: Octal
4: Hex
5: Bin
6: BCD
7: Real

(2) For detail on the HTML grammar, refer to “Web Server” of the XGT Panel manual.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-1

Chapter 10 Project Printing
Project printing is aimed at making user data editing smoother by printing out the items of the project, that is, the contents of the project
tree items through Excel. You can take advantage of data rearrangement, excel resources and window resources by printing data in
Excel.
10.1 Print Setting
If you select [Project]-[Print Project], a dialog box is invoked where you can set printing.
10.1.1 List
You can choose the items to print and change their order in the list dialog box.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-2

 

Item Description
Print items The items in the project tree. They are in check boxes which turn into the ‘Selected Print Item’
as soon as you check them.
Select all Selects all the items.
Deselect all Unchecks the check boxes of all the selected items and deletes items from the selected print
item list.
Selected print items The area where the selected items are displayed on the left

[Procedure] <Example of adding print items and changing the order>
(a) Select the Text Table, Scheduler and Logging items in the list.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-3

(b) Change the order as follows by clicking on the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons.
(c) Click on the OK button. The Excel tabs are displayed in the order of print items specified above.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-4

10.1.2 Page Setting
You can set the pages to print.

Item Description
Size Sets the size of the paper.
Source This is fixed so you do not have to select this.
Orientation You can choose between Portrait and Landscape.
Margins You can set the space at the top, bottom, right, left, header and footer of the paper.
Printer Sets the printer.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-5

10.1.3 Header/Footer
You can insert a header and footer on the left, center and right at the top and bottom of the paper respectively. The header and
footer may include the following.

Item Description
Date You can insert the present date.
Time You can insert the present time.
Total page You can insert the total page.
Current page You can insert the current page.
Project name You can insert the project name.
Project path You can insert the project path.
Project item You can insert the project items.
For example, if you want to print the character string among the project elements, the
character string table is printed.
User specific You can enter what you want to print.

[Procedure] < Example of adding and printing a header/footer >
Open a project and add the project properties in the print setting dialog box. Set the header and footer in the following procedure.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-6

(a) Click on the Use Header check box.
(b) Click on the Center of the header.
(c) Double click on the project path.
(d) Click on the Use Footer check box.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-7

(e) Click on the Center of the footer.
(f) Double click on the current page and total pages as follows and place ‘/’ between them.
(g) Click on the OK button.
(h) Click on Preview Print in the Excel menu to check whether the header and footer have been printed out as you set.
<Header>
<Footer>

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-8

10.2 Print Contents
If you select all the print items in the print setting dialog box and click on the OK button, Excel starts as follows and the print items are
displayed in each tab of Excel.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-9

10.2.1 Project Property
This is summarizing and printing out the contents of the project properties dialog. Therefore, you can see the project settings
displayed in tables as they are.
The project print items are as follows.

Item Description
Summary The project name, storage location, author’s name, version, HMI model name and connection
control are printed.
Screen Change setting The start screen, screen change by the device and screen change switch device are printed.
Key window setting The key window numbers by hexadecimal number (HEX), character (ASCII), real number
(FLOAT) and decimal number (DEC) are printed.
Storage Option The use of media such as the image, font logging, recipe, screen capture and path name are
printed.
Language setting The default execution language, default editing language, language switching device, editing
language list and execution language list are printed.
Global script setting The set global script list is printed.
ETC. The printing direction, screen capture output and system alarm viewer are printed.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-10

10.2.2 Screen Thumbnails
This is summarizing and displaying the base, window and part screens on the screen in thumbnails.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-11

10.2.3 Screen
The edited contents are displayed in a sheet of Excel in detail.
Detail of each item is as follows.

Item Description
Summary Prints screen name, description, size, script, whether to show flow alarm.
Screen capture Prints entire screen in detail.
Object list Prints object name, object ID, object coordination and description.

Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-12

10.2.4 TextTable
The text table used in the present project is printed out along with the text properties.
10.2.5 Scheduler
The information of the scheduler set in the present project is printed.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-13

10.2.6 Logging
The information of the logging set in the present project is printed.
10.2.7 Flow Alarm
The settings of the flow alarm (number of alarms, font size, alarm number storage device and details of each alarm) are printed.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-14

10.2.8 System Alarm
The system alarm settings are printed as they are.
10.2.9 History Alarm
The total properties, tree structure, group and list of the history alarm are printed in this order.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-15

10.2.10 Recipe
The properties of the recipe and recipe list are printed.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-16

10.2.11 Script
As many script names as the number of scripts registered in the order of the contents are printed.
Chapter 10 Project Printing

10-17

10.2.12 Tag
The contents of the tag table are printed as they are. The tag lists are printed in the order of the tag name, device type, address and
description.
10.2.13 Cross Reference
The same contents as displayed in the output window when you click on cross reference in the menu are printed.
The devices referred to in the entire project are printed in the order of the device name, tag name, screen number, object ID and
description.
Note
(1) If printing does not work, check the following.
(a) Check the physical connection with the printer.
(b) Check whether the printing connection is correct.
(c) Check whether the printer driver has been correctly set up.

Chapter 11 simulation
11-1
Chapter 11 Simulation
You can simulate the data you have edited in the XP Builder editor and check the operation before you transfer them to XGT Panel.
In this chapter, we are going to learn the simulation.
Note
(1) The simulation function provides virtual PLC manipulation in your computer. The speed of the simulation might be
different from the actual operation carried out by the connected PLC.

Chapter 11 Simulation
11-2
11.1 Simulation Display

Item Description
Title bar(a) Displays the screen of XP-Builder.
Menu bar(b) The menu consists of File, Tool and Help.
Menu Submenu Function
File Exit Ends the simulation being currently carried out.
Tool Virtual Device Start Starts or stops the check of all the devices edited in XP
Builder.
See 11.1.2 Device Monitoring
Help XP_Simulator
information
You can check the version information.
Display(c) The edited contents are displayed in the same screen size and colors as the XGT Panel type (XP30-TTA,
XP30-BTA, etc.) set in XP Builder.

(a)
(b)
(c)

Chapter 11 simulation
11-3
11.1.1 Starting Simulation
This function is inputting the data to operate in the XGT Panel series into the XP Builder editor and saving the edited data.
[Procedure]
(a) Edit the data to operate in XGT Panel in the XP Builder editor.
(b) Save the edited display.
(c) Select [Tool]-[Simulation] in the menu.
If you have edited a switch increasing the bar graph, pie graph and word device by 10 and decreasing the word device by 10
using XP30-TTA, the result is displayed as follows.
If the following display, if you click on the switch increasing the word device by 10, you can simulate the graph being filled
according to the change of the value.

Chapter 11 Simulation
11-4
The result of the simulation in which you operate the switch increasing by 10 and the switch decreasing by 10 with your mouse
is as follows.
Note
(1) While the simulator is operating, you can neither start another simulator nor select the simulation menu as follows.
(2) The total size of the simulator screen differs according to the XGT Panel type set in XP Builder.
11.1.2 Device Monitoring
You can check or change the list, size, type and value of all the devices edited in XP Builder by using device monitoring.
[Procedure]
(a) Start the simulator.
(b) Select [Tool]-[Virtual Device Start] in the simulator tool bar.
Initial display
When you press the switch increasing by 10 When you press the switch decreasing by 10
Chapter 11 simulation
11-5
If you click on the Virtual Device Start button in the device list, the following window is invoked to show the device list.

Type Description
Title bar (a) The name of the device list currently activated is displayed.
The currently monitored device list such as the device list registered in device (the device list or device
registered in each screen) common setting is displayed.
Menu bar (b) The menu consists of File, Window, Display and Help.
Menu Submenu function
File Exit Ends the currently operating device monitor.
Cascade Displays the device list window in cascade. Window
Tile Displays the device list window in tile.
Icons Displays the device list window in icons.
Common device list Activates and displays the device list window set in
the common data such as the history alarm, recipe
and logging script in the XP Builder editor.
Screen device list Activates and displays the device list window set in
all the objects edited in the base screen and
window screen of XP Builder.
Help Information You can check the version information.

(a)
(b)
(c)

Chapter 11 Simulation
11-6

Type Description
Screen number
setting (c)
All the basic and window screens where the objects other than the devices edited in the common data
exist are in the combo box.
For example, create three base screens as follows and edit the object in which the device is used in
screen 1, 2.
The object in which the device is used is edited in screen 1, 2. You can choose from the 2 types of screen
in the combo box and the device address of the object used in the selected screen is shown in the list
window.
If you select the type and number of the screen you want to monitor, you can check the object name,
device address, device size and device value in the screen.
If there are two objects in which the device was used in base screen 2, they are shown as follows.

Chapter 11 simulation
11-7
You can check all the object names, device addresses, device sizes and device values edited in XP Builder in the device list
window.
Edit a switch increasing the bar graph, meter graph and device value by 10, another switch decreasing the device value by 10 and
a numeric display in base screen 1. Edit a numeric display in window 4091.
If you select [Simulation]-[Virtual Device Start]-[Basic Screen 1] in XP Builder, the following is displayed.
When basic display 1 has been selected

Type Function
Description of Object
(a)
The object name of the set device is displayed.
Device address (b) The set device address is displayed.
Size (c) The set device size is displayed.
Size type: bit, 16 bit (word), 32bit (word)
Value (d) The currently set device value is displayed.
Change the value (e) Click on this if you want to change the set device value.

If you select [Simulation]-[Virtual Device Start]-[Device List inserted Device Address in Common Property] in XP Builder, the
following list is displayed with the device set in the common data (logging, recipe, history alarm, etc.).
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Chapter 11 Simulation
11-8
11.1.3 Device Value Change
You can directly change the device value and simulate the value in the device list window.
In the case of a bit device, you can only change the On/Off state and as for a word device, you can directly enter the device value.
[Procedure]
(a) Click on the Value Change cell of the device line you want to change in the device list window.
1) Word Device
If you change the device value of the reference device HW0100 of the bar graph from 40 to 100, the procedure is as follows.
Click
Chapter 11 simulation
11-9
If you click on the cell, another window is invoked where you can enter the device. Enter the desired device value by using
the window.
If you change the device value of HW0100 from 40 to 100, the values of all the object data that have HW0100 are changed
into 100.
Device list window after the device value has been changed into 100
The value is reflected in the simulation as follows and the change of the value in the device list can also be simulated.
Enter the device value

Chapter 11 Simulation
11-10
2) Bit Device
You can change the value in the same way as the word device, but no window is invoked where you can change the value
but the On/Off state changes whenever you press Change Value.
The change state is reflected and displayed in the simulator display and device view list window as the word device value
change is.
11.1.4 Screen Viewer of Device List
If you click on the [Screen] menu in the device list window, the selected window is displayed the furthest to the front.
(1) If you select the Base Screen Device, the Base Screen Device list existing in the basic display or widow display is shown on
the top.
(2) If you select the Common Property Device, the Common Property Device list set in the common editing such as the flow alarm,
recipe and logging is shown on the top.
Note
(1) While device list window is executed, you can select only ‘Virtual Device Exit’.
(2) If you close the simulation window, the device list window is also closed.
Simulation before the device value is changed Simulation after the device value is changed into 98

Chapter 12 Bar Code Setting
12-1
Chapter 12 Bar Code Setting
You can connect a bar code reader to XGT Panel by using the RS-232C port (COM2).
12.1 Use and Setting Procedure
[Procedure]
(a) Select [Common]-[Project Properties]-[Extended Controller Settings].
(b) Check [Barcode Settings].
(c) You can change the detailed connection setting of the bar code by using [Detail Settings].
[Dialog Box]

Item Description
Bytes to Read (a) Sets the length of the transfer from the data read in the bar code to the device. If not set,
all the data of up to 255 characters from the bar code are transferred.
Data Storage (b) Enters the first device to save the data read from the bar code.
Read complete device (c) Turns ON the set device when the data read from the bar code has been saved.
Set communication (d) Sets the RS-232C communication the same as bar code setting.

a
b
c
d

Chapter 12 Bar Code Setting
12-2
12.2 Example of Use of Bar Code
The following example shows checking the data from the bar code with the text display by using the bar code.
[Procedure]
(a) Select the use of Bar Code in [Common]-[Project Properties]-[Extended Controller Settings].
(b) Click on [Detail Settings] and set the input device and the set communication value as shown below.

Chapter 12 Bar Code Setting
12-3
(c) Place the text display, bit switch and bit lamp object in the base screen and set them as below.
1) Text display
: device – HW0200
2) Bit switch
: device – HX00200, action type- alternative
3) Bit lamp
: device – HX00200
(d) Check whether the entered data is correctly displayed in the text display by downloading the project data to the XGT Panel,
starting the program and operating the bar code and whether the Read Complete Device bit turns ON by using the bit lamp.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-1
Chapter 13 Project Properties
The properties commonly applied to XP Builder projects are set.
The project properties include the following information.

Information Description
Summary Basic information on the project file such as the project name and author
XGT Panel settings The XGT Panel information set in the project
Screen Change The screen change option is set.
Security settings The right to use XGT Panel is set.
Key window settings Key window is designated.
Language The editing language and runtime language are set.
Storage settings The mobile storage unit of XGT Panel is designated.
Global script settings Global script items are set.
Auxiliary settings Printing, screen capture and system alarm view properties are set.
Extended controller settings Settings about barcode

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-2

13.1 Summary
The basic information on the project such as the project name, file path, author, creation date, modification date, last download date,
version and project description and so on is described.

Items Description
Project name (a) Changes the project name. The project name can be set differently from the file of the project. If the
project name is changed, the name of the highest node name of the project tree is also changed into the
changed project name.
File Path (b) Indicates the location of the file where the project is saved.
Author (c) Enters the author.
Created (d) Saves the time when the project file was first created.
Modified (e) Indicates the date when the project was last modified.
Downloaded (f) Indicates the date of the last download to XGT Panel.
Version (g) Indicates the project version. The user enters this for distinction of the version.
Description (h) Enters a brief description of the project.

h a b c d e f g
Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-3
13.2 XGT Panel Settings
It sets the information on the XGT Panel type and connection to the connected controller.
It sets the method and option of communication of XGT Panel with the controller.

Items Description
XGT Panel Type (a) Selects the XGT Panel type. As in the following illustration, the XGT Panel type and connection PLC
selected in the project wizard when the project is created is displayed in the initial display of the XGT
Panel setting window.
XGT Panel provides two models, which are in black and white and in color. That is, XGT Panel can
be changed into the XGT Panel providing the same kind of color as the XGT Panel selected in
Wizard. Although change of a 65536 XGT Panel in black and white into another XGT Panel in black
and white or change of a 65536 XGT Panel in color into another XGT Panel in color is possible,
change from color to black and white or change from black and white is not possible.
Use 1:N connection (b) The XP series provides connection to up to 4 PLC at a time with communication ports such as
RS232, RS485/422 and Ethernet. All these four ports can be used at the same time. PLC 1, PLC 2
and PLC 3 can be connected to RS232, RS485/422 and Ethernet ports respectively. If you select the

a
b
c
d
e
h
f
i
g
j
o
n
l
k
m

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-4

 

Items Description
multi-connection support checkbox, the Add/Delete Device button at the bottom of the window is
activated.
Controller settings (c) Connecting device properties page: selects the properties of the PLC connected to XGT Panel.
Maker (d) Selects the maker of the PLC connected to XGT Panel.
Product (e) If you select the maker in (d), the lists of products of the maker are displayed. Of them, select the PLC
to connect to XGT Panel.
Protocol (f) Designates the connection method between the XGT Panel and selected PLC. For correct
connection, be sure to check the hardware connection between the protocol and XGT Panel selected
for normal connection.
Detail Settings (g) Sets the connection method between the XGT Panel and selected PLC in detail. If the PLC is
selected, it is set in the default values, but selects it when you need to change it according to the
properties of the PLC device. A dialog box is invoked according to the properties of communication.
Time out (h) Decides the network time out during communication.
Wait to send (i) Sets the waiting time between unit data transfers during communication between XGT Panel and the
controller.
Simulator settings (j) Sets whether to use the simulator or not
Direct access Uses direct access. Communicates with controller (not supported now)
Use Emulator Uses an emulator. This function connects a virtual device supported program or controller
supported simulator.
Virtual memory/XG5000
simulator (k)
Selects one between virtual memory and XG5000 simulator
Retry count (l) When communication error occurs during communication between XGT Panel and controller,
sets retry count.
Refer to manual (m) You can see PLC communication driver manual.
Communication driver
version (n)
You can see PLC driver version
256 color mode (o) Creates a project as 256 color mode. Black-and-white type, economic type doesn’t support.

(1) XGT Panel Type Selection
[XGT Panel device type and properties]

Type Resolution Color
XP30-TTA 320 X 240 65,535
XP30-BTE 320 X 240 8
XP30-TTE 320 X 240 256
XP30-BTA 320 X 240 8
XP50-TTA 640 X 480 65,535
XP70-TTA 640 X 480 65,535
XP80-TTA 800 X 600 65,535
XP90-TTA 1024 X 768 65,535

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-5
Note
(1) Change of setting of XGT Panel is possible only to the mode supporting the same colors.
(2) When changing XGT Panel type, height and width of object/diagram varies according to resolution. At this time,
height/width of object whose height/width doesn’t change (history alarm viewer, data list viewer, logging viewer) and font size
is not affected by change of type.
(3) When changing resolution, the following message appears. If you press “Yes”, all objects and diagrams of project get
larger or smaller.
(4) If 65535 color device type is changed to economic device(E.g. XP30-TTA->XP30-TTE) or 256mode
Properties are checked( ) when setting the project, the following message will appear and if
‘Yes’ is selected, the factors(E.g. wall paper color, object’s pattern color, etc) using the project colors will be
changed to the closest ones to XP
s 256 Palette
Note
The following cautions should be made when adding images depending on device types:
(1) In case that the device is not an economic-type device(XP30-BTE, XP30-TTE), available image types
when adding pictures are BMP, JPG, GIF, TGA, PNG, TIF, WMF, ICO and PCX. But, for economic
devices, available images types are limited to BMP, GIF, JPG and WMF
(2) When the user’s images are registered, black and white images for black and white device
type(XP30-BTE, XP30-BTA) and 256-color images for 256 device type(XP30-TTE) and 256
mode( ) are registered.
(3) If 65535 color device type is changed to economic device (E.g. XP30-TTA->XP30-TTE) and
[Communication]-[Send] or [Tool]-[Check Data] is pressed when setting the project, error message
will be displayed on the output window if images other than BMP, GIF, JPG and WMF are included.

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-6

(2) Use Multi-Connection
This is the function of monitoring multiple PLC in a single XGT Panel. The XP series supports connection of up to four different
protocols (RS-232C, RS-422/485, and Ethernet). The number, between 0 to 3, is given according to the sequence of the connected
PLC. This number is referred to as the connection number. When multiple PLC is set, the PLC is allotted by the connection number.
RS232, RS422/485 has one port and so can be set only once with the connection protocol. Ethernet can be set twice or more.
[How to set multiple PLC]
Check the checkbox [Use 1:N Connection] and [Add Controller] button is activated. Click on [Add Controller]. A PLC type is added and
displayed in the window.
(a) Select ‘Use 1:N Connector’
HMI

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-7
(b) Select ‘Add Controller’
(c) New controller is added

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-8

Change the properties of the newly added XGT Panel. Numbers beginning in 0 are given in the tap header.
[Delete connection PLC]
(a) This is deleting the PLC setting which is being used. If two or more PLC is set, [Delete Controller] button is activated. Select the XGT
Panel properties tap to delete in the device properties tap. The tap is displayed at the top of the window.
(b) Click on [Delete Controller] button.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-9
(c) Press ‘Yes’ button, then theselected controller is deleted.
Note
(1) Connection numbers between 0 and 3 are given in PLC connection. If connection 1 is deleted, 2 shift to the place 1 so
that no connection is empty. Note that the numbers are allotted from 0 at all times.
(2) If you uncheck [Use 1:N connection], all settings are deleted except connection 0. Be sure to check whether the
setting is correct before or after deletion.
[RS-422/485 1:N Communication]
RS-422/485 supports 1:N communication as the protocol providing multidrop. Although the HMI device has only one communication
port, you can connect more PLC at a time by using 1:N communication.
If you set 1:N communication, each PLC is allotted an station number and each PLC can be connected by changing the station
number when you set the device.

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-10

You can set the device station number in RS-422/485 connection as follows.
If the connection device is connected to LINK as shown above, the network setting at the bottom is activated. If you connect another
station number, select [Custom Setting] and enter the station number at the bottom of the window.
If you select [Use Default] ( ), the PLC is connected by using the default connection station number set in the project
properties as in the following illustration.
HMI
Station no. 1 Station no. 12 Station no. 14 Station no. 30

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-11
(3) Detailed Setting of PLC Connection Properties
[Serial properties setting]
RS232, RS422/485 connection properties are set.
[Ethernet properties setting]
Ethernet use options are set. You can choose between use of TCP or UDP.
Note
(1) In case of connecting to LSIS FEnet module, you don’t need to set Ethernet port. But when connecting to other company’s
PLC, you should set Ethernet port.

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-12

(4) Simulator Setting
XP-Builder (Ver.1.05 or more) provides a simulator to check operation without downloading drawn program to controller
directly. If the simulator of selected controller is installed, controller’s simulator can be used. If there is no simulator, you can
perform device monitoring through virtual memory that is basically supplied.
(* XP-Builder 1.05 does not support direct connection for controller.)
(*There are some controller simulated LSIS XGT Series, LSIS XGB Series supported by XP-Builder 1.05.)
[Executing Simulate]
1) Test through virtual memory
Start a new program.
Select connection controller as LSIS:XGK(Ethernet)
Select Simulator indirect connection/ using XG5000 simulator from the mechanical setting screen of project
property screen.
After drawing, save it.
Execute XG5000. Open XGK Series project file and execute simulator.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-13
After checking if XG5000 simulator is executed, select [Tool]-[Simulation] from the menu.
When XP_Simulator is executed, it reads device value from XG5000 simulator.
2) Test through virtual memory
Start a new program.
Select LSIS:XGK(Ethernet) for connected controller.
Select using Emulator/using virtual memory from the mechanical setting of project property screen.
After drawing, save it.
Select [Tool]-[Simulation] ( ) from the menu.

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-14

The XP_Simulator of XP-Builder is executed.
In the case of simulation through virtual memory, basic virtual memory program will be executed without
specified designation.
If you select [Tool]-[Start Monitoring Device], used device list will be shown at the screen for a user to edit
the values.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-15
Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-16

13.3 Screen Change
You can set the initial screen of XGT Panel so that the screen is switched according to the device value.

Items Description
(a) Initial Screen No. Sets the initial screen number used when XGT Panel starts, or when monitoring starts after
download. The user can designate the number of the screen you have made. An error is
displayed when there is no window of the corresponding number in download.
(b) Screen Change by Device You can decide whether to use the display switch function by the device.
(c) Change to screen number Setting the device to designate basic screen No. If the device value is changed, it will move
to the related screen No. that the device value (no sign 16 bit) indicates.
(d) Current screen number Saving the current screen No.
(e) Global window 1 number Setting the device to designate Windows screen No. 1. If the device value is changed, it
will move to the related screen No. that the device value (no sign 16 bit) indicates.
(f) Global window 2 number Setting the device to designate Windows screen No. 2. If the device value is changed, it
will move to the related screen No. that the device value (no sign 16 bit) indicates.

[Select initial screen number]
Sets the initial screen number. Press (Browse) on the right. The list of the settable base screens is shown in a small
size as follows.
a
b
c
d
e
f

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-17
Select the screen you want to designate as the default screen and press OK.
[Screen change by device – base screen]
The window corresponding to the Base Window device value is displayed. If there is no window corresponding to the Base Window
device value, screen change does not occur.
If you do not use the screen change device, the device value is changed by the screen change device.
[Screen change by device – window display 1/2]
The window corresponding to the device value of Window 1 is displayed. If there is no window corresponding to the device value, the
window is not displayed in the screen.
Screen change device
Screen change device
value modification
Screen change device
Move to the applicable screen

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-18

13.4 Security Settings
XGT Panel enables PLC device control by the user through objects such as a switch or input or output devices. XGT Panel provides
security levels so that only the authorized user can control it.
XGT Panel supports 10 security levels in total.

Security level
0
The level with no access
All users can control the level.
.
.
.
Security level
9
The highest level

Level 0 has no limit to access and can be controlled by all users. All the other levels are accessible when the user is authorized in the
control object. Level 9 is the highest level.
The security level of XGT Panel operates as follows. The password of a lower level is accessible to the password of a higher level. After
the user operates XGT Panel at a particular level, the level is accessible for a certain period of time further. That is, in the control object
of the level or its lower levels is controllable without the password for a certain period of time. After the time period, the session is
terminated and the password is required again.
a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-19

Item Description
Password Mode(a) There are password mode and password device mode. Password mode is the one
in which password is directly entered. For password device mode, the number in
12 bytes from designated password devices is password
Security Level List(b) The security level list is displayed.
Password(c) Enter password. Up to 12 digits can be designated. Capital/small letters can be
distinguished.
Password Device(d) Designate password device. For password device, word device shall be entered
and the number in 12 bytes from designated password devices is password
Security Level
Retention Time (e)
Set security level retention time. If the user executes the button that is protected by
a security level, the last entered and executed password is memorized. With this
information, this password is cleared during the next operation. The entered
password will be deleted as time passes and it is necessary to enter the password
once again to execute the operation for which a certain security level is set. The
default unit is ‘minute” and up to 30 minutes can be set.

Note Safety lock interval
(1) When setting the time to keep security level as 0, you need to check the password for all operations where security is
applied.
(2) Although before duration time has passed, you need to check the password for the operations where upper level security is
applied.
(3) You are requested to establish small value of security duration time for the operations that need strict security control.
[Security level application object]
Switch, numeric input, text input

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-20

13.5 Key Window Settings
This sets the key window to be used in the input device in the screen according to the data type input.
The key window set here is applied as the default key window of all objects.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-21
13.6 Language
This is designating the language to use when the editing language and project used for building the display in XP Builder is downloaded
to XGT Panel.
(1) Editing Language
The editing language decides how many languages to use to construct the display. You can build a table of each editing language in
making the text table.
(2) Runtime Language
The runtime language is the language included in the project data during the project download and going down to the HMI device. To
download the language selected in the project, build a font file for each language font (true type font file, TTF) for the font used in the
project to be displayed in the screen. The lists selected as the editing languages are saved in the file but font files are created only when
they are selected as the runtime language. Up to 8 are supported.
a
k j
f
g
h
i
b
c
d
e

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-22

 

Items Description
Editing language list (a) This is the list of the languages to be used for editing. The language structure in the text table is
composed of the editing languages set here.
Add New… (d) This is adding an editing language. A dialog displaying all the lists provided by the system is
invoked.
Editing language settings
(c)
Changes the default editing language per language. The contents are applied after restart of
XP-Builder.
Default editing language (d) Selects one among editing language lists. Determines the default value of editing language
combo box shown at XP-Builder toolbar.
Multilingual font(e) To be displayed as Korean in Text Display, downloads the selected entire font.
It may not be downloaded according to font file size. For detail XGT Panel memory, refer to
XGT Panel user manual Ch3.2.
Default runtime language (f) This is designating the language to display when language change by the device is not used.
Language change device
(g)
Language changes according to value of device
Language change by device
(h)
XGT Panel supports language change by the device. This is setting the language change word
device to display the language number. XGT Panel reads the proper device value and displays the
windows in the language of the number displayed by the device. Numbers aregiven in 0, 1, 2 and 3
from the highest language in (b) (runtime language list).
Runtime language list (i) This is the list of the languages selected as the runtime language.
Add/Remove (j) These buttons add or delete a runtime language to or from the editing language.
Delete (k) This is deleting the language selected as the editing language. If the language to delete is included
in the runtime language, too, it is also deleted from the runtime language.

[Language change by device]
Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-23
Check of Language change by Device and Language Change Device Setting
Language change device
Language change device
Modify language conversion device value Indicates applicable language

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-24

Note
(1) The font used for the text is given according to the default value of the editing language displayed in [Project Properties] and
[Language]. Note that the text might not be displayed in XGT Panel when what is written in the string cannot be displayed in the
default font.
(2) In case of language change by using the language change device, when the language corresponding to the device value is
not designated, it is not displayed in XGT Panel.
E.g.) If the device value is 4 in the example above, the language is not displayed in XGT Panel because the set runtime language
is not registered.
[Changing edition language for text table]
You can designate the font for each language at the default font setting screen.
Note Caution for edition language
(1) Every font includes available language data. If the font data is different, proper character expression may not be
allowed in XGT Panel so pay attention to installation.
Ex.) Tahoma font can be used for English or Latin but can not express combined languages (Korean, Japanese, and
Chinese). Accordingly, Tahoma or Courier New is applied to words written Chinese characters such Korean or
Chinese, such languages registered at string may not be shown properly in XGT Panel.

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-25
Changing the default font on editing language

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-26

13.7 Storage settings
This is setting the use of the mobile storage unit connected to XGT Panel.
This is for designating the locations of the image files and font files taking up a lot of capacity when downloaded.
This is also aimed at designating the location of the mobile storage unit for backing up the logging data, recipes, screen captured
images that accumulate during program execution in XGT Panel.
a b c d e f g h

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-27

Items Description
Image Files (a) XGT Panel has a fixed size of the area for saving project files. If the user wants to download XGT
Panel data larger than the designated size, he can designate the image file which take up much of
the project file so that it is saved in the mobile storage unit instead of the basic project file storage
unit. The user designates the file location in XGT Panel with the entire path included.
Upload project file (b) In case of downloading upload project file, specifies where to save.
Alarm data (c) This is for deciding the external storage unit type in which the alarm data is going to be backed up
and the location of the saved file is displayed.
Logging Data (d) This is for deciding the external storage unit type in which the logging data is going to be backed up
and the location of the saved file is displayed.
Recipe Data (e) This is for deciding the external storage unit type in which the recipe data is going to be backed up
and the location of the saved file is displayed.
Capture Image (f) This is for deciding the external storage unit type in which the captured image is going to be backed
up and the location of the saved file is displayed.
Memo file (g) This is for deciding the external storage unit type in which the memo file is going to be backed
up and the location of the saved file is displayed.
Delete old file if disk full (h) When backup area is full, deletes old file.

Note
XGT Panel supports two types of removable storage device (USB and CF card)
However, X30-BTE (TTE) does not support CF card.

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-28

13.8 Global Script Settings
The global script is monitored throughout XGT Panel monitoring and executed if the conditions are met. Up to 8 global scripts can be
registered. If two or more conditions are simultaneously met, the execution priority is determined.

Items Description
Script name (a) Selecting the script name to be registered as the global script.
Trigger device (b) Setting the bit device meeting the requirements to execute the script and deciding the device edge as
the execution condition.
Script list (c) This is the list of the functions registered as the global script.
List Up/Down (d) If two or more conditions of the global script are simultaneously met, the execution priority is
determined.
Insert (e) This is for adding the set script function name, device and edge actions in the script list.
Delete (f) This is for deleting the script selected as the global script.
Modify (g) If you select a script in the script list, the set value is displayed in the script settings on the left. If you
modify the script settings and press Modify button, the script you selected is changed into the set
value.
Preview Script (h) The script you selected in the script list is displayed.

a b c d
e f g h

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-29
13.9 Auxiliary Settings
You can set the printing direction, locations of saved screen captured images and system alarm display properties.

Items Description
(a) Printing option This is deciding the print option
Determines direction, color, whether to use the high quality print
When using high quality print, quality of print is improved.
(b) Screen Capture This sets the action when the screen image is captured in XGT Panel. You can save them in
a file or set the captured image printing.
(c) System Alarm Window This decides whether to display a system alarm message.
(d) Communication Error Display This decides whether to display communication error window.
(e) Flow Alarm Display Mode Specifies how to change alarm message when the number of flow alarm changes
(f) E-Mail property Specifies E-Mail function.

 

a b
e c d f

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-30

[Communication Error Display]
Shows the communication error window which appears at the top of screen when error occurs and displays error
contents
[Flow Alarm Display]
Sets how to display the flow alarm message at bottom of screen
Redraw at occurred: when flow alarm occurs and is restored during being displayed, immediately deletes the
current message and displays new message.
After current display list: The message currently being displayed continues showing. And newly occurred or
restored alarm is reflected from next message.
[E-Mail function setting]
When some condition is met, XGT Panel transmits the E-Mail to the designated address. Inputs information on
mail server and recipient
a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 13 Project Properties
13-31

Item Description
From (a) Specifies the sender
To (b) Specifies the recipient. You can register many recipient by using ‘;’. Same message is
transmitted to all recipients.
CC (c) Specifies the reference recipient. You can register many recipient by using ‘;’. Same
message is transmitted to all recipients.
BCC (d) Specifies the reference recipient. But, there recipients are not shown at the recipient list.
You can register many recipient by using ‘;’. Same message is transmitted to all
recipients.
Subject (e) Specifies the subject of E-mail. You can up to 128 words (number and alphabet)

 

Item Description
IP address or SMTP
server name (a)
Input the mail server IP address or server name
SMTP server port (b) Input SMTP server port. When using “Anonymous SMTP” in the Intranet, port number is 25.
Use SSL/TLS(c) When transmitting, data is coded.
Validate server certificate
(d)
Validates server certificate.
My SMTP server requires
authentication (e)
When not using Anonymous SMTP in the Intranet, authentication on the user information is
needed.
User name (f) When you check [My SMTP server requires authentication] input the user account.
Password(g) When you check [My SMTP server requires authentication] input the password.

Note Caution for setting the E-mail server
(1) When you don’t use the user authentication (Anonymous SMTP), mail server has to exist in the same intranet as
XGT Panel. At this time, port number should be 25, basic port of Anonymous SMTP service.
(2) When using URL instead of inputting the server IP, you should set DNS server IP at the XGT Panel start menu.
(3) The transmitted mail is encoded with Unicode.
b
a
e
f
g
c d

Chapter 13 Project Properties

13-32

13.10 Extended Controller Settings
Sets the extended controller to be connected to XGT Panel

Item Description
(a) Barcode settings Connects barcode reader to XGT Panel
(b) Connection property Connects to barcode by using RS-232C protocol
(c) Detail connection option Sets detail connection option

Sets detail option of barcode. Refer to manual of barcode.

Item Description
Bytes to read (a) Specifies size of data to read from barcode. If you set the number of byte, XGT Panel
reads data as many as the specified byte number. If you don’t set the number of byte,
XGT Panel reads data until it reads ‘’
Save data in (b) Specifies where to save the data. Data is saved from the specified device continuously.
Data storage (c) Specifies the device to save the data. Data is saved from the specified device
continuously. So the user should consider the number of byte of data and check
consecutive devices from the specified device is used to save the barcode data.
Read complete device (d) Specifies the device, which notifies completion of reading the data.
RS-232C communication
parameter setting (e)
Specifies the RS-232C communication parameter.

(a) (b) (c)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-1
Chapter 14 Common Data
Common data refers to the data commonly used not only in a single window but also in the entire project. This kind of data neither builds a window
nor is displayed in the window, but is used to designate the action executed by each requirement.

Type Description Count
Tag The function of registering in advance the device address and type
frequently used and managing the device.
The number of tag is 10000 per tag group.
There is no limit on the number of tag group.
Text Table Puts together and registers commonly used texts. Can display the
texts registered through the object.
The number of text is 10000 per text table.
There is no limit on the number of text table.
Logging Set to record and save monitored data in the file. 32
Recipe Used to write or read the value set according to the conditions by the
user.
The number of device of recipe is 10000. The
number of basic/file recipe is 255.
Flow Alarm Displays the conditions of each text streaming at the bottom of the
screen when a certain condition is met.
The number of flow alarm device is 10000.
History Alarm Saves the status when a certain condition is met. No limit on the number
Scheduler Specifies operation differently according to time. 32
Script Inputs the operation to be conducted by the user in texts. No limit on the number

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-2
14.1 Tag
A tag refers to the function of registering a frequently used device address and type (Bit, Word) with the name and easily and conveniently
managing the device. The device address can be displayed in the name known by the user.
E.g.)

Name Device Type Device Address Description
Output of line 1 Word %IW0.0.0 The device value of %IW0.0.0 indicates the output of line 1.
Output of line 2 Word %IW1.0.0 The device value of %IW1.0.0 indicates the output of line 2.
Lamp failure of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.0 %QX0.0.0 device value indicates the lamp failure.
Screw shortage of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.2 In case of screw shortage in line 3, %QX0.0.0 device value is On.

Let’s assume that the device address indicating the output of line 1 has been changed. If you do not use the tag, you should
change the device values of all the objects that use IW0.0.0. However, if you use the tag as shown above, and if you change
the device address in the tag, the results are reflected in all objects.

Set the device easily using the tag to check the output of line 1.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-3
14.1.1 Use of Tag
(1) Object

Name Device Type Device Address Description
Output of line 1 Word %IW0.0.0 The device value of %IW0.0.0 indicates the output of line 1.
Output of line 2 Word %IW1.0.0 The device value of %IW1.0.0 indicates the output of line 2.
Lamp failure of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.0 %QX0.0.0 device value indicates the lamp failure.
Screw shortage of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.2 In case of screw shortage in line 3, %QX0.0.0 device value is On.

(2) Flow Alarm

Name Device Type Device Address Description
Output of line 1 Word %IW0.0.0 The device value of %IW0.0.0 indicates the output of line 1.
Output of line 2 Word %IW1.0.0 The device value of %IW1.0.0 indicates the output of line 2.
Lamp failure of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.0 %QX0.0.0 device value indicates the lamp failure.
Screw shortage of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.2 In case of screw shortage in line 3, %QX0.0.0 device value is On.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-4
(3) History Alarm

Name Device Type Device Address Description
Output of line 1 Word %IW0.0.0 The device value of %IW0.0.0 indicates the output of line 1.
Output of line 2 Word %IW1.0.0 The device value of %IW1.0.0 indicates the output of line 2.
Lamp failure of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.0 %QX0.0.0 device value indicates the lamp failure.
Screw shortage of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.2 In case of screw shortage in line 3, %QX0.0.0 device value is On.

Select Tag as the device to supervise the history alarm.
When View Device is consecutively used, it is expressed in “= tag name + number” as shown above.
(4) Recipe

Name Device Type Device Address Description
Output of line 1 Word %IW0.0.0 The device value of %IW0.0.0 indicates the output of line 1.
Output of line 2 Word %IW1.0.0 The device value of %IW1.0.0 indicates the output of line 2.
Lamp failure of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.0 %QX0.0.0 device value indicates the lamp failure.
Screw shortage of line 3 Bit %QX0.0.2 In case of screw shortage in line 3, %QX0.0.0 device value is On.

Select the word tag as the recipe object device. The recipe uses consecutive devices, so it is expressed in “= tag name +
number” as shown above.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-5
(5) Others
A tag is available everywhere a device can be input.
However, tag setting is not possible in the project properties information.
14.1.2 Tag Setting
The following is how to register the tag.
[Sequence]
(a) Select [Common]-[Tag] in the menu or press the right button of the mouse in [Tag] of the project tree item and then select [Open] in the
context menu. Tag window consists of group tree at the left and tag list registered in each tag at the right.
(b) Select ‘Default’ in the left group tree and select the cell in [Name] line and enter the name to use.
(c) Specify the device type to enter in [Device Type] line.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-6
(d) If you select a cell in [Address] line, a button is displayed. Press the button to enter the device address.
Select a device as shown above.
(e) Enter the description of each name.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-7
14.1.3 Entry of Device Address by Tag
1) Tag Selection Dialog Box
Enter a tag in the device entry window of the object item or common setting item (history alarm or flow alarm).
Press the button . If you press the button, the following device selection dialog box appears. Choose at the
top.
I

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-8
n the dialog box, the list of available tags is displayed among the tag lists set by the user.
Choose the tag to use.
Sorting by group is available and you can input name directly.
Double-click on the selected tag or choose the tag and then press .
The tag selected by the user is entered in the device entry box.
The tag name entered by the user is “output of line 1”, but the tag name displayed in the device address entry box is displayed
with ‘=’ before it. This indicates that the currently entered address is referring to the tag list. In the program, the name with ‘=’
removed among the currently entered texts is inspected in compile.
(2) Direct Entry
If you exactly know the tag name, enter the tag name in the address entry box.
When you directly enter the tag name, enter ‘=’ first, which indicates the tag entry start.
Enter the tag name to use. When you finish entry, press Enter key to report entry completed.
The image of the address entry box turns into a tag as shown above.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-9
(3) Tag Registration in Address Entry Box
If the user enters a wrong tag name or a name which is not in the tag list, the program judges that a new tag is being
registered. In such a case, a warning (buzzer) is released to the user and a dialog box where the user can enter a new tag is
invoked.
[Add New Tag] dialog box has an address entry box where you can enter the device address and a tag description entry
window.
You cannot enter a tag in the device address entry window , but only the address.
Enter the new address in the device entry box and press .
The name of the newly registered tag is displayed in the address entry box.
You can confirm and modify the newly registered tag in the tag registration display.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-10
14.1.4 Tag Name Rule
Each tag name is unique in a project and special characters cannot be used. The following is a list of tag name rules.

Number A name cannot begin with a number. (E.g. 3ABCD)
Special character Special characters cannot be used with an exception of‘_’.
Blank character A blank character placed before or after a name is not recognized as a name.
Device name A device address expression of the connection PLC cannot be used as a name(E.g.
D0012, %MW123)
Hexadecimal
number
A hexadecimal number such as H234 cannot be used as a name.

14.1.5 Tag Entry Window Device Setting
(1) Entry in Device Setting Dialog Box
If you select an entry cell in the [Address] line of the tag entry window with the mouse, the cell such as
is chosen and a button is displayed on the right. Press the button to invoke the device setting
dialog box.

Items
(a) Controller
Description
Selects the PLC to bring the data of the devices connected to XGT Panel.
(b) Device name List of devices available of PLC devices
(c) Device address Sets the Device offset
(d) Preview Preview the entered device text
(e) Input Key Address Entry button
(f) Example Description of the device selected in (b)
(g) Station number Used to set the station number when the PLC is connected to RS422/485.

a
b
c
d
e
g
f

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-11
Note
(1) Tag registration is provided in only one table. When the device is registered by using the tag in an object, if the
additional tag is modified, all the objects that used the tag are affected.
(2) If the correct device is not entered during device cell editing, the entered device text is not displayed.
(3) If you press ESC during cell editing, the value goes back to the previous value.
(4) If you specify the device address of the object with the tag, the consecutive copy operation is not applied.
(2) Direct Address Entry
Click on the entry cell in the [Address] line of the tag entry window and enter the device address. Methods of entering the
device address vary according to the connected PLC, so refer to the PLC device setting manual.
E.g. If you want to enter Glofa Series of LG Electronics, enter“%MW110”in the entry box.
If the text you entered is not a correct device address entry method, the contents of the entry cell is not changed and a blank
appears
.
14.1.6 Deletion of Tag
The tag of the area selected in the declared tag list is deleted.
[Sequence]
(a) Select the area to delete. To delete it, select all the header of the line to delete.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Delete].
Delete the tag of which the entire line is selected in the area selected with the mouse. If the tag is being referred to and used in
the object or common item, it is not deleted and a warning is released. The location of the tag you want to delete is displayed
in [Find result] window. To delete a tag which was referred to elsewhere, modify the selected tag so that it is not used.
[Select Line to Delete]
Select [Delete] in the menu.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-12
14.1.7 Changing Tag Type
When the other screen’s object or common setting items refer to a tag and its data type is BIT->WORD or WORD->BIT, it will be
shown as error device through [Data Check]. For download, move to device setting areas and revise the device.
14.1.8 Importing XG5000 Symbol
You can import the symbol declared at XG5000 that is PLC contorl program of LS Industrial Systems and the symbo can be used for XPBuilder.
[Procedures]
(a) Click the right mouse button at a tag group screen.
(b) Select the menu [Import XG50000 symbol].

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-13
(c) Select the symbol file(*.csv) exported from XG5000 and press ‘Open’ button.
(d) Select the symbol list to be imported and press ‘OK’ button to execute ‘Import’.
(e) Then, the tag will be added under the name of “NewPLC” as below.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-14
Note
(1) Symbol Export from XG5000
[Procedures]
(a) Execute XG5000 whose version is 3.0 or more.
(b) Select [Project]-[Save as Variable/Comment] from the menu.
(c) After selecting the variable to be saved, press [OK] button to save the file
.
(2) In case of applying different PLC type
If you have different PLC type when importing the file from XP-Builder, the below message will be shown.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-15
14.2 Text Table
This is the function of putting together in advance the text to be used by the user and registering them.
If the text table consists of multiple tables, the appropriate text table can be selected with a number in each table.
You can make as many text tables as you want in a project. You can register up to 10,000 text tables in each text table.
Text entry by using the text table enables language change in runtime. It is recommended that you enter a text using the text table in a project
which requires language change.
14.2.1 Text Table
(1) Bit/Word Message, Object Caption
You can set texts varying according to the status (On/Off) of the setting device (e.g. M0001) as in the bit message.
You can set texts varying according to the status (On/Off) of the connection device when you select the object caption in the text table.
You can set texts differently according to the value of the setting device (e.g. M0001) as in the word message.
M0001 = ON Message Bit ON
M0001 = OFF
Message Bit OFF

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-16
(2) Flow Alarm
Flow Alarm Message
M0001 = 1
Message Word #1
M0001 = 2 Message Word #2
Message Word #5
M0001 = 5
Flow Alarm

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-17
(3) History Alarm
(4) Alarm Navigator
(5) Language Change (Device)
M0001 = 1
Message Bit ON
Language change device:
M0001
1: English
2: Korean
M0001 = 2
Bit message on

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-18
(6) Language change (Language Change Switch)
14.2.2 Text Table Setting
[Sequence]
(a) Press the right button on the mouse on [Text Table] item in the project tree. If you press [Insert] in the context menu, the text table
display is invoked.
(b) The text table entry window is invoked.
(c) Enter the Text in the [English(United States)] row.
(d) Select the Text color of the color row.
English Message Bit ON
Korean Bit message on
Language change switch (English)
Language change switch (Korean)

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-19
(e) Set the Italic, Underline, Strikeout and Bold.
14.2.3 Text Selection Dialog Box
[Sequence]
(a) Create [Bit Message] object in the window.
(b) Shift to [Text] setting tap in the [Bit Message] object properties window.
(c) If you press at the left bottom, the following text table selection dialog box is invoked.

Item Description
Text table name (a) Text table name
Find what (b) Input text to find at the text table and press ‘Enter’
Text (c) Text to be inputted
Edit (d) You can edit the text at the text table. If you delete the text, it will be deleted.
Language (e) Current editing language
Find index (f) Input index to find at the text table and press ‘Enter’

a
b
c
d
f
e

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-20
14.2.4 Bit Message Setting
[Sequence]
(a) Add a text table.
(b) Select a newly created text table in the text table item of the project tree.
(c) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into “MessageBit”.
(d) Fill in the [English(United States)] and [Korean] rows in the “MessageBit” text table entry window.
(e) Create a bit message object in the screen
(f) Move to [Text] properties in the bit message object properties window.
(g) Check whether On button is pressed.
(h) Press on the upper right to display the text selection dialog box.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-21
(i) Select On status message in [Select from Text Table] dialog box.
(j) Check whether the contents selected by the user is displayed in the window.
(k) Press in the same way and select the Off status message.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-22
14.2.5 Word Message Setting
[Sequence]
(a) Add a text table.
(b) Select a newly created text table in the text table item of the project tree.
(c) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into “MessageBit”.
(d) Fill in the [English(United States)] in the “MessageBit” text table entry window.
(e) Create [Word Message] object in the window.
(f) Move to [Text] tap in the word message object properties window.
7) Select the text table (MessageWord) in the combo on the upper right.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-23
14.2.6 Object Caption
[Sequence]
(a) Add a text table.
(b) Select a newly created text table in the text table item of the project tree.
(c) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into ‘object caption’.
(d) Fill in the [English(United States)] in the “object caption” text table entry window.
(e) Create an object in the window and shift to [Text] properties in the properties window.
(f) Check . Check as well to activate button.
(g) Press to display [Select from Text Table] dialog box. Select a message according to the status.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-24
(h) Check whether the selected message is displayed.
14.2.7 Flow Alarm
[Sequence]
(a) Add a text table.
(b) Select a newly created text table in the text table item of the project tree.
(c) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into ‘flow alarm contents’.
(d) Fill in the [Korean] in the “flow alarm contents” text table entry window.
Set the color and properties of texts to display.
(e) Double-click on the flow alarm item of the project tree to display the entry window.
(f) Enter 3 as the number of alarm devices.
(g) Set Continuous as the device allotment method.
(h) Set the Bit Condition.
(i) Select the alarm device, click on the text table name row and select the “flow alarm contents” text table. Enter text start number 1 in the text
number row. Check whether what you entered in the text table is displayed in Preview.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-25
14.2.8 History Alarm Contents/Alarm Navigator
1) Add a text table.
2) ) Select a newly created text table in the text table item of the project tree.
3) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into “history alarm group.”
4) Fill in the [English] row in the “history alarm group” text table entry window.
5) Set the color and properties of texts to display.
6) Create another text table used in the history alarm list.
7) Select in the mouse context menu and change the text table name into “history alarm group.”
8) Fill in the [English] row in the “history alarm group” text table entry window.
9) Set the color and properties of text to display.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-26
Display the mouse context menu in the history alarm item of the project tree.
Select menu and insert the alarm group.
Select the text table and text number used as the window display name of the alarm group properties window.
The mouse context menu is displayed in the newly created alarm group of the project tree.
Select in the menu and add an alarm list.
The alarm list setting display is invoked in the screen.
Set the number of alarms and open the [Text Table] combo to select the text table to use in the alarm list.
Enter the text number to use in the [TEXT Index] in the table below.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-27
14.2.9 Multilanguage Entry Setting (Editing Language)
(1) The text table supports Multilanguage entry and display language change during operation.
(2) Change the language setting of [Project Property] to enter Multilanguage.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-28
The illustration above shows the language setting tap of the project properties setting dialog box. The list in the text table
editing language selection list on the left shows the languages that can be used in XP Builder.
If you want to add an editing language, press to add a language.
When editing language selection is finished, open the editing language list in the XP Builder toolbar and you will see the
language list that has been set.
If you change the editing language in the toolbar, you can check that the entry heading in the text table entry window is
changed into the language you selected.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-29
14.2.10 Runtime Language Setting
(1) The runtime language shows the list of languages available in XGT Panel.
(2) When the user chooses Korean, English or Chinese as the runtime language, the device can display the contents of the
text table in Korean, English or Chinese.
(3) Up to 4 runtime languages can be selected in the editing language list.
The illustration above shows the language setting properties of the project properties setting dialog box.
The list on the upper right is the runtime language list that can be displayed in the device.
[Add Runtime Language]
(a) Select the location to add the runtime language in the runtime language list.
(b) Select the language to add in the editing language list on the left.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-30
(c) Press between the two language lists.
(d) Check that the runtime language has been added as shown below.
Note
(1) The runtime language only applies to the contents entered in the text table. Language change is not provided for the contents
directly entered by the user without referring to the text table in the figure text or object caption.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-31
14.2.11 Language Change
(1) Language Change (Device)
You can change the language during the program operation of the device. Language change is possible by the device value or language
change switch between the runtime languages set in the [Language] tap in the [Project Property] dialog box.
The following is the language change setting by the device.
(a) Shift to [Language] properties in the [Project Property] dialog box.
(b) Check in [Runtime Language Settings].
(c) The [Runtime Language Change Device] entry window is activated. Set the word device to specify the language number.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-32
The following shows the language change of the device.
If the language change device %MW23 value equals the value set in the runtime language, the contents of the screen are
displayed in the language corresponding to the value.
If %MW23 is 0, 1, 2 and 3, the display is in Korean, English, Chinese and Japanese respectively.
%MW23 = 1
안녕하세요.
Language shift device:
%MW23
0: Korean
1: English (American)
2: Chinese (China)
3: Japanese
%MW23 = 3

%MW23 = 0
%MW23 = 2
Hello.
とちんらみちすち
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-33
Note
(1) Exceptions of language change by the device value are as follows.
If the language change device %MW23 value is a value which is not in the runtime language list, language change is not
possible. Even if it has a value between 0 and 3, when the runtime language is not set in the corresponding number,
language change is not supported either.
The following list displays the runtime language table.

Number Language
0
1 Korean
2 English(American)
3

If the language change device is set when the program starts in the device, the language change device value is read.
Normal Case 1) The language change device value which is first read is in the runtime language list.
%MW23 = 1: text language is set as Korean.
%MW23 = 2: The text displaying language is set as “English (American)”.
Exception 1) The language change device value is not in the runtime language list.
%MW23 = 0: For the initial text display language, the lowest value of the runtime language list is set as the basic value. In
the example, Korean, No. 1, is specified.
%MW23 = 45: For the initial text display language, the lowest value of the runtime language list is set as the basic value.
In the example, Korean, No. 1, is specified.
Normal Case 2) The %MW23 value is changed into a value which is in the runtime language list.
%MW23 = 1: The text display language is set as Korean.
%MW23 = 2: The text display language is set as English (United States).
Exception 2) The %MW23 value is changed into a value which is not in the runtime language list.
%MW23 = 3: Language change is not working. The currently displayed language is maintained.
%MW23 = 45: Language change is not working. The currently displayed language is maintained.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-34
(2) Language change (Language Change Switch (Special Switch))
Shift to [Language] tap in the [Project Property] dialog box.
If you do not use the language change device, the language to be used as the basic runtime language is selected.
Create a base screen, select [Special Switch] in [Object] tap of the [Tool Box] and create it in the window.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-35
Select [Change Runtime Language] in the combo at the top of the window.
Select the language to change when the key works in the language selection combo at the bottom of the window.
The following is the language change in XGT Panel.
English
안녕하세요.
Japanese

Korean
Chinese
Hello.

とちんらみちすち

Language
change
switch

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-36
(3) Use of Language Change Device and Switch
(a) You can change the language by setting the language change by the device and creating the language change special
switch in the window. If you use the two functions at a time, both works.
(b) However, the device value is changed by setting the language change device value at the time of the language change switch
(special switch) as the value which is displayed in the runtime language list.
14.2.12 Multi-Language Supporting Font
When other languages including Korean, Chinese are applied for string indicator except English, to display every character properly, you
need to download the whole font for each language.
(1) Adding Multi-Supporting Font
(a) Press ‘Change’ button to designate the font.

안녕하세요.

Language change device:
%MW23
0: Korean
1: English
2: Chinese
3: Japanese
%MW23 = 2

%MW23 = 0
Chinese

Language
switch selected
change

Language change device value
changed

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-37
(b) After selecting the font, press ‘OK’ button
.
(c) The selected font file will be downloaded.
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-38
(2) Applying for string indicator
Select not English but other language at ‘Multi-Language Display’ of [String Indicator]-[String] tab.
Note
(1) This version supports Korean only for Multi-Language mode.
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-39
14.2.13 Font
XP-Builder can display various fonts in the object or text table during editing. Fonts variable apply only to True Type Font installed in the
computer operating XP Builder.
The following is the description on how the font information is transferred and applied to the HMI device.
The texts used for building are collected and the text information is created. On the basis of the text information made like this, the font file for
transfer from the system font list is created. If project transfer is executed, the newly created font file is transferred.
When you have specified and used a font which is not installed in the system, a warning message is released during [Data Check]. Choose
from the font list currently installed in the system. Otherwise, texts might not be normally displayed during operation of XGT Panel.
‘SAEGULIM’ font file installed in the system
Texts made during editing
Only necessary information to
display the used characters is
extracted.
Extracted font files to download to
XGT Panel => Transferred to XPT
Panel when downloading

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-40
14.3 Flow Alarm
The flow alarm is the alarm displaying the text table alarm contents streaming at the bottom of the screen when the alarm condition is met.
14.3.1 Use of Flow Alarm
(1) When the supervisory device is ON, a flow alarm occurs.
(2) In case of an alarm, an alarm message is displayed in a text streaming from right to left at the bottom of the screen.
(3) If the supervisory device is OFF, the alarm has been restored and the alarm message is gone.
Supervision object device: %MX100
%MX100
Alarm
Restoration
Flow Alarm

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-41
14.3.2 Flow Alarm Setting
The following is the setting items of the flow alarm.
[Flow Alarm Entry Display]

Items Description
(a) No. of devices The number of alarm devices to supervise
(b) Alarm Device Decides whether to use the alarm device to supervise as the consecutive device.
(c) Device Specifies the size of the alarm message to be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
(d) Data type Specifies the data type of the flow alarm device. If read-only, only the current bit device can be
registered as the alarm device.
(e) Bit Condition Specifies condition of alarm occurrence. On/Off indicates status of bit device
(f) Name of text table Sets the message to be used for each alarm. Selects the text table number used for the alarm.
(g) text table index Displays the text number in the text table.
(h) Preview Previews the message in the text table where the number is shown.
(i) Font size Enters the device to be supervised by the user. Only the bit device can be registered as the flow
alarm.
(j) Move pixel Moving unit of flow alarm message. The bigger the number is, the faster flow speed is.
(k) Flow speed Renewal frequency of flow alarm. The less the number is, the faster flow speed is.
(l) Message position Specifies the position of follow alarm message
(m) Back Ground Color Specifies the background color of flow alarm area
(n) No. of alarm occurred Decides whether to use the device to save the number of alarms. If the word device to save the
number of alarms, the number of alarms caused by the flow alarms is saved.

(1) Alarm Device Setting
(a) To set the device to supervise as a flow alarm, (a) No. of devices is set in the flow alarm entry window.
(b) If the number of devices is set, the number of entry lines in the table list changes into the set number of devices.
(c) Registers the device to supervise in the device lines rows of each line. Address can be directly entered or otherwise the tag
can be entered.
(d) The device to supervise as the flow alarm is supervised at all times during the operation of the device and up to 10,000 can
be registered.
(e) The device to supervise as the flow alarm is the bit device. ‘On’ is alarm occurring and ‘Off’ is alarm restoration.
(2) Setting of Device to Save Number of Alarms
(a) This is the function of saving the number of alarms caused by the flow alarm in the device.
(b) Set (d) as Use in the flow alarm entry window and register the device.
a
k

e f
c d

j
m l
i
b
n

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-42
(c) The following is an example of setting the device to save the number of alarms
.
In case of a flow alarm, the current number of alarms is entered in [No. of Alarms Occurred].
<When there is no alarm>
<When 2 alarms have occurred>
<When there is one alarm with the other restored>

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-43
(3) Decision of Alarm Message and Size: Addition of Change in Case of Language Change
(a) Set (c) alarm text size in the flow alarm entry display.
(b) The alarm text size determines the size of the alarm text displayed at the bottom of the screen.
(4) Flow Alarm View Properties Setting by Window
The flow alarm is a device supervised in all windows during operation of XGT Panel. Therefore, regardless of the window, in case of an
alarm, it can be displayed anywhere. In some windows, it is necessary to have the flow alarm hidden. To this end, you should decide
whether to display the flow alarm in each window. The window where [Show Flow Alarm] has not been set, an alarm is not displayed in
the window even if it occurs.
The basic value is Display Flow Alarm.
(a) Press the right button of the mouse in the base screen. Choose [Screen Property] in the menu. If the display properties
dialog box appears, move to [Etc.].
(b) Set [Screen Property] item at the bottom of the dialog box.
14.3.3 Display of Details of Flow Alarm
(1) A flow alarm message is set in the text table and the text table set in the alarm setting window is referred to.
(2) You can specify properties such as the color and sloped type in the text table.
(3) In the device display, the appropriate alarm message is displayed in the properties specified in the text table and the text
size entered in the flow alarm setting display.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-44
The illustration above is the message displayed in case of an alarm with Flow Alarm#1(HX0000) ON.
The message is with the color ( ) and the sloped type ( ) set in the text table.
Two or more flow alarms might occur simultaneously. In such a case, the alarm message at the bottom of the window displays
two parallel messages. For distinction of alarm messages, “*” is placed before each message.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-45
The latest alarm message comes first. When a message is restored and gone, the sequence maintains.
A flow alarm message invokes the contents of the pertinent language from the text table according to the present language setting of XGT
Panel.
* Alarm Message#3
Alarm #3 occurs
* Alarm Message#1 * Alarm Message#3
Alarm #1 occurs
* Alarm Message#4 * Alarm Message#1 * Alarm Message#3
Alarm #4 occurs
* Alarm Message#4 * Alarm Message#3
Alarm #1 restored
- The sequence of messages is maintained with the exception of restored
messages.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-46
14.4 History Alarm
The contents of a history alarm are saved in a file so that the contents can be checked later. If the alarm device to supervise meets the
setting condition, the time, device and contents are saved in a non-volatile memory.
14.4.1 Alarm History Setting
(1) History alarm global setting
Double click [History Alarm] in the [Project] window

Item Description
Backup storage path (a) Change history alarm backup location.
Clear alarm area device(b) Initialize the history alarm area of NVRAM.
Clear alarm area complete
Device(c)
After initializing the history alarm of NVRAM and it shows its completion.
No. of alarms occurred (d) Device to save the number of unrecovered alarms.
Backup start device(e) Device to start backup operation. But, backup is carried out only if backup data
location (a) is specified with USB or CF card.
Backup Complete Device (f) Show the completion of backup.
Send e-mail after backup
done (g)
After backup, send e-mail to the designated address on [Project Properties]-
[Auxiliary settings]-[E-Mail Function]
Alarm Print(h) Set history alarm print properties.
Print Start Device(i) Start printing history alarm
Print Complete Device(i) Show that printing history alarm is completed
Margin(k) Set top, bottom, left and right margins
Acquisition Time table() Available to change the interval of collecting history alarm.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-47
(2) Bit Alarm Setting
Select [History Alarm] of [Project] tree.
Select [Project]-[Insert Alarm Group] from the menu. Select the group added newly.
If you activate the menu, [Insert Alarm List] will be shown. Select [Insert Alarm List].
The alarm list will be created under a new group.
Select “Bit” for data type.

Items Description
Name(a) The name of current screen (The name displayed at a project screen)
Data type(b) Fixing alarm monitoring device type
The number of Alarms(c) Selecting the number of alarms. (Max. 10000pcs)
Text table(d) Designating the text table to be used for the alarm list that is under edition now.
Sampling time (e) The cycle to check alarm occurrence conditions (Max. 10 seconds)
Backup alarm log (f) When alarm backup device of alarm property is ON, alarm device value will be saved
as CSV file.
Device (g) Setting alarm monitoring device.
Alarm Conditions(h) When the data type of alarm monitoring device is Bit, On/Off, in case of no Bit, you
can input word condition expression. It indicates alarm occurrence conditions including
device status value.
Windows Screen No. (i) When [Windows View] (n) is applied, it is activated. When you click a special switch
[Alarm History List View]-[Windows View] button, it will show you the appropriate
screen. Refer to Chap. 14.4.8.
Text Index(i) Designating text index in the text table selected from (d).
Alarm Count Device (k) Device saving the how many time alarm occurs.
Preview () Indicating the selected alarm displayed string. Edition is available only at the related
text table.
Use alarm count device (m) You can select if you will use the device to save occurrence frequency with changing
the methods to designate device.
Show detailed window (n) You can select if you will use Windows View with changing the methods to designate
device.
Text table index (o) Changing the methods to designate string table No.
Assign alarm device n(p) Changing the method to designate device
E-Mail Function(q) It judges the conditions for sending E-Mail based on alarm occurrence conditions. You
can exclude E-Mail option and establish the E-mailing conditions for both alarm
occurrence/recovery.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g h i j k l
r
q
p
o
n
m

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-48

Items Description
Show current selected alarm
(r)
You can designate the device that displays the last alarm No. selected from alarm
history view object.

(2) Word Alarm
Select [History Alarm] of [Project] tree.
Select [Project]-[Insert alarm history group] from the menu. Select the group added newly.
If you activate the menu, [Insert Alarm List] will be shown. Select [Insert Alarm List].
The alarm list will be created under a new group.
Select available data type as below.

Data type
Signed16 Bit
Unsigned 16 Bit
Signed 32 Bit
Unsigned 32 Bit
BCD 16 Bit
BCD 32 Bit

 

Items Description
Name(a) The name of current screen (The name displayed at a project screen)
Data type(b) Fixing alarm monitoring device type
The number of Alarms(c) Selecting the number of alarms. (Max. 10000pcs)
Text table(d) Designating the text table to be used for the alarm list that is under edition now.
Sampling time (e) The cycle to check alarm occurrence conditions (Max. 10 seconds)
Backup alarm log (f) When alarm backup device of alarm property is ON, alarm device value will be saved
as CSV file.
Device (g) Setting alarm monitoring device.
Alarm Conditions(h) When the data type of alarm monitoring device is Bit, On/Off, in case of no Bit, you
can input word condition expression. It indicates alarm occurrence conditions including
device status value.
Windows Screen No. (i) When [Windows View] (n) is applied, it is activated. When you click a special switch
[Alarm History List View]-[Windows View] button, it will show you the appropriate
screen. Refer to Chap. 14.4.8.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g h i j k l
r
q
p
o
n
m

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-49

Items Description
Text Index(i) Designating text index in the text table selected from (d).
Alarm Count Device (k) Device saving the how many time alarm occurs.
Preview () Indicating the selected alarm displayed string. Edition is available only at the related
text table.
Use alarm count device (m) You can select if you will use the device to save occurrence frequency with changing
the methods to designate device.
Show detailed window (n) You can select if you will use Windows View with changing the methods to designate
device.
Text table index (o) Changing the methods to designate string table No.
Assign alarm device n(p) Changing the method to designate device
E-Mail Function(q) It judges the conditions for sending E-Mail based on alarm occurrence conditions. You
can exclude E-Mail option and establish the E-mailing conditions for both alarm
occurrence/recovery.
Show current selected alarm
(r)
You can designate the device that displays the last alarm No. selected from alarm
history view object.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-50
14.4.2 Use of History Alarm
(1) Bit Alarm
With the device to supervise ON, a history alarm occurs. If the alarm occurs, the time and contents are displayed in the history
alarm view object in the screen. With the device to supervise OFF, the alarm is deemed to have been restored and the
restoration time is displayed with that it has been restored displayed in the history alarm view object. Now the time, message
and group are displayed in the history alarm view object. If the device to supervise turns OFF, the alarm is deemed to have
been restored and the restoration time is displayed and that it has been restored is displayed in the history alarm view object.
If the supervision object device is set as the bit device, with the device ON, an alarm has occurred. Now the time, message
and group are displayed in the alarm view object. If the device to supervise turns OFF, the alarm is deemed to have been
restored.
Supervision object device: %IX0.0.12
%IX0.0.12
Alarm occurs
Alarm restored

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-51
(2) Word Alarm
If the device to supervise is set as the word device and if the device meets the entered condition, an alarm has occurred. Now
the time, message and group are displayed in the alarm view object. The alarm that has occurred due to a word device is
deemed to have been restored unless it meets the alarm condition.
(3) History Alarm Viewer/ Alarm Navigator Object
The history alarm viewer object displays the list of history alarms that have occurred. It provides the functions of storing the list
of alarms that have occurred during operation of the program and enabling the user to check and manage the list of alarms
that have occurred.
The history alarm list provides the list of all the alarms that have occurred. When you want to refer to only the alarm list of a
certain group because there are too many alarms, you can have only desired group alarms arranged through the alarm
navigator object.
Supervision object device: %IW0.1.0
Alarm occurs
Alarm restored
Alarm Condition:
%IW0.1.0 < 0 or 100 < %IW0.1.0
%IW0.1.0

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-52
If you choose “Motor” in the alarm navigator at the bottom of the screen, it displays the alarm in the Motor group.
(4) Detailed Display
This is registering a detailed display to check the details of the alarms that have occurred. Select the alarm of which details you
want to check in the alarm view object. Click on Go to History Alarm Viewer Detail among the special switches in the window.
A window is invoked to display details of it. You can use this function to display details of an alarm.
(5) Use of Text Table
Alarm messages of a history alarm are used by referring to the settings of the text table. So are the color and font properties of
the text set in the text table. Multiple languages can be used and language change is possible during the runtime by referring
to the contents of the text table.
[Display in Korean] [Display in English]
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-53
(6) History Alarm Printing
You can print out the list of history alarms by using the special switches. If a USB wide-use printer is plugged into the device,
the list of the group specified in the special switch among the history alarms that have occurred after the present program
started is printed.
(7) History Alarm Backup
If an alarm occurs, the alarm is saved in a non-volatile memory of the device. The list of alarms is not deleted even the device
is severed from the power supply. The list of alarms saved in a non-volatile memory can be uploaded to the computer through
XP Builder. The uploaded data can be easily edited by the user in the form of CSV file.
Supervision object device: %IX0.0.12
%IX0.0.12
Alarm occurs
Uploaded
Stored in Memory

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-54
14.4.3 Setting of No. of Alarms Occurred
The number of alarms occurred is checked and the value is entered in the device specified by the user.
The history alarm properties setting window is displayed in the history alarm item of the project tree.
Check ‘Use’ of No. of Alarms Occurred on the upper left.
Set the word device to store the no. of alarms occurred.
Supervision object
device: %IX0.0.12
%IX0.0.12
Alarm occurs
Alarm restored
Number of alarms occurred
Device: HW0010

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-55
14.4.4 Setting of History Alarm Sampling Time
All the devices registered as a history alarm are always monitored during operation of the program.
The change of some device values should be frequently checked while others have only to be checked every come minutes
or hours, which depends on the purpose of the device. The monitoring cycle of a device, which are different from each other, is
called Sampling Time and XP Builder provides the function of setting the Sampling Time of each alarm list differently.
XP Builder can set the different Sampling Time of 10.
There is a table for setting the Sampling Time at the left bottom of the history alarm common setting window.
The Sampling Time setting unit is second(s) and you can set it to the first decimal place, so the minimum unit scale of setting is
100ms.
In the table above, the Sampling Time is registered by being divided into 1 sec, 2 sec and 3sec….
In each alarm list, the user can choose one of the Sampling Times registered by the user and set the device data monitoring
cycle.
At the top of the alarm list setting window is a combo box for setting the Sampling Time.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-56
The example above shows an alarm list of which the Sampling Time is set at 3 seconds.
The following shows the sequence of invoking device data according to the Sampling Time.
Note
(1) How to apply the acquisition cycle related to alarm history performance
XGT Panel outs together the alarm list with the same acquisition cycle and inspects them at once. For example, the acquisition
cycle of 10 alarm history lists with 100 alarm devises are set as 1.0 second, total 1000 alarms will be treated as one task unit.
However, among the alarm list, if 5pcs have 1.0 second of acquisition cycle and another 5pcs have 2.0 of second acquisition cycle,
500pcs will be respectively inspected at the same time.
Therefore, one acquisition cycle has 1000 alarms or more, monitoring performance will fall off. To apply XGT Panel’s alarm history
monitoring function effectively, please make sure that the number of alarm history belongs to one acquisition cycle does not exceed
500pcs.
Alarm List 0: sampling time 1 second
Alarm List 1: sampling time 3 seconds
Alarm List 0
Alarm List 1
Time(sec)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

The device value registered in the alarm list is read by the device from the connected control.
Device Data Transfer
between PLC <-> HMI

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-57
14.4.5 History Alarm Occurrence and Restoration
(1) Alarm Message Storage
The history alarm that occurred first is stored first.
If identical alarms occur more than twice, they are saved many times according to the time they occurred.
(2) Bit Alarm
If a bit device is set as the alarm device and the pertinent bit device is ON, an alarm is deemed to have occurred and if OFF,
restored. The Sampling Time of each history alarm list and the number of registered devices are different, so the timing of
alarms might be different.
The following table shows the times when an alarm occurs.
Communication error
occurs
Checks communication
error
Communication error
occurs again

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-58
(3) Word Alarm
If a word device is set as the alarm device, when the word device meets the condition specified by the user, the alarm is
deemed to have occurred and when the word device fails to meet the condition, the alarm is deemed to have been restored.
The Sampling Time of each history alarm list and the number of registered devices are different, so the timing of alarms might
be different. The following table shows the times when an alarm occurs.
Device to be monitored: %IX0.0.12, sampling time 3 seconds
%IX0.0.12

Alarm occ urs Alarm rest
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Alarm List 1
Time(sec) Alarm Display
Display

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-59
(4) Word Alarm Condition Setting
If a word device is set as the alarm monitoring device, the condition to be recognized as an alarm should be entered.
The alarm condition is a single conditional expression consisting of two or three terms (And, Or conditions).
[Word condition entry rule]
With respect to entry of word conditions, if only two or three term (And/Or) conditions can be entered, it is a single term
condition.
Each term should be separated by ‘ ‘ (blank).
The standard device is expressed by ‘$V’. If ‘$V’ is entered, it is automatically recognized as the standard device during
download.
Each conditional expression should have at least one device variable.
The standard device must be included at least once in the expression.
[Word condition operator]
The following operators are available.

< <= > >= = !=

[Direct entry of word condition]
Fill in the alarm range entry box of the word alarm list according to the rule.
Device to be monitored: %IW0.1.0 sampling time 3 seconds

Alarm occ urs Alarm rest Con
afte
dition j
r data tran
udged
sfer
1
W0.1.0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Alarm List 1
Time(sec) Alarm Display
Display
Alarm condition: when %IW0.1.0 < 0 or 100 < %IW0.1.0

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-60
[Alarm range entry dialog box]

Items Description
conditional expression form (a) Choose from 2 or 3 term condition expressions.
Preview Conditional Sentence (b) Combines the items selected by the user and displays the contents of the conditional
expression in a text that can be easily recognized.
Conditional expression editing item (c) Choose the item you want to modify.
Operand constant value setting (d) Set the operand type at a fixed value.
Use the operand standard device (e) Uses the device set in the alarm in the operand type. Displayed as $V in b(Preview).
Use other operand device. (f) Sets the operand as the device. Reads and judges the value from the device set when
the operating expression was identified. The data type is the device type in the alarm list
setting window.

a
b
c
d
e
f

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-61
14.4.6 History Alarm Structure
(1) A history alarm is displayed in a tree structure for the sake of convenience of editing. It is divided into the alarm group and
alarm list. The former has an alarm group or alarm list as a child. The latter, a terminal node which cannot have a child,
registers a device to supervise.
(2) An alarm group is a unit to manage the alarms in a logical structure. You can retrieve and check the alarms that have
occurred by group unit in the alarm search panel. An alarm group is the unit of alarm printing.
(3) An alarm list is a set of alarms sharing the same characteristics. An alarm list has the same data type and Sampling Time.
In addition, a text table is specified and used as the alarm contents.
If you choose [Alarm Group 2] in the alarm search panel, only the alarms that occurred in [Alarm List 1], which is a sub-item of [Alarm
Group 2], are displayed.
If you choose [Alarm Group 1], only the alarms that occurred in [Alarm List 1] and [Alarm Group 2], which are a sub-item of [Alarm
Group 1].
History Alarm
Alarm Group 1
Alarm Group 2
Alarm List 0
Alarm Group 2
Alarm List 2
Alarm List 1
An alarm group might include another alarm group or alarm list.
An alarm list cannot be created at the highest level node.
Alarm List 3
X
X Alarm List 4
An alarm list cannot have a sub-list.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-62
14.4.7 History Alarm Group Setting
The history alarm group can specify the text to display the group.

Items Description
Group name(a) The name of alarm history displayed at a project screen.
From Text Table(b) The alarm group name to be displayed at alarm history view object can be referred
from text table.
Preview(c) Previewing the string input at sting table
Direct input (d) You can edit and input the name of alarm history group.
No.(e) String No. of string table

14.4.8 Setting of Detailed Display of History Alarm
(1) The detailed history alarm display is the function of specifying the page where details of an alarm, which the user wants to
know, are displayed.
(2) The detailed alarm display can be set in the window and displayed in the screen in the form of a pop-up.
Display in Window
To use the detailed display, check Use of the detailed display in each alarm list.
b
a
c
d

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-63
If you check [Goto Detail Window], a row appears where you can set the detailed screen numbers in the alarm list setting table.
Enter the window screen number to display in the screen when the alarm occurs.
Edit the window in detail in the project tree.
Create a special switch in the editing window where the alarm list is and set the function of the properties window as ‘Go to
History Alarm Viewer Detail’.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-64
If you want to view the detailed display of an alarm that has occurred, choose the alarm in [History Alarm Viewer] object and
press the special switch [Go to History Alarm Viewer Detail].

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-65
14.4.9 Saving History Alarm Data
A history alarm is first saved in the memory when an alarm occurs. When the program monitor ends, the data saved in the
memory disappear
. Save the history alarm in NVRam to keep it safe in case of an interruption of power supply or sudden end
of the program.
[Set NVRam Saving]
(a) Set [Backup] on the supper right in the alarm list setting window
.
When use of the alarm backup is set, the alarm data that occurred in the volatile and non-volatile memories are saved in case
of an alarm.
The alarm data of the non-volatile memory (NVRam) executes deletion in two circumstances, which are alarm data upload
and download by “previous monitoring data deletion” option in project download.
If the alarm data is uploaded through XP Builder, all the saved alarm data are deleted.
%IX0.0.12
Alarm occurs
NVRAM
RAM
Alarm List Backup Not Used Alarm List Backup Used
%IX0.0.12
Alarm occurs
RAM

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-66
If you check when downloading the project, all the memory area is deleted before a new
program is executed. The alarm history saved executes deletion, too.
[NVRAM Area Data Management]
The size of the NVRAM area for alarm recording is 64 KB.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-67
14.4.10 Device displaying selected alarm
It indicates the device to save alarm No. selected alarm history object. If you designate the alarm occurred at alarm history object,
the appropriate alarm will be selected and the No. will be input to the selected alarm display device.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-68
14.4.11 Function to send alarm data via E-Mail
It can send the data to the user’s address via E-Mail during Alarm history occurrence/recovery/backup.
For setting mail server and address, you can refer to [Project Property]-[Other setting]-[E-Mail functions setting].
[Mailing function during alarm occurrence /recovery]
When alarm history occurs or recovers, a mail will be sent.
When alarm occurs or recovers, the transmitted mail format is as below.
* History alarm Information
[ Device Alias ]
...
[ Alarm group name ]
...
[ Alarm message ]
...
[ Alarm State ]
Occurred
[ Time ]
----/--/-- --/--/--
Equipment name
Cause for alarm

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-69
[Mailing during alarm backup]
When alarm history is back-upped, a mail will be sent.
You can establish mailing option for alarm backup at [Alarm History Property] page.
The sent mail format is as below during alarm backup.
* Alarm data has saved as CSV.
[ Device alias ]
.....
[ File Path ]
.....

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-70
14.5 Logging
Logging is the function of recording the desired device value in a file when the condition specified by the user is met.
Logging is used to trace the trend of the device.
14.5.1 Use of Logging
(1) Periodical Logging (Time)
Logging gets started at a specific time and executed periodically as many times as specified.
The following example shows start of logging at 9:00 and execution three times every 10 minutes.

%MW102 123
%MW101 145
%MW100 130

 

1

Read

%MW102 133
%MW101 152
%MW100 135

Read

%MW102 142
%MW101 143
%MW100 126

Read
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-71
(2) Periodical Logging (Bit Device)
With the logging start device ON, logging gets started and executed periodically as many times as specified.
The following example shows start and execution of logging three times every 10 minutes when %MX01 is ON.
(3) Conditional Logging (Bit Device)
Logging starts when the logging start device is ON. It does not repeat, so it operates the same as the logging of which the
periodical logging (bit device) repetition is set at 1.

%MW102 123
%MW101 145
%MW100 130

 

1

Read

%MW102 133
%MW101 152
%MW100 135

Read

%MW102 142
%MW101 143
%MW100 126

Read
%MX01

%MW102 123
%MW101 145
%MW100 130

 

1

Read
%MX01

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-72
(4) Logging Viewer Object
The device value read by logging is displayed in the screen. Specify the logging number and arrange the information on the
logging.
14.5.2 Logging Setting Display
Select [Open] in the menu that is invoked when you press the right button on the mouse in the logging item or when you
double-click on the logging item in the project tree.
[Logging Editing Display]

Item Description
(a) Condition Displays the logging start condition. Summarizes and displays the values displayed in the logging setting
dialog box.
(b) Repetition Count In case of periodical logging, sets the repetition of logging and logging start condition.
(c) Repetition Period Displays the logging repetition cycle of periodical logging.
(d) Device Device to log
(e) Device Count Number of devices to log
(f) Description Brief description of the logging

 

%MW102 123
%MW101 145
%MW100 130

 

1

Read
%MX01
a b c d e f

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-73
The logging editing display shows summarized loggings. Loggings can be edited in the properties windows of each logging.
To add a logging, double-click in an empty row in the list or press the right button on the mouse in the row where you want to
enter the logging to select [Insert New] in the menus that are invoked.
[Logging Property Dialog Box-Basic Logging setting]
You can establish the basic property of logging.

Items Description
Logging No.(a) Logging identification No. that is referred at logging view object.
Target Device (b) Displaying logging device to be read.
The number of Logging Device
(c)
Indicating the number of devices to be read from logging device starting
address.(Max. 32)
Description(d) Inputting the explanation on logging.

b
a
c
d

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-74
[Logging Property Dialog Box-Logging Conditions Setting]
You can establish logging conditions.

Items Description
Periodic Logging Time(a) You can start and operating logging based on fixed time setting.
Starting type: Time setting based on each conditions ; every time, every day, every
week, every month, once.
Periodic Logging device(b) Logging conditions Bit device. If the device meets the set operations(raising·falling
edge), it records the device value to be logged to the file.
Repeat by (c) Indicating record frequency after logging time and reading the device value every time
it records. (Max. 100times)
Conditional Logging Device(d) If the device meets the set operations(raising·falling edge or change), it records the
device value to be logged to the file.
Repeat period (e) If logging conditions are fulfilled under periodic logging, it designates the file recording
cycle.
Device displaying Logging
progress(f)
Selecting the device that will display logging progress.
Device stopping logging (g) Designating the device to suspend ongoing logging forcefully. Logging will stop as
soon as input device value is ON.
Logging area full device (h) The area allocated for logging is totally occupied, the set device will be ‘ON’
Device deleting logging area (i) If the set device is ‘ON’, the allocated area will be deleted.
Finish deleting area (j) If logging are deletion process is finished, the related Bit will be‘On’

a
b
c
d
f
g
h
e i j

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-75
[Logging Property Dialog Box-Saving are/Logging backup/CSV Format]
It designates the methods to use logging saving area, backup with backup data display mode.

Items Description
Storage for backup data (a) In case logging backup is activated, logging data will move to the set position. You can
see it from the tab [Project Property]-[Storage setting].
Use ring buffer (b) If logging area is totally occupied, it records new data with deleting the existing data
from the oldest one. It can not be used together with [Auto backup if area full] (b)
Auto backup if area full (c) When logging area is totally occupied, you can judge whether saved data will move
to the designated storage devices. It can not be used together with [Use ring buffer]
(a)
Backup device (d) You can select control device to move the logging data saved internal memory to
portable saving equipment. If input device is ‘On’, logging data will move to the storage
device.
Backup complete device (e) If data backup is completed, the input device will be ‘On’.
Append data to CSV file (f) When CSV file is back-upped, it is added to the end of previous backup file. .
Setting CSV file format (g) When logging data is back-upped, it is saved as CSV format and you can designate
data display format.
Number of backup data in CSV
file (h)
Sets the number of logging to be saved in a CSV file. Up to 65000 is available.
Send E-Mail after backup
done(i)
If logging backup is completed, the backup information will be sent to user’s E-Mail
address. For setting the address, refer to ‘E-Mail Setting’ of [Project Property]-[Auxiliary
Settings].
Do not clear log area at backup
(i)
When logging data moves to backup saving equipment, it will be deleted by logging
backup device. However, if you set this option, logging data will not be deleted even
after backup. When applying the option for logging trend graph, you can see logging
history.

b
a
c
d
e
f
g
i
h
j

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-76
[Logging Property Dialog Box-Logging Common Property]
You can designate common property applied to all loggings.

Items Description
Logging area setting (a) Setting the size of data saving area for each logging.
Calculating logging size (b) Calculating the size of area required to save logging data.

a
b

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-77
14.5.3 Setting of Device to Log
(1) Specify the device to log. The device to log can be in the bit or word unit.
(2) Up to 32 devices can be specified for a logging.
(3) As many as consecutive devices to log as the number of logging devices are specified from the start device.

1

Logging started: read/record
%MX10

%MW105 123
%MW101 145
%MW100 130
%MW102 132
%MW103 155
%MW104 117

- Word logging -
Logging Device: %MW100
Number of devices: 6
Start condition:
Conditional logging
Device: %MX10 On
- Bit logging -
Logging Device: %MX200
Number of devices: 8
Start condition:
Conditional logging
Device: %MX11 On

%MX207 1
%MX201 0
%MX200 1
%MX202 0
%MX203 1
%MX206 0
%MX204 1
%MX205 1

Logging started: read/record
%MX11

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-78
14.5.4 Periodical Logging (Time) Setting
The device value is read and saved at the time specified by the user.
The times available are as follows.
Hourly: the minute when the logging starts
Daily: the hour and minute when the logging starts
Weekly: the date, hour and minute when the logging starts
Monthly: the day, hour and minute when the logging starts
Yearly: the month, day, hour and minute when the logging starts
Once: the year, month, day, hour and minute when the logging starts
For periodical logging (time), the number of repetitions can be specified. At the specified time, the logging starts and repeats
itself as many times as specified.
The repetition timer starts when the operation start timer turns ON.
When the repetition timer turns ON as many times as the specified number of repetitions, the device reads the device value
and saves it in the file.
Logging start
timer ON

R e
epetition cycl
Logging

[Example of Cyclical Conditional Operation]
Setting: repeated 4 times
Repetition
timer ON
Logging progress

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-79
14.5.5 Periodical Logging (Bit Device) Setting
Logging gets started when the condition bit value is on or off.
Logging occurs according to the repetition cycle as many times as the number of repetitions after the device is on or off.
14.5.6 Conditional Logging Setting
Conditional logging starts when the conditional device is on or off. There is no repetition in conditional logging.

Conditional device On(rising edge set)

 

R e
epetition cycl
Logging

[Example of Cyclical Conditional Operation]
Setting: repeated 4 times
Repetition
timer ON
Logging progress
Logging start
Device
Conditional device On

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-80
14.5.7 Logging Control Device Setting
The control device, which is selective, can be used on demand of the user.

Items Description
Progress Displays the logging progress. The progress displaying device displays the status from when the logging
condition is met to when the entire logging(repetition) is completed. It turns OFF when the whole logging
is completed or is turned OFF by the logging stop device.
Stop Stops the logging in progress. The stopped logging is activated by the next logging start condition. A
stopped logging does not operate in the repetition cycle/condition. The logging stop device operates in
the rising edge.
Storage Full Shows that the entire memory area allotted to the logging has been used. It turns OFF when the logging
area is backed up or deleted.
Storage Clear Deletes the contents of the area. Starts storage at the initial place of the memory area when the next
logging occurs.
Storage Clear complete Indicates completion of clearing storage.

(1) Progress displaying device

Conditional device On (rising edge set)
Setting: repeated 4 times

 

Repetition cycle
Logging

[Cyclical Conditional Operation]
Progress displaying device

Progress
device
displaying

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-81
(2) Stop device
(3) Storage Full
The area pool device turns ON when the entire area allotted to the logging has been used. In such a case, enough space
should be made by deleting the logging area or executing backup. Otherwise the logging data might be lost.
(4) Storage Clear
Allots the memory to store data to each logging. When the area deletion device turns ON, the area allotted to the relevant
logging is deleted. If the logging is in progress, the part which has been completed is deleted and the remaining of the
progress is newly recorded in the deleted area. Explicit deletion of the logging area might cause loss of it, so be sure to do
backup before deleting it.
(5) Storage Clear complete device
It becomes on when clearing logging is complete
Note
(1) Note the following about logging area deletion.
(a) When you execute project download of the logging area in XP Builder, you can delete it by setting the “Delete All Previous
Monitor Data” option. In such a case, the logging area is also deleted because all the previous memory area is deleted before a
project is carried out.
(b) You can delete the logging area by changing the logging area size properties. Up to 32 loggings can be registered and an
area is allotted to each logging. If there is a change in the area, the previous monitor data is lost. When the logging area is
changed, download the backup data through [Communication]-[Upload] menu before execution.
Conditional device On(rising edge set)
Stop device
Stop device
Progress displaying
device
Logging stops when the stop device turns On. Logging turns Off into the progress indicating device. Logging resumes when
the next logging condition is met.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-82
14.5.8 Logging Area Setting
Each logging is allotted an area to save data.
Max logging area is 256Kbyte.
Each logging can be allotted an individual logging area. The minimum size of the area allotted to each logging is 1 KB and the
total of all the logging areas should not be bigger than the logging area by type.
Logging area can be calculated by the number and size, frequency of devices.
The minimum header information for one logging is 16Bytes and each logging data will be saved after header information.
Therefore, the calculation for required area is as below.
Bit: (16(Header Information) + 8(Fixed size for saving bit)) * (Frequency+ 1).
Word: (16 + 2 * Device size ) * ( Frequency + 1 ).
Double word: (16 + 4 * Device size) * (Frequency + 1 ).

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-83
14.5.9 Logging Data Saving
Decides how to use the storage memory.
(1) Use of storage area circulating buffer
The previous data is overwritten and saved from the first place when all the allotted storage area has been used.
[Use of storage area circulating buffer]

Logging Data n
Logging Data 5
Logging Data 4
Logging Data 3
Logging Data 2
Logging Data 1

Storage location shifts
Recorded from the first spot

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-84
(2) Automatic backup when all the storage area has been used
The data is backed up in the backup area specified in the project properties when all the storage area has been used.
[Automatic backup when all the storage area has been used]

Logging Data n
Logging Data 5
Logging Data 4
Logging Data 3
Logging Data 2
Logging Data 1

Area Full Bit On Deleted after Backup

Logging Data 1

Recorded from the First
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-85
14.5.10 Logging Data Backup
The backup function can be used when there is an external storage unit such as a USB or CF card.
(1) Backup device
With the backup device ON, the HMI device shifts the data in the logging area to the external storage media. When backup
is completed, the logging area is automatically deleted and recorded from the first place when the next logging is launched.
(2) Backup completion device:
turns ON when logging backup is completed.
[Backup Path Setting]
The logging backup path is set in [Project Properties].
Select [Common]-[Project Properties] in the menu.
Move to [Storage Settings] in the project property dialog box.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-86
(3) Designating backup data display format
When logging data is back-upped, it is saved as CSV format and you can designate data display format to be shown for CSV file.

Items Description
From text table (a) Refers to text table for header text of backup CSV file
Header (b) Inputs a header text of backup CSV file. If you select “From text table”, push the button and find from the text
table.
Data format (c) You can change the display format of time and data
Digits(d) Decides how many digits are used for data
Decimal digits (e) Decides how many decimal digits are used for data
Zero fill (f) Fill the data with the zero according to digit count
Apply all the logging (g) Change the backup type of all loggings according to current dialog box.
Close (h) Saves and closes the dialog box
Data1 ~ Data100 The number of data column varies according to the number of logging device

(4) Do not delete saving area during logging backup
During Logging backup, logging data saved is automatically deleted. However, for the object with a special function such as logging
trend, backed up logging data should be preserved. In this case, select [Do not delete saving area during logging backup]. If the
function is established, logging area will be automatically changed into [Using circular buffer for saving area].
a
b
c
d
e
f
g h

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-87
(5) Sending E-Mail during logging backup
If logging backup is completed, the backup information will be sent to a user’s E-Mail address. For setting the address, refer to ‘EMail Setting’of [Project Property]-[Other Setting].
The sent mail is encoded as equipment name and Unicode. The format of E-Mail is as below and backup information includes
equipment name and backup file’s route.
* Logging data has saved as CSV.
[Device alias]
.....
[File Path]
.....

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-88
14.6 Recipe
This is the function of creating data to write in the PLC and using the data value created in the PLC device consecutively
connected to a certain device. In addition, it invokes a massive quantity of device values from the PLC consecutively
connected to a certain device.
14.6.1 Use of Recipe
(1) Block Data Reading
If the recipe reading operation device is a rising or falling edge, as many devices as specified begin to be read from the
specified device address of the PLC.
1번 블록 데이터
D100
30
D101 38
D102 49
2번 블록 데이터
D100 520
D101 530
D102 540
레서피 읽기

블록 번호 : 1
Block no.
R

 

49 D102
38 D101
30 D100

(2) Block Data Writing
If the recipe writing starting device is a rising or falling edge, as many devices as specified begin to write in the device
consecutively from the specified device address of the PLC.
1번 블록 데이터
D100 234
D101 345
D102 456
2번 블록 데이터
D100 520
D101 530
D102 540

레서피 쓰기
블록 번호 : 1
Block no.
Writing recipe

 

49 D102
38 D101
30 D100

234
345
456
1 block data
2 block data
1 block data
2 block data
eading recipe

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-89
14.6.2 Recipe Setting
This is the function of writing and reading the data stored the internal memory of the HMI device and other storage units in a
specified device with the control device On/Off.
(1) Up to 10,000 recipes can be registered in XP Builder.
(2) Up to 255 data blocks can be registered in each recipe.
(3) The object device used for recipe data transfer uses signed/unsigned 16/32 bit devices.
(4) A continuous device is used as the device.
[Total Properties Setting]

Items Description
Trigger Device to Write (a) Sets the device address to control writing and the condition of starting the action (rising edge,
falling edge).
For example, in the case above, recipe data is used when the HX0008 device value of the bit
device is ON.
Trigger Device to Read (b) Decides whether to have reading controlled by the device. The recipe does not operate
unless both reading/writing devices are set.
To operate the recipe, you should set at least one of the two devices.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-90

Items Description
Recipe No. (c) Sets the device to specify the recipe to operate when the reading or writing start device meets
the condition. This is a word device and operates a recipe by reading the word value
(unsigned 16) from the device.
Block N0. (d) This specifies the data block to transfer data in the recipe to operate when the reading or
writing start device meets the condition. This is a word device and transfers data of the
corresponding block number by reading the word value (unsigned 16) from the device.
Complete Device (e) This turns the corresponding bit to ON when data transfer is completed by the recipe.
Error Device (f) This turns the bit ON when there is a problem with data transfer by the recipe.
Backup Trigger Device(g) This is a device to set the start of backup of recipe data in a mobile storage unit such as USB
or CF card.
Backup Complete Device(h) Turns the set bit to ON when backup is completed.
Backup Data Storage (i) Specifies the location of backup when the recipe data is backed up. The location is the same
as the recipe data backup location in [Set Storage Unit Use] of project properties.
Recipe type (j) When Write or Read condition is met, specifies recipe type to be executed. In case the lowest
bit of this device is 0, basic recipe is executed. And in case the highest bit of this device is 1,
file recipe is executed.
File recipe storage (k) Specifies storage path where data file of file recipe will be saved. You can designate CF Card
or USB storage.

Select [Add] in the menu invoked by pressing the right button on the mouse in the [Recipe] item of the project tree.
[Recipe Display
]

Items Description
Name (a) Displays the recipe name. The names can be changed in the [Change Name] menu invoked by
pressing the right button on the mouse in the recipe number in the project tree. There can be up to
32 recipes and the possible range of numbers is 1~255.
Description (b) Shows brief description of the recipe.
Device (c) Sets the object device to transfer the recipe data. Executes reading and writing operation of device
QW0.3.0 with the object device.
No. of
Devices (d)
Transfers as many data as the consecutive devices from the device set in (c). In the case above,
with the number of devices set at 8, the reading and writing operation is carried out for the 8
consecutive devices from QW0.3.0.
Data type (e) Indicates the data type of the object device. The value input from the data block is adjusted to this
value.
Data Block (f) Specifies the number of data blocks.
Device (g) Displays the object device to input data. A recipe, which uses consecutive data, cannot set the
device and determines the device by changing the object device start address set in (d).
Data Block Name (h) Data blocks are given from 0 and the block numbers cannot be changed. When the number of
blocks is reduced, the data input later is deleted first.

a
b
c
d
g
f
e
h

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-91
Note
(1) Recipe device setting is as follows.
The start address of the recipe device can be selected in the tag. However, using consecutive devices, the recipe device is not referred to
as a tag but the address specified by the tag is directly input. Note, after that, the tag being changed, the start address of the recipe does not
change.
14.6.3 Recipe Action Trigger
(1) Block Data Writing
Recipe writing action starts when the recipe writing device is on(rising edge) or off(falling edge). The following shows the flow
of writing by the recipe.
Writing device On/Off
Recipe number read from the recipe
numbering device
Recipe block number read from the
recipe block specifying device
Recipe data transferred
Error indicating device On
Error occurs
Transfer completion device On

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-92
(2) Block Data reading
Recipe writing action starts when the recipe writing device is on. The following shows the flow of writing by the recipe. Writing
and reading cannot be executed at a time. When the two devices meet the same time and condition, writing is first executed.
Reading device On/Off
Recipe number read from the recipe
numbering device
Recipe block number read from the
recipe block specifying device
Recipe data transferred
Error indicating device On
Error
occurs
Transfer completion device On

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-93
14.6.4 Recipe Control Device

Items Description
Transfer completion indicating
device
Turns ON when the writing or reading device meets the condition and data transfer is completed.
Turn ON if an error occurs during data transfer.
Backup start device The recipe data buffer value inside XGT Panel is backed up at the specified location. The backup is
conducted where the recipe backup location in the [Storage Use Information] properties of the project
properties information.

Transfer error indicating
device
14.6.5 Basic Storage of Recipe Data
Recipe data is stored in a non-volatile memory of XGT Panel. Therefore, in case of a power interruption, the last saved data is
kept. When power supply resumes, device monitoring restarts and writing/reading is executed again, the last saved data is
used.
When you download the entire project, the previous recipe data is deleted and it is initialized to the newly downloaded recipe
data.
In case of partial or modified download, the recipe data is not deleted. However, in case of download with the [Delete All the
Monitoring Data] option in the download options selected, the saved recipe data is deleted. (Check operation)

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-94
14.6.6 Saving file recipe data
File recipe is saved the designated removable storage device as CSV file format.
Name of file recipe has the following format.
/Storage Card_root/XP_Recipe/XPR00000.CSV
/USB Storage_root/XP_Recipe/XPR00000.CSV

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-95
14.7 Scheduler
The scheduler is the function of deciding which action to do at the prearranged time.
Functions available are bit on, bit of, word value setting and script execution and so on and each scheduler can specify up to 8
actions.
Up to 32 schedulers can be set.
14.7.1 Use of Scheduler
(1) Bit On
Turns the bit to ON at the arranged time.
(2) Bit OFF
Turns the bit to OFF at the arranged time.

1

%MX01

1

%MX01
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-96
(3) Word Value Setting
Writes the value in the word device at the arranged time.
(4) Script Execution
Executes the script at the arranged time.
14.7.2 Scheduler Setting
Press [Open] in the menu invoked by double-clicking on [Scheduler] or pressing the right button on the mouse on [Scheduler]
in the project tree.
[Scheduler List Display]
This display shows a brief summary of the registered scheduler list.
Select [Insert New] in the menu invoked when you double-click or press the right button on the mouse on an empty line which
is not registered.
A display showing the information on the currently selected scheduler is invoked at the bottom of the screen.

1

%MW01
Chapter 14 Common Data
14-97

Items Description
Execution condition (a) Specifies the method of setting the scheduler operation time.
Detailed execution
Condition (b)
Sets detailed times according to the operation mode.
Operating functions (c) Displays the list of functions that can be registered in the scheduler.
Description (d) Enters brief description about the scheduler.
Function registration
button (e)
Registers functions on the left or removes a certain function in the registered function list.
Function list (f) Displays the list of the functions registered in the scheduler. Up to 8 functions can be registered in a
scheduler.
Operating sequence
Up/Down (g)
Dictates the execution sequence of the functions when two or more functions are registered.

The operating time of a scheduler is as follows.
(a) Minutely: Operates the dictated function every minute. Enter the second for the function to operate.
(b) Hourly: Operates the dictated function every hour. Enter the minute and second for the function to operate.
(c) Daily: Operates the dictated function every day. Enter the hour, minute and second for the function to operate.
(d) Weekly: Operates the dictated function every week. Enter the day, hour, minute and second for the function to operate.
(e) Monthly: Operates the dictated function every month. Enter the date, hour, minute and second for the function to operate.
(f) Yearly: Operates the dictated function every year. Enter the month, date, hour, minute and second for the function to
operate.
(g) Once: Operates the dictated function once at the arranged time. Enter the year, month, date, hour, minute and second for
the function to operate.
a b
c d e f g

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-98
14.7.3 Scheduler Operation Setting
(1) Bit On
(2) Bit Off

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-99
(3) Word Value Setting
16 bit or 32 bit can be specified.

Items Description
Object Device (a) Sets the object word device to enter the value when the function operates. It is processed with 16 bit or
32 bit data.
Data type (b) Decides the type of data to be input in the device.
Value (c) Sets the value to enter in the device.

(4) Script Execution

Items Description
Script name (a) Choose the script to operate.
Preview script (b) Displays the contents of the script selected in (a).

a
b
c
a
b

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-100
14.7.4 Scheduler Operation Priority Setting
[Action List]
Choose [Up]
Choose [Down]

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-101
[Scheduler Operation]
%MX33
(a)
%MW120
(b)
(c) %MX34
Script
(d) Executed

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-102
14.8 Script
The script is the function for the user to set the operation in addition to the functions provided by XP Builder. Scripts are
entered in the form of texts.
The script grammar follows the basic C grammar.
14.8.1 Use of Script
A script is not executed alone but when a specified action such as an object or display change is executed.
The following is an example of use of script.
(1) Global script
(2) Display change script
%MX01
Global script operating
condition met
Script
Executed

1

2
Script
Executed
Executed when the current
display is closed
Executed before new display is
opened

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-103
(3) Scheduler
(4) Object
Carried out the script before/after actions of the word lamp, number input unit, number output unit, character input unit,
character output unit and so on.
Script
Executed
Device
value read
Executed
before display
Device value
written
Executed
before written
Number input unit

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-104
14.8.2 Global Script Setting
[Sequence]
(a) Select [Common]-[Project Properties] in the menu.
(b) Shift to the [Global Script] tap in the properties editing dialog box which is invoked.
(c) Select the name of the script to execute in the name.
(d) Enter the bit device to order the device to start the script and specify the edge action of the condition device.
(e) Register the script by pressing button in the center.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-105
14.8.3 Display Change Script Setting
[Sequence]
(a) The mouse context menu is invoked in the basic display of the project tree.
(b) Choose [Properties] and move to the [Etc.] tap in the dialog box invoked in the screen.
(c) Check [Run Script at Open Screen] or [Run Script at Close Screen] and specify the script to execute.

Chapter 14 Common Data
14-106
14.8.4 Scheduler Script Execution Setting
[Sequence]
(a) Register a new scheduler to invoke the scheduler properties window.
(b) Select the [Script] item in the [Function] list in [Function settings].
(c) Press button to invoke the selected dialog box.
Select the script to execute in the script selection dialog box and click on OK.
For details, see Scheduler Setting.
14.8.5 Object Script Setting
For script selection of an object, see Setting Items of Object.
Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-1
Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15.1 Editing
(1) Creation/Opening/Closing
(a) The common setting has two configuration methods in the project tree.
(b) One is the item that can have a sub-item and the other is the item used as a single item.

Single Item Sub-item Creation
Tag Text table
Flow Alarm Script
System Alarm History alarm(using common properties)
Logging Recipe(using common properties)
Scheduler -

[Open/Close Single Item]
Opening or closing a single item display is as follows.
Choose / in the context tree in the project tree.
[Include Sub-Item]
The items including sub-items in the project tree are divided into two types according to whether common properties exist or
not.
The text table and script have no common properties and the history alarm and recipe have common properties.
The following illustration is the context menu without common properties such as a text table.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-2
The following illustration is the context menu with common properties such as a flow alarm.
[Edit Common Properties]
To open common properties in an item with common properties, select / in the context
menu.
[Insert Item]
A sub-item is added by selecting in the context menu.
In inserting a sub-item, as the history alarm exceptionally, one of the alarm group and alarm list can be chosen. An alarm
group might have an alarm group or alarm list as a sub-group.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-3
[Open/Close Sub-Item]
Opening/closing of a sub-item can be executed through the mouse context menu.
(2) Copy/Paste
All common items can be copied or pasted in the project tree. In an item with a sub-menu, only copy/paste of sub-menus is
possible.
[Copy/Paste in the Same XP Builder]
The illustration above displays selecting an item in the project tree and showing a context menu to copy “text table_01” item.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-4
Select the location to paste the text table to display the mouse context menu. Choose [Paste] in the menu.
The following figure shows the result of paste.
A text table cannot have a repeated name because XP Builder refers to the name when referring to the text table.
Therefore, when pasting in the same XP Builder, create a new name and add a text table because there is already the same
name.
The contents are equally copied.
Note
(1) Project item name
Items of project items that do not allow repeated naming are as follows.
The following items cannot have the same name because their names are referred to from outside.

text table History alarm group History alarm item Script

[Copy Data between XP-Builders]
Copying common items between XP Builders is the same as copying items within the XP Builder. However, when the project
properties or version is different between two XP Builders, some data might not be normally copied.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-5
The following shows problems with data copying between XP Builders.

Items Differences in XP-Builder Setting Data
text table Project editing language items are
different.
Editing language sequences are
different.
Copying a text table is not copying a document with a form but just copying a
simple text regardless of the editing language sequence or number of editing
languages. Therefore, even in case of the same language, if the sequence is not
correct, it can be copied to another language item.
Tag Connection device setting is
different.
The number of connection devices
is different.
The device information during copy/paste is saved in a text regardless of the
PLC type, so the device address might be displayed differently after copying
when the connection properties information between two projects is different. To
safely copy data, the connection properties information between two projects
should be the same.
History
Alarm
Connection device setting is
different.
The number of connection devices
is different.
A history alarm is copied with the alarm group and alarm list maintaining the
same structure except the common properties of the history alarm. However, the
names of the alarm group and alarm list cannot be repeated, so when the
repeated name is found, it is changed into the basic name and copied. If the
connection device types are different, the history alarm device information might
be different.
Logging Connection device setting is
different.
The number of connection devices
is different.
If the connection device types are different, the history alarm device information
might be different.
Scheduler Connection device setting is
different.
The number of connection devices
is different.
If the connection device types are different, the history alarm device information
might be different.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-6
(3) Export/import
Common items can share data within XP Builder or between XP Builders by export/import. In addition, the convenience in
editing of the text table and tags has been enhanced by editing the exported files in a document editor (Excel, Word) and
invoking them.
The following table is the file types used for export/import.

Items File extender
Text table, recipe, tag .CSV
History alarm .HAL
Flow alarm .FAL
Logging .LOG
Scheduler .SCH
Script .SPT

* CSV: Comma Separated Value. The CSV is recorded with each item of it marked with a comma. CSV files are saved in a
file or can be read or edited in the editor.
[Export]
Press in the context menu to export a project tree item.
If you press , a dialog box for file or folder selection is imported.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-7
The illustration above shows the dialog box invoked by selecting in the text table items. The text table has
multiple sub-items. In such a case, a folder selection dialog box is invoked.
If the user selects a folder, XP Builder displays sub-items in the folder selected by the user. Now the name of the file is the
name of the sub-item and extensions are divided according to the item types.
The items that can be exported to the folder are [text table], [recipe], [script] and so on.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-8
The illustration above shows the dialog box invoked when you press the button in a single item without a
sub-item or in the final sub-item when there are any sub-items such as a text table.
The dialog box enables you to specify the name of the file for the user to export.
With respect to the file type, default values are set for the export properties of each item.
[Import]
Select the type of the item to import from the project tree and click on the button in the context menu.
Import can be conducted at the highest tree whether the item has a sub-item or not.
When you import an item, the text table, history alarm and script can be changed and read according to the item properties.
If you execute [Import] between different project, following problems might occur.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-9

Items XP-Builder Setting Differences Data
Text table Project editing language items are
different.
Sequences of editing language are
different.
Only the common items of the editing language set in the project which executed
export and the project that executed import are read.
Tag Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
If the PLC connection information of the two projects is different, the device of the
tag might be different.
If any repeated tag name is found according to the tag name rule, a number is
given after the tag name to avoid the same name being given and a name is
created.
Flow
Alarm
Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
A flow alarm executes additional actions after deleting the previous data when it
imports. Therefore, it reads the same if the connection device settings are the
same. However, if the type of the connection device is different, the flow alarm
device information can be different.
History
Alarm
Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
The history alarm is read by the alarm group and alarm list with the same
structure maintained except the common properties of the history alarm.
However, the names of the alarm group and alarm list cannot be repeated, so if
a repeated name is found, it can be changed into a basic name can be created.
If the connection device type is different, the history alarm device information
might also be different.
Logging Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
If the connection device type is different, the history alarm device information
might also be different.
Scheduler Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
If the connection device type is different, the history alarm device information
might also be different.
Script Connection device settings are
different.
Number of connection devices is
different.
Because Script is processed as text string, it doesn’t change. But device reading and
device writing sentence may have compile error.

Note
(1) The export file structure is as follows.
(a) The files created when a history alarm, flow alarm, logging or script is exported cannot be edited by an ordinary editor. It can be
opened only in XP Builder.
(b) A tag, text table and recipe, which save information in the CSV file structure, can open the files to export and edit them and can
also read files that have been edited by a document editor.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-10
(4) Change of Common Item Name and Number
You can change the name or number of each common item in the project tree.
[Change Name]
(a) Select an item in the project window.
(b) Press on the right button on the mouse to select [Rename].
(c) Change the name and press the Enter key.
Click on the [Rename] menu and if the tree label is activated, enter a desired name and press the Enter key when you are
finished. If the entered name is a repetition of another item, it remains the previous value.

Note
(1) Naming Regulation
Item Regulation Example
Screen z Start with the number among 1 ~ 65534 and
after leaving a space, input the name.
z It can not be overlapped with other screen No. or Windows No.
z Windows Screen 65531 (DEC), 65532 (HEX), 65533 (ASCII),
65534 (FLOAT) can not change screen No.
1 screen, 2, 1000 screen
Text table z It can not be overlapped with other string table’s name. String 1, **, *Character*,
Script z It can not be overlapped with other script name.
z Special characters and space are not available.
z Script grammar reserved word is not available.
Reserved words: HMIExit, PrintScreen, PrintAlarm, ShowStatusbar,
SetBuzzerEnable, Buzzer, GetLastError, Sleep, SetTime, CopyData,
ChangeBaseScreen, BacklightOn
!@#$%.. Î Not available
Recipe z Start with the number among 1 ~ 255 and after leaving a space,
input the name.
z It can not be overlapped with other recipe name.
1 recipe, 255 recipe

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-11
[Recipe Number Change]
(1) Select an item in the project window.
(2) Press the right button on the mouse to select the [Rename] menu.
(3) Change the number and name and press the Enter key.
Enter the number and then name, with a space between them.
If you enter nothing after the space, no name is recognized.
Note
(1) If you click on the tree item which you want to rename and click on it once more, the tree item becomes editable, which is
the same effect as using the Rename menu described above.
(2) If the display number is the same as another item or there is an error in input of the number (e.g. when the name has been
entered without leaving a space), the previous value is maintained.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-12
15.2 Tag
If any piece of information is missing when you enter the tag information, the relevant part turns slightly red. So wrongly
entered a tag cannot be referred to and used elsewhere.
To be normally entered as a tag, the name and device address must be correctly registered.
[When Correctly Entered]
[Erroneous Tag without Device Address Entered]
(1) Input of Device
You can enter a device value in tag editing either by directly entering it or using a dialog box.
In the former case, you should know the method of device address expression.
Click on the cell in which to enter in the device line in the tag input window.
The device input editor is activated and a cursor appears. Enter a correct device address expression referring to the PLC
connection information set in the project properties. If the address expression is incorrect, the device is not entered but a
space is left.
A device name entered in small letters is expressed in capital letters.
[Correct Device Address Input]
Bit Device Input

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-13
Word Device Input
Set the device type as word.
Enter the word device address.
(2) Automatic Creation (Name)
This function is useful when you want to register several similar names or consecutive names in the tag input window.
If you use this function, new names are created in the following rule.

Name New Name
There are numbers the back or
the middle of the name.
A new name is created with the number increased by 1.
E.g.) Motor#1
Æ Motor#2 Æ Motor#3
No number comes the back or
in the middle of the name.
A random number is given after the name. Numbers are allotted from 1 and increased by 1 so
that they are not repeated.
E.g.) Water tank
Æ Water tank 1 Æ Water tank 2
A number in certain figures
comes in the middle of the
name.
The number is increased with the figures maintained.
E.g.) Motor#0001
Æ Motor#0002 Æ Motor#0003

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-14
Automatic creation operates as follows.
(a) Click on the name which you would like to specify as the standard of automatic creation.
(b) If a cell is selected, it is marked with at the right bottom.
Click on . When you place the pointer on , the pointer turns into .
(c) Click on and holding the mouse button, drag it to the desired place.
(d) When you release the mouse button, new names are automatically created according to the naming rule to the area you
chose.
(3) Automatic Creation (Device)
You can use this function when you want to register devices in consecutive addresses.
If you execute this function, device addresses are automatically created with the address number increased by 1.
If you choose a device address and execute this function, the address increases by 1.
If you execute automatic creation for 2 lines in the device address column, the address is increased by the difference between
the addresses.
You can choose up to 2 columns for this function.
You can have the same effect if you select the whole including the name and device type and execute automatic creation.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-15
[Automatic Creation with a Column Selected]
Choose the base column for automatic creation.
Click on the start point at the right bottom and drag the mouse. The virtual line drawn when you drag the mouse indicates the
area to be filled automatically.
If you release the mouse button, the area is filled.
The address increases with an offset from the base device of automatic creation.
[Automatic Creation with Two Columns Selected]

%IW0.0.1
%IW0.1.1
%IW0.0.3
%IW0.2.1
%IW0.1.3

1. Address difference: 2 WORD
2. Offset: 2 WORD * 2 columns = 4 words after the first address
3. Offset: 2 WORD * 3 columns = 6 words after the first address
4. Offset: 2 WORD * 4 columns = 8 words after the first address

%MW23
%MW19
%MW21
%MW17
%MW15

1. Address difference: -2 WORD
2. Offset: -2 WORD * 2 columns = -4 words after the first address
3. Offset: -2 WORD * 3 columns = -6 words after the first address
4. Offset: -2 WORD * 4 columns = -8 words after the first address

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-16
Select two columns as the base columns for automatic creation.
Click on the start point of the automatic creation and drag where you want to fill.
Selecting the area, release the mouse button and then the selected area is automatically filled.
The difference between the two initially selected addresses, that is, %IW0.0.3 - %IW0.0.1 has an offset of 2 WORD as shown
above.
Therefore, the address to come next is %IW0.1., which is 2 WORD higher than %IW0.0.3.
(4) Automatic Creation (Description)
Automatic creation of device description is simply increasing copy. That is, if a number is included in the text, the number is
increased and otherwise, a number comes after the text and increases.
[No Number in the Text]

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-17
[Text with a Number]
The included number is automatically increased.
(5) Copy/Paste
The tag table supports copy/paste of the table contents.
When you paste, the tag name and address are checked stringently. With respect to the tag name, it is checked whether the
pasted text is suitable for a name and the name is a repetition. If such conditions are not met, you cannot paste.
With respect to the address, it is checked whether the device address expression is correct and if it is found incorrect, you
cannot paste.
(6) Export/Import – CSV Format
The tag table exports and imports in the CSV format.
The following shows the CSV file structure in case of export in the CSV file.
[Tag File Structure]
Files are saved in the format of Unicode – Codepage 1200.

# Tag Table Export
# Do not edit the below 1 line. These lines contain important information.
Tag
# Number Name Device Type Address Description
1 Pump 1 BIT P00001 Pump 1 On
2 Pump 2 BIT P00002 Pump 2 On
~ ~ ~ ~ ~

#: This is a note added in the program.
The text of each field is separated by ‘,’ such as “Pump1”, “BIT” and saved.
The user can edit the CSV files using the Excel or other text editors.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-18
15.3 Text Table
(1) Keyboard Setting and Change
For multi-language input to be available using XP Builder, multi-language input should be available in the operating system of
the PC where XP Builder is operating.
The following shows the PC multi-language input setting.
Select [Control Panel] in the [Start] menu in the desktop.
Choose [Regional and Language Option] in [Control Panel]. If a dialog box appears, move to the [Language] tap, the second
tap.
Click on in [Text Services and input languages].

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-19
Click on [Add] to add the language to use for input in XP Builder.
If you select a language, you can select the keyboard corresponding to the language you chose. Specify the keyboard to use
the language.
Note
Tips on IME keyboard input
IME stands for Input Method Editor and is an input window for using various languages such as Korean, Chinese and Japanese. As you
cannot enter Asian languages with the basic English keyboard cannot, each key can change characters it represents in various languages.
The information on the language change is displayed in the small window shown above, which is called the soft keyboard. In XP Builder,
you can view or hide the keyboard by selecting [Menu] -> [View] -> [IME] when you want to enter Korean, Chinese and Japanese.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-20
(2) Simultaneous Input of Multiple Languages
The text selected as the present editing language is displayed in the table when you enter characters in the text table.
The text table can edit different languages in multiple lines at a time.
You can enter multiple languages in columns as follows.
[View Columns of Text Table]
Press the right button on the mouse on the text table input box.
Select [Property] in the invoked menu and the following display appears.

Items Description
(a) text table name Displays the name of the text table
(b) Font size The size of the font in the text table input box
(c) Select All Select all the languages on the left
(d) Deselect All Unselect all the languages on the left
(e) Invert Selection Inverse selected languages
(f) Edit languages Checks the editing languages registered as the project properties and the currently
displayed languages.

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-21
The project properties window displays the editing language list selected in the project properties. The current editing
language in the display is seen checked. If you want to juxtapose two languages in two columns and edit them at a time,
select the two languages and press OK.
As shown above, the language editing lines of the two selected languages are displayed.
(3) Copy/Paste
It saves the selected area data to copy in the clip board. The copied contents can be added to the present project or another
project. In addition, they can be pasted in another application.
[Sequence]
(a) Select the area to copy.
(b) Select [Edit] – [Copy] in the menu.
Note
You can select an area as follows.
(1) Select the (0,0) cell and thereby the entire table with your mouse.
(2) Select the entire column by selecting the column header of the cell with your mouse.
(3) Select the entire column by selecting the column header of the cell with your mouse.
(4) Drag part of the cell and select it with the mouse.
(5) Press Shift + arcolumn key to select it.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-22
The data saved in the clip board is displayed in the selected place. If it already exists, you can invoke and select a dialog box
and change the data, too.
[Sequence]
(a) Select the area to paste.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Paste] in the menu.
Note
(1) As many tags as there are in the clip board are pasted after the place selected when you pasted.
(2) If a text has been already entered where you are pasting, it is overwritten.
(4) Delete
The data in the selected area is deleted in the declared text list.
[Sequence]
(a) Select the area to delete.
(b) Select [Edit]-[Delete] in the menu.
(5) Automatic Creation
This is the function of searching for the parts corresponding to numbers in the texts registered in the text list and automatically
increasing the values.
The text properties(color, thick, sloped, underline, crossing out) copy the set value.
[Sequence]
(a) Place the pointer at the end of the cell and then the pointer becomes +.
(b) Drag it up or down holding the left button on the mouse.
(6) Export/Import – CSV File Format
The following shows the CSV file structure when you export a text table to the CSV file.
[Text Table File Structure]
Files are saved in the form of Unicode – Codepage 1200.
#: The note added in the program.
The text of each field is separated by ‘,’ such as “Pump1”, “BIT” and saved.
The user can edit the CSV files using the Excel or other text editors.

# Text Table Export
# Do not edit the below 2 line. These lines indicate language codes.
Text Table_01
4 412 409 840 411
#No Korean English Chinese Japanese Color Sloped Underline Crossing Out Thick
1 안녕 Hello のとは 1 ON ON OFF OFF
2 반갑습니다. 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-23
15.4 Flow Alarm
(1) Device Input (Continuous/Single)
The “Alarm Device” selection check box, which is at the upper center of the flow alarm editing display, provides the function of
making device input more convenient. If you enter the first device address and check when entering a
consecutive device, the device is automatically allotted consecutively.
15.5 History Alarm
(1) Device Input (Continuous/Single)
The “Device Allotment” selection check box which is on the upper left in the alarm list editing display of the history alarm
makes alarm object device input more convenient. If you enter the first device address and check when
entering a consecutive device, the device is automatically allotted consecutively.
(2) Automatic Creation (Device)
The automatic creation option in the alarm list table of the history alarm is all copy.
(3) Word Conditional Expression Input
Be sure to leave a space between terms or operands because terms of a word conditional expression are separated by
‘ ‘ (space) when you directly input the word conditional expression.
(4) Automatic Creation of Word Conditional Expression
If you execute automatic creation of a word conditional expression, the data is copied in a sub-list. This is useful when you
enter several similar conditional expressions.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-24
(5) Line Deletion
You can select and delete a line in the alarm list editing table.
As a line is deleted, the number of alarms decreases by the number of deleted lines.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-25
Press the [DEL] key.
(6) Copy/Paste
The basic actions of Copy/Paste of the history alarm table interpret all the data as a text and paste them.
If the type it not met, the device address and word conditional expression cannot be pasted.
Moreover, data between bits/words cannot be normally copied because their types are different.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-26
15.6 Logging
(1) Logging Creation/Deletion
Select the number line to create logging in the logging list table. Double-click on the line or click on [Add] in the mouse context
menu.
A logging is created in the line and the properties window is displayed.
(2) Copy/Paste
Select the logging to copy in the logging table. Select [Edit]-[Copy] or press Ctrl + C to copy the logging.
Select a line to paste the logging. Select [Edit]-[Paste] or press Ctrl + V to paste the logging.
The copied or pasted logging maintains a constant set value.
15.7 Recipe
(1) Data Input
A recipe table is where the set value which the user needs is registered in advance.
If ‘Data view as’ is set as View HEX, the value is input in HEX values. The numbers input in the View DEC mode are input in
DEC.
If you place ‘H’ of ‘h’ before the number in the View DEC mode, the number is recognized as a HEX value.
(2) Automatic Creation
If you select a line and execute automatic creation when you input a recipe table value, the number is automatically increased
by 1 and input.
If you execute automatic creation holding the Ctrl key, you can copy it. In such a case, the number is not increased.
If you execute automatic creation after selecting two columns, you can copy them with the values increased by the difference
between the two columns.
If you execute automatic creation holding the Ctrl key when you copy two columns, the two columns selected by simple
copying are copied.
(3) Copy/Paste
You can copy/paste the data of a recipe table with a document editor. Copy a table with a document editor such as Excel and
edit it with Excel. And then, copy in the document editor and paste it in the recipe table of XP Builder.
(4) Export/Import
You can save recipe set data in CSV files. You can read them after editing by using the text editor.
Export is divided into general export and individual recipe export.
[Individual Recipe Export]
Press the right button on the mouse on the individual recipe item in the project tree and select [Export].
When the file selection dialog box is invoked, name the file to save.
[General Recipe Export]
Press the right button on the mouse on the recipe item in the project tree and select [Export].
When the dialog box for selecting the folder to export is invoked, specify the folder to save the recipe item.
In such a case, files are saved as “recipe name.CSV.”

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-27
[Recipe CSV File Structure]

# Recipe Table Export(Note)
# Do not edit the below 4 line. These lines contain import information
Name(changeable)
#Device Count Input Point Data Type Data Block
Count
8 D00023 2 3
Data000 Data0001 Data0002
1 2 3
2 3 4
3 4 5
44 45 46
5 6 +
6 7 8
7 8 9
8 9 10

A note begins with # and can be added or deleted by the user. However, it is recommended that you do not edit the note at
the top.
Each data block can be built extending to the right. The number of additionally input data blocks should be equal to the
number of Data Block Counts at (5,4).
If you select [Import] in the context menu in the recipe items of the project tree, a dialog box for selecting the file is invoked.
If you want to read several files at a time, select multiple files to read in the file selection dialog box.
If the format above is not met when the recipe data is read, the recipe is not created.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-28
15.8 Scheduler
(1) Scheduler Creation/Deletion
Select the number line in which to create a scheduler in the scheduler list table. Double click on the line or select [Add] in the
mouse context menu.
A scheduler is created in the line and the properties window of the scheduler is invoked.
(2) Copy/Paste
Select the scheduler to copy in the scheduler table. You can copy the scheduler by selecting [Edit]-[Copy] or pressing Ctrl + C.
Select the line to paste and select [Edit]-[Paste] or press Ctrl + V.
The Copy/Paste scheduler maintains a constant set value.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-29
15.9 Script
(1) Script Creation/Deletion
A script is registered in the [Script] item in the project tree and used with the set script name referred to in each area where it is
used.
[Register Script]
Press the right button on the mouse on the project tree script and select [Insert].
(2) Script Grammar
C language grammar is used as the script. See “Chapter 18 How To Use Script.”
(3) Device Setting in Script
Devices can be read and written in scripts, but tags cannot be used in scripts.
[Device Expression]
The parts surrounded by
@[] is recognized as a device address.
As for the device address used in scripts, the data type of the device is added to the general device address expression (see
Appendix. Device Setting).
@[Data type: Connection number: Station address: Direct device address]
The following table shows settable data types.

Device Status Examples Examples of Use
X : BIT device @[X:No: *1] @[X:0:P001], @[X:P001]
S : SHORT(16bit) device @[S:No: *1] @[S:0:P000], @[S:2:#1:P000]
L : INT (32 bit) device @[L:No: *1] @[L:0:P000], @[L:P000]
W : UNSIGNED SHORT(16 bit) device @[W:No: *1] @[W:0:P000], @[W:1:#3:P000]
D : UNSIGNED INT(32 bit) device @[D:No: *1] @[D:0:P000], @[D:#1:P000]
F : FLOAT device @[F:No: *1] @[F:0:P000], @[F:#1:P000]

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-30
(4) Script Tool Box-Function List
Through the dialog box for script edition tool (Function List tab), you can register easily internal function that is available in script.
[Scrip Tool Box]
Select [View]-> [Scrip Tool Box] from the menu. Otherwise, select toolbar script icon.
Select [Function List] at the script tool box.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-31
[Available Functions]

Category Function Description
HMIExit End the monitor and move to standby screen System
Function
InitHistoricalAlarm Initialize the alarm area of NVRAM. Existing alarm contents are all
deleted.
InitLogging Initialize the logging area of NVRAM. Logged contents are deleted.
SetTime Change the clock of XGT Panel.
PrintAlarm Print the alarm list. Print Function
PrintScreen Print the contents displayed on the current screen.
Script Function GetLastError Return the errors that take place during the script execution.
CopyData Read the data from the source device and input them to the target
device.
Device
Function
CopyDataEx Read the data from the source device and input them to the target
device.
SetData Input data to the device.
GetData Get the device value.
ADD_SUM Calculate the sum of entered data and return. Communication
Function
ADD_SUM_1S Calculate the sum of entered data and obtain 1’s complement and
return.
ADD_SUM_2S Calculate the sum of entered data and obtain 2’s complement and
return.
CRC16 Calculate the 16 bit CRC value of entered data and return.
XOR_SUM Calculate the XOR sum of entered data and return.
ReadFromIO Read data from I/O of a designated controller.
WriteToIO Transmit data to I/O of a designated controller.
ASCII2HEX Transform ASCII data to hexadecimal data. Memory
Function
HEX2ASCII Transform hexadecimal data to ASCII data.
HIBYTE Obtain high byte of entered data.
LOBYTE Obtain low byte of entered data
MAKEWORD Obtain word values with two entered byte values.
Memcpy Copy the data of the original buffer to the target buffer.
Memset Initialize the buffer with a designated value.
Memcmp Compare two buffers each other.
SwapDWord Swap upper and lower word data of DWORD data.
BacklightOn Turn the back light On/Off Other
Buzzer Make buzzer sound.
SetBuzzerEnable Set to enable or disenable the buzzer.
ShowStatusbar Show the status bar on the bottom of XGT Panel screen.
Sleep Temporary stop Script for a certain amount of time.

Note
(1) For the detail of script function, refer to “chapter 18.4”.
Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-32
[Inputting functions to editing screen]
Select [Script] item from a project tree.
Select the menu [Project]->[Inserting script]
Then, new script will be created and shown at the screen. Put the cursor to the point where script function is inserted. Select
the function that you need from script tool screen.
Set up the properties and press [Insert] button at the bottom of tool screen.
Finally, the function will be input to the cursor point.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-33
(5) Script Tool Box-control word
The script editing tool dialog box displays the control sentences, device settings and operands available in the script.
[Add Control Sentence/Operand]
Click on twice the function in the sub-category of the control sentence in the function list tree.
The basic form of the function is inserted where the cursor is in the script display.

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-34
The figure above shows the result of clicking on the ‘while sentence’ twice in the script tool box and adding it to the script. The
added function text is inserted where the cursor currently is. The cursor then moves to the end of the inserted function text.
[Device Setting]
This enables a device to be entered in the script.
As a device-related function, there are bit device on/off word and word 16/32 device setting.
Object device: sets the object device.
Description: summarizes description of the action.
Enter the device, data value and description and press OK.
The set value is entered in the script display.

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-35

Chapter 15 Common Data Editing
15-36
(6) Script Error Check
This is the function of compiling the script written by the user. Select [Tool]-[Script Check] in the menu.
[Script Check] is executed when the present script window is activated and only checks the activated windows.
Script Error Check Result (e.g.)
Errors are displayed in the output window. To shift to the desired place, double click on the item you want to go to among the
errors in the output window.
To compile all the registered scripts, select the [Tool]-[Data Check] in the menu.
(7) Script Error Message
For script compile errors, see “Chapter 18 Script.”

Chapter15 Common Data Editing
15-37
(8) Script Text Editing
This function uses the basic character editing functions and can copy, paste, cut and delete texts.
[Goto]
Press the right button on the mouse in the script window. Select [Goto] in the menu.
Select the line to move to in the Goto dialog box and press the [Goto] button. The script cursor will move to the desired place.
[Find/Replace]
Execute [Tool]-[Find in active screen/Replace in active screen] in the main menu.
Enter the text you want to find or modify and execute the command.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-1
Chapter 16 Object Setting
16.1 Device Setting
This chapter describes how to set the device, which is monitored or written in each object function.
The device is set by the device buttons in the set dialog box in each object function.
e.g.) The device to be monitored can be set.
[Basic lamp setting display]
[Dialog box]
(1) When you directly input
You can directly enter by the keyboard to set the device. In such a case, you should enter the device type and device number.
(2) Input by clicking on Dev button

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-2
Device type
Network
Device input 1
Device input 2
Tag
Display of the device that
can be input
Connecting device

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-3

Item Description
Tag 1) Provides the device name for the user to easily recognize by inputting the device to frequently use
and can have the device referred to everywhere the device is set such as an object or alarm.
2) Set to use the device saved in advance.
3) By tag setting, you can specify the device through the list dialog of the registered device in
advance as follows.
If you select the tag button, a tag list set in advance is displayed.
In case of a bit object, only the tag list set as the bit device is displayed and in case of a word object,
only the tag list set as the word device is displayed.
[Registered Tag]
[Setting device using tag in word lamp]
Only the word device is
displayed in registered
tag

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-4

Connecting
device
XP-Builder can set four connecting XGT Panel by communication methods such as CPU, Link and
Ethernet.
If you have set two or more connecting devices, the connection status is specified too when the
device to be monitored in the object is set.
Example) When XGT Panel is connected by GM-CPU or GM-Ethernet methods as follows
If the supervisory device is set in an object, the connection status and device address are set
together.
Supervision of HX0000 device connected to
GM-CPU
Supervision of HX0000 device connected to GM
Ethernet

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-5

Device type The devices that can be selected are the internal and external devices
The selectable devices are displayed differently according to the XGT Panel information set when the
XP Builder display is created.
Device input 1 Select the device type and input the device number.
Device input 2 Select the device type and input the device number with buttons 0 ~ F.
Back: deletes the device number entered last.
Clr : deletes the devices numbers entered.
Enter : enters the set device number.
Display of device
that can be input
Shows the device type that can be entered.
The form of device address expression and maximum device range differ according to the PLC
device type. The expression form and maximum device range in device address display are
displayed.
Example 1. When the address of IX bit device of GM (CPU) is specified
Input type of IX device

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-6

Example 2. P word device of Master-K(CPU) is specified
If you directly input the device address, refer to the device input type and range displayed in the
device display.
Input type and range of P device
bit and word

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-7

Network This is used for setting the device area number according to the PLC connection status. Station
number can be set together with the device specification only when the XGT Panel connection
method is Cnet Therefore, if the connection method is CPU and Ethernet, the network window is
activated.
In case of XGT Panel connection of Cnet, the network setting can be done in the following ways.
CPU Connection Cnet Connection

Setting type Description
Use Default Use the area number specified in [Common]-[Project Property Setting]-[XGT
Panel Settings]-[Detail Settings].
Custom setting The user can specify an station number to supervise the device.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-8
16.2 Display Function Setting
Display function is setting the color, image, pattern, background color of the pattern, frame color and image type according to the device
status (on/off). The display items set like this are displayed in the screen according to the status of the device connected to PLC.
The following displays are differently set according to the objects. Here the objects using complicated display functions are mainly
described.
z Switch bit Switch word Window switch
z Special switch Multi switch Lamp bit
To be used, the displays are set in the dialog box window of object display items.
[Display dialog box]

Items Description
Transparent BG Image (a) Having the object image not displayed
Use Image Reverse (b) Bit Lamp does not have [Using Negative Image] function.
It does not set On, Off image at switch object but displays the image with OFF image only.
If the switch [In case Lamp Conditions are not applied] is activated, negative image area will be shown
at the screen.
Ex. Basic device has HX0000 at Bit switch. Supposing that the basic image is as below, it will be shown
at XGT Panel depending on whether a switch is pressed or not.

f g
h
e
i
k
a
b
c
j
d

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-9

Items Description
Basic Image
On the other hand, if [In case Lamp Conditions are applied] is activated, the negative image will be
shown at the screen when lamp conditions device is ON or meets the conditions.
Ex. Both Basic device and lamp conditions device have HX0000 at Bit switch. Supposing that the basic
image is as above, the following image will be shown at XGT Panel depending on the status of HX0000
device.
If [Negative Image] is applied, you can not establish [Not using image] with setting On, Off image
respectively. Furthermore, if [Not using image] is applied, setting [Negative Image] is not available.
When pressing the button
ON (c) Sets the image to be displayed when the device is ON after the net function is selected.
OFF (d) Sets the image to be displayed when the device is OFF after the net function is selected.
When On/Off images are set, the standard device status can be checked by the image.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-10

Items Description
After the On/Off images are set as above, the image is changed whenever the device status changes.
Device status ON
Device status OFF
OFF image ON image
Image Type (e) Selects the image type.
On 이미지 Off 이미지
Not Change Color/Pattern
Color/Pattern
image image

Image type Description
Not Change Color/Pattern
-ON, OFF images can be chosen from the raster, vector or
user image list.
-The image can be selected by using [Open].
-Different images can be selected for the On/Off images.
-A pattern cannot be applied to the image.
Same Image & Change
Color/Pattern
-ON, OFF images can be chosen from the vector image list
(not from the raster and user image list).
-The image cannot be selected by using [Open].
-Only one On/Off image can be selected for the On/Off
images.
-A pattern can be applied.
On 이미지 Off 이미지
Same Image & Change
image image

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-11

Items Description
Library (f) The form to display according to the device status (On/Off) is selected from the library. If you select the
following functions, an image selection window as follows is invoked. You can select an image from
each category.
[_R] next to the image library list name refers to the raster image and [_V] refers to the vector image.
A pattern can be applied to the image selected from the vector image list but not to the image selected
from the raster image or user graphic image.
Raster image list
Vector image list

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-12

Items Description
Open (g) The user can select an image file other than the image specified for the XP Builder system.
If you use graphic files such as the bitmap file, JPEG or GIF as the switch or lamp image and press
[Open], the dialog box for image registration is invoked.
You can select On or Off graphic filed.
ON image setting by using Open
Pattern(h) Selects the figure pattern.
A pattern can be applied only when the image is set as [Same Image & Change Color/Pattern].
Image type in [Not Change Color/Pattern]

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-13

Items Description
Image type in [Same Image & Change Color/Pattern]
Pattern foreground
color(i)
Sets the pattern color.
The area where the pattern is applied is the remaining part of an image other than the frame. The frame
area differs according to the image as follows and the area where the pattern applies is also different
according to the image.
Example 1.
Example 2.
Example 3
Frame area
Pattern applied
area
Frame area
Pattern applied
area
Pattern applied
area
Frame area

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-14

Items Description
Pattern background
color(j)
Sets the background color of the pattern.
See pattern color (h).
Frame color(k) Sets the frame color.
See pattern color (h).

Note
(1) If you select an image by [Open]( ), the image is automatically registered in the user graphic library.
Registered Image
Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-15

If you select [Not Change Color/Pattern], all the image lists can be selected of the vector, raster and user graphic libraries in
If you select [Same Image & Change Color/Patern], the image can be set only from the vector image list in the category list.
- The bit lamp and bit word do not have [Transparent BG Image] function.
- If the communication between PLC and XGT Panel series is disconnected or the cable connection in XGT Pan
the image changes of each object displayed in XGT Panel are as follows.
the category list.
el is not normal,
Object Type Display
Bit switch Not changed.
Word switch Not changed.
Window shift
switch
Not changed.
Special switch Not changed.
Multi switch Not changed.
Bit lamp Image not displayed.
Word lamp Image not displayed.
Clock Not changed.
Bit message Message not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Word message Message not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Numeric Display Number not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Numeric Input Number not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Text Display Character text not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified
is displayed.
Text Input Character text not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified
is displayed.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-16

Bit window The window set in the object is not displayed. If the window is set in another object of which
the communication is normal, it can be displayed by the object.
Word window The window set in the object is not displayed. If the window is set in another object of which
the communication is normal, it can be displayed by the object.
Bit part The part screen set in the object is not displayed. If the window is set in another object of
which the communication is normal, it can be displayed by the object.
Word part The part screen set in the object is not displayed. If the window is set in another object of
which the communication is normal, it can be displayed by the object.
Animation Not displayed.
Bar graph Graph not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Pie graph Graph not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Meter graph Graph not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Closed graph Graph not displayed. The image at the time when the background image is specified is
displayed.
Trend graph X, Y axes are normally displayed but the trend line is not displayed. The image at the time
when the background image is specified is displayed.
History Alarm
Viewer
Not changed. If the communication is not normal, the alarm does not occur because the
status of the device to be supervised cannot be known, but the data of the alarms that
occurred are all displayed.
Data list Values not displayed. The grid of the data list view object is displayed.
Logging Viewer Not changed. The log data recorded when the communication is normal is displayed. The log
data when the communication is not normal is displayed as #.
Alarm Navigator Not changed. It displays the group of alarms that already occurred, so if there is data of the
alarms that occurred when the communication was not normal, the name of the group to
which the alarm belongs is displayed.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-17
16.3 Text Setting
Text setting is specifying the properties of the texts to be displayed on each object. If you use each text, you can change the displayed
texts according to the device status (On/Off) connected to PLC or device value. The properties of the text that can be set vary
according to the objects.
In case of the switch and lamp object, the user can input the text and also can specify the text by using the registered text table.
Text table registration is registering the contents of the frequently used text in advance. You can conveniently use the text or text items
in the objects registered like this in order to build the text.
E.g.)
The text setting function has different setting items according to the object. Here, the object using complex text setting function shall be
described.
The functions of the object using comment are as follows.
z Switch bit switch word Change screen switch
z special switch multi-switch lamp bit
Note
(1) For the text table to be used, it should be registered before the text is selected in the object.
Selection of switch bit
object text 5
Selection of message object text 3

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-18

Items Setting
Use Caption (a) Sets whether to use text display in the object.
Set when the user wants to use the text to display on the object image.
If you select caption use, all the text properties are activated and each item can be set.
On (b) If the text for the device connected to PLC to display when on, click on On (b) and set the other text
properties.
Off (c) If the text for the device connected to PLC to display when off, click on Off (b) and set the other text
properties.
Text input area
(d)
Enters the texts to display.
From text table
(e)
The texts are not directly input, but selected from the built text table.
As in the example above, if you set the [in text table] check item, you cannot directly use the text input area
(d) directly, but the button is activated so that you can select the text table.
Caption cannot be directly input.

b
c
e f g
j
m
k
a
d
i
l
n
o
p
h

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-19

Items Setting
Text table (f) If you press …. in order to select a built text table, the following dialog box is invoked and you can select a
desired text in the table.
The color and text type of the selected text table are maintained as they were set in the text table.
Registered text table
Editing language
selection
List of texts entered in each
text table

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-20

Items Setting
On <-> Off copy
(g)
Off-> On copy: the text and type set during OFF are copied when ON.
On-> Off copy: the text and type set during ON are copied when OFF.
If you set ON and OFF and click on Off->On copy ( ), the text properties of ON are
changed as follows.
On caption text properties status
Off caption text properties status
Reference device is ON in
XGT Panel
Reference device is OFF in
XGT Panel

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-21

Items Setting
Delete On/Off
caption (h)
Set when you want to delete all the ON captions you have built.
If you press the button in On status (a), all the On captions are deleted.
If you press the button in Off status (a), all the Off captions are deleted.
[Before pressing the button of On caption deletion]
[Pressing the button of On caption deletion]
Font (i) Sets the font type.
Size (j) Sets the size of texts between 9 and 624.
Size : 9 Size : 20
Vertical Ratio (k) You can establish character’s vertical ratio with a percentage to extend or reduce the character width. The
ratio of character width is vertical ratio to character size (j) and the available setting value ranges from 1% to
600%. A user can select the ratio from combo box or input the value directly. Ex.) Supposing Font: Arial,
Size: 12, the size to its vertical ratio is as below.
If you establish character at string table, setting [Vertical Ratio] is not available. Even for the same caption or
character, character width is displayed depending on character shape (Gulim, Saegulim, etc.).

Alarm Alarm Alarm
50% 100% 200%

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-22

Items Setting
Change the
Property of Text
Table (k)
If you want to change the text color and type (bold, italic, strikeout, underline) set in the text table, the
following function is set.
This function cannot be selected in direct input, but activated only when it is selected in the text table.
If you select the properties change selected in the text table, you can select the text color and type (bold,
italic, strikeout, underline).
e.g.)
e.g.)
If you change the properties specified in the text table, the changed properties apply to XP Builder.
Use text table properties Change properties as above
Not Selectable
Selectable
Color(l) Sets the color of texts.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-23

Items Setting
Text type(m) Sets the type of texts (bold, italic, strikeout, underline). Two or more can be selected at a time.
Multiple types can be applied at a time.
Bold Italic Strikeout Underline
Bold and Strikeout
Horizontal
location(o)
Selects the horizontal location of texts.
Left Center Right
Vertical
location(p)
Selects the vertical location of texts.
Top Middle Bottom

Note
(1) The texts selected in ON and OFF must be selected in the same text table. (e.g. if ON caption is set in text_01, the OFF
caption must be set in text_01 as well.)
(2) If the text table is renamed during creation, the previously specified text can be changed.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-24
16.4 Conditional Sentence Setting
This is setting conditional sentences and can change the settings of the background color, frame color, figure outline and text of an
object image according to the condition of the set conditional sentence.
The object that can set a conditional sentence and the settings that can be changed are as follows.

Object Settings
Switch Object Operating condition, lamp condition
Word Lamp Image and text properties
Word Message Image color, image background color, text color, text
Numeric input, numeric display Image background color, text color, flashing
Word Window The number of window to which to shift
Word Part The number of part to which to shift
Bar Graph Padded area padding background color, Padded area padding color
Pie Graph Padded area padding background color, Padded area padding color
Meter Graph Color of the pointer
Closed Graph Padded area padding background color, Padded area padding color

16.4.1 Area Editing Dialog Box
a
b
a c a d a
Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-25

Type Description
a Sets the conditional sentence to build among the operating expressions of second and third terms.
b Displays the result of the set conditions.
c Operand A ( ) : sets the operand in the first term.
Operand B( ) : sets the operand in the second term.
operand C( ) : sets the operand in the third term.
The ranges of each term are as follows.
720 <= $V <= 950
operandA operand B operand C
d The operands of each term set in (c) are as follows.
Operand Settings Description
Constant The user specifies the operand as the constant input by the
user.
$V(Pivot device) Specifies the value of the operand as the reference device
data value supervised by the object.
Other Device Specifies the value of the operand as the set device data
value

Type of Range Description
Left term is smaller than right term.
<= Left term is equal to or smaller than right term.
== Left term is equal to right term.
!= Left term is different from right term.
> Left term is bigger than right term.
>= Right term is equal to or smaller than left term.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-26
16.4.2 Condition List Dialog Box
[Description of dialog box]

Type Description
a Builds a new conditional sentence.
b Deletes the conditional sentence.
c Moves up the priority of the conditional sentence under editing.
Conditional sentence which has been built
Moves up the second conditional term of the sentences built above
d Moves down the priority of the conditional sentence under editing.
Moves up the third conditional term of the sentences built above

e
a b c d

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-27
Note
(1) If you input the operand as a fixed constant, the range of possible constants cannot be exceeded according to the size and type of
the standard device.

Device size Device type Minimum Maximum
16 bit Signed Decimal -32768 32767
16 bit Unsigned Decimal 0 65535
16 bit BCD 0 9999
32 bit Signed Decimal -2147483648 2147483647
32 bit Unsigned Decimal 0 4294967295
32 bit BCD 0 99999999

(2) Execution is carried out in the sequence of priority and if two conditions are met in the built conditional sentences, the conditional
sentence higher in the list of conditional sentences is executed.
Example. If a conditional sentence as follows is set
If the standard device value is 50, all three conditional sentences above are met. In such a case, only the conditional sentence
set the highest is executed.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-28
16.5 Offset Setting
You can access an address as far from the basic address as the value set in the offset device by offset value change. That is, you can
dynamically change the address of the object to supervise. If you specify P100 as the offset device, the device to supervise dynamically
changes as follows according to the value of the offset device.
0
10
11
참조할 디바이스 주소
P200
P210
P211
P100 에서 읽은 값
P200
P100으로 옵셋 설정
Example 1. If you set offset at P100 after setting the standard device at P200 in the basic setting, the value of P100 is read and
added to the basic setting and the address of the device to supervise is calculated. If P100 is 0, the address of the
device to supervise is P200 and 10, the value is P210.
Example 2.

Line : Numeric input function Basic device M200
Goal : Numeric display function Basic device M300
Offset device M200
Output : Numeric display function Basic device M500
Offset device M200

Setting the offset as P100
Value from P100 Device address to refer to

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-29
The offset function is set by arranging the object functions. The objects that are capable of offset setting are as follows.
• Bit Switch Word Switch Change Screen switch Special switch
• Bit Lamp Word Lamp Bit Message Word Message
• Numeric input Numeric display Text Input Text Display
• Bit Part Word Part Bar Graph Pie Graph
• Meter Graph Trend Graph

Items Settings
Offset(a) Set to use the offset function.
Device(b) Set to decide the device address by adding the device value set by the offset device to the device to
monitor.
Set in the same size and type as the device to referred to in the basic item.

a
b

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-30
16.6 Operating Condition Setting
This is set for the object that carries out operation to the device. If the conditions are not met, the operation is not executed and if the
conditions re met, actionable objects are executed.
The objects that can set operating conditions are as follows.
• Bit Switch Word Switch Change Screen Switch Special Switch
• Numeric Input/Display Text Input Multi Switch
Example)
If the operating condition is set as follows
D100 == 255
If the condition above is met, the operating switch is activated and operates as follows when the lamp displaying the [Line operating
status] is edited to be ON.

라인 번호 :
생산량 :
진행률 :
라인 동작 상황 :

1
255
90 (%)
동작 정지

라인 번호 :
생산량 :
진행률 :
라인 동작 상황 :
동작 정지

1
500
90 (%)

라인 번호 : 1
생산량 : 300
진행률 :
라인 동작 상황 :
동작 정지

60 (%)

If D100 device value is 500
If D100 device value is 255
Not operating
Operating

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-31
.
The operation types and execution conditions are as follows.

Condition
Type
Execution Conditions Operations When Conditions Are Met
Bit On (a) Operates when bit is On The object operates only when the bit device set in the operating conditions is
On.
Example. [Numeric input unit]
Number input unit operates only when the bit device %IX0.0.0 is On in the
dialog box above.
Bit Off (b) Operates when bit is Off The object operates only when the bit device set in the operating conditions is
Off.
Example. [Numeric input unit]
Number input unit operates only when the bit device %IX0.0.0 is Off in the
dialog box above.
Range (c) Operates when the word device
range is met
The object operates only when the specified conditional sentence is met.
Example. [Numeric input unit]
If the device value set in the operating conditions meets the conditions of the
set range, it executes number input operation.
Multi Bit (d) Operates according to the result
of logical operation of set multiple
bit device ON/OFF.
See [Multi Bit] below.

a b c d
Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-32

Note
(1) If the device size or type is changed by the area, the conditional sentence of the built area is deleted
(2) The fixed value that can be set by the area has the following range according to the size and type of the device.
Device size Device type Minimum Maximum
16bit Signed Decimal -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned Decimal 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed Decimal -2147483648 2147483647
32bit Unsigned Decimal 0 4294967295
32bit BCD 0 99999999

[Details of Multi bit]
(1) The multi bit is selected in the operating conditions and the number of bits is specified.
(2) If you click on the setting button, dialog box [Multi bit condition] is invoked so that the as many devices as the set number of
bits can be set.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-33
The operating conditions are set in each object function.

Operation Description
Device Sets the device that is the condition of multi bits.
Value Decides which of ON and OFF the bit device condition satisfaction should be.
Condition Selects the method of meeting the conditions.
Continuous
Address
Setting
As many devices as the set number of devices, beginning from the set device, are consecutively set
automatically.

Condition Description
AND The condition is met when the ON/OFF conditions of each bit device are all met.
OR The condition is met when one of the ON/OFF conditions of each bit device is met.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-34
16.7 Security Setting
This is for enabling only the person who knows the password to use/operate the object by setting a password of the object.
Security can be set by selecting the security function in the object functions.
You can also limit display or operation of objects by using the security function and set the security levels(0~9).
If the security level is 0, it is not set and all users have access.
E.g.
Security according to the password
Examples of the following security functions set for four objects (text input unit, Screen Change switch, multi switch and numeric
input unit) are as follows.

Object Type Security Authority
Text Input 3
Change Screen Switch 7
Multi Switch 1
Numeric Input 0

The security level authorities are as above and if multiple users want to manipulate each object, the objects that can be
manipulated according to the user security level are as follows.
(O : Manipulatable, X : Not Manipulatable)

User User security level Text input
unit
Window shift
switch
Multi switch Number input unit
User1 1 X X O O
User2 4 O X O O
User3 8 O O O O
Others 0 X X X O

Users 1, 2 and 3 have access to user security levels 1, 4 and 8 respectively in the table above. User 1 has access to only objects
below security level 1, so he can change the multi switch setting, but has no access to other objects. By contract, user 3 has
access to objects below security level 8 and therefore all the objects are accessible for him. The access to objects varies
according to the security level of the user.
Each object unit is set in the each object function setting dialog box. The properties dialog box is displayed. Set the security level
set in the window in Security level.

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-35
(1) Selected when you want to use security function.
(2) Determine the security level between 0 and 9 (level 0 is not using security).

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-36
16.8 Script
This is about using the script built in advance by the XP Builder object and setting the script to use. Scripts have been designed to
easily control or display the device data in the XGT Panel series.
For the characteristics, use and language limits of the script, see the chapter 18 Script Chapter.
16.8.1 Cautions in Script Operation
(1) The time limit for each script is 5 seconds for communication between the PLC and XGT Panel series and for efficiency of
XGT Panel operation. It is recommended that you do not use a script syntax that takes a lot of time.
(2) If communication fails, the script stops.
(3) If a wrong operation (dividing by 0, etc.) is executed, the script stops.
16.8.2 Direct Variables and Internal Variables within Script
The device value used within the script set in the object reads data values from the PLC when the script starts. Henceforth, it stores the
data value in a temporary storage space used within the script. Reading within the script uses the data saved in the temporary storage
space. Writing in the script is carried out immediately when value assignment is conducted.

D30 300
D20 200
D10 100

@[w:%mw10] = 10;

D30 300
D20 200
D10 10

 

D30 300
D20 200
D10 100

@[w:%mw20] = @[w:%mw10];

D30 300
D20 10
D10 10

 

D30 300
D20 200
D10 100

Therefore, even if a constant or another device value is allotted to the variable within the script, the values cannot be used while the
script is being executed. When you want to change and use the device value in the script, use the internal variable.

Use of direct variable Use of temporary variable
Initial mw10 device value is 100
// Script starts
@[w:%mw10] = 80;
if(@[w:%mw10] == 80)
@[w:%mw10] = 0;
else
@[w:%mw10] = 1;
Initial mw10 device value is 100
// Script starts
$S = @[w:%mw10];
$S = 80;
If($S == 80)
@[w:%mw10] = 0;
else
@[w:%mw10] = 1;

In the example above, the results of operations carried out in the script according to the variables are as follows.
Script starts
Temporary
storage space
First syntax completed

Second
completed
syntax

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-37

Variable Method
Direct
variable
When the script is executed by using the direct variable, the final value of @[w:%mw10] is 1.
Temporary
variable
When the script is executed by using the direct variable, the final value of @[w:%mw10] is 0.

Sequence Result and Description
Script starts PLC device value is saved in the temporary script storage
space
PLC device mw100 value 100
mw100 value of temporary storage
space
100
First syntax @[w:%mw10] = 80; Execution of operation of writing 80 in the PCL mw10
address
PLC device mw100 value 80
mw100 value of temporary storage
space
100
Second syntax if(@[w:%mw10] == 80) @[w:%mw10] uses the value of the temporary storage
space during script execution. Therefore, this syntax is
FALSE.
Script result The result is @[w:%mw10] = 1;
Sequence Result and Description
Script starts PLC device value is saved in the temporary script storage
space
PLC device mw100 value 100
mw100 value of temporary storage
space
100
First syntax $S = @[w:%mw10]; In internal variable with mw10 in the temporary storage
space within the script is created.
PLC device mw100 value 100
mw100 value of temporary storage
space
100
Internal variable $S value 100
Second syntax $S = 80; 80 is allotted to the created internal variable with the
mw100 not changed in PLC or temporary storage space
PLC device mw100 value 100
mw100 value of temporary storage
space
100
Internal variable $S value 80
Third syntax If($S == 80) Internal variable $S is 80.Therefire, this syntax is
TRUE.
Script result The result is @[w:%mw10] = 0;

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-38
16.8.3 Examples of Script Result
The user can operate the standard device value connected to the PLC and monitor the operated values by using the XP Builder script.
For example, let’s assume that the device value of mw100 indicates the temperature in Celsius of the PLC device, the user can indicate
the temperature in terms of Fahrenheit.
[Sequence]
(1) Add the script of which the name is [Fahrenheit].
(2) Edit the following script syntax.
(3) Set [Fahrenheit] script as follows in the number indicator object.
$S = (($S * 9) / 5 ) + 32;
Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-39

Note
(1) If you use the direct variable in editing script syntax, the result is different from the example above.
As the example above shows, if you use the direct variable, the operation result is written in MW0000 device as soon as th
script syntax is finished, so MW0000 of PLC is displayed in Fahrenheit. That is, if you use the temporary variable, the operatio
of writing the value in the PLC device is not carried out, but only the operation result is displayed. However, if the direct variable i
used, the operation result is written in the PLC, so the PLC device value is changed.
@[0:w:%MW0000] = ((@[0:w:%MW0000] * 9) / 5 ) + 32;
e
n
s
Sequence Use of Direct Variable Use of Temporary Variable
Script starts
First syntax finished
Result 1. Actual PLC device value is changed into 32.
2. The value continues to change because 32 is
used for the next script execution.
1. Actual PLC device value is not changed.
2. The value does not change because 0 is
used for the next script execution.
Therefore, if the script is operated only to display the device value, using the temporary variable is desirable.

PLC device mw0000 value 0
mw0000 value of temporary
storage space
0
PLC device mw0000 value 0
mw100 value of temporary
storage space
0
PLC device mw0000 value 32
mw0000 value of temporary
storage space
32
PLC device mw0000 value 0
mw0000 value of temporary
storage space
32

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-40
16.8.4 Script Setting Items
Items for setting the script in each object are as follows.

Items Description
Use Script (a) Selected when the script is used.
Select Script (b) All the script lists in [Project Tree]-[Script] are displayed in the combo box.
The script to be operated by the word lamp in the combo box is selected.
Script contents (c) The contents of the selected script are displayed. Where the script contents are displayed, only the
syntaxes edited in [Common]-[Script] are displayed. The edited contents cannot be modified or
added here. To change the script, edit it in [Common]-[Script].

Note
(1) If the set script is deleted, an error occurs in data check.
a
b
c

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-41
16.9 Setting Display Trigger Function
Display trigger function refers to a function to make a relevant object displayed or not displayed on the XGT Panel
screen according to its device condition (on/off). For example, for objects of bit parts, enter the expression P0==10
on [Bit Part]-[Extended]-[Display Trigger] screen, if the user wants to display it only when device P0 is 10. If so, bit
parts are displayed on the XGT Panel screen only when P0 device value is 10.
The objects are displayed on the screen depending on the state of the device connected with PLC.
The following display trigger functions may vary according to settings of each object. This publication focuses on the
objects using complicate display functions.
z Clock Bit Message Word Message
z Numeric Display Numeric Pad Character Display Character Pad
z Bit Part Word Part
z Animation Bar Graph Pie Graph
z Meter Graph Looped Curve Graph Trend Graph
z Logging Trend Graph Real Time Distribution Graph Logging Distribution Graph
z History Alarm View Data List View Logging View
z Alarm Detector Memo Pad Recipe Detector
z Data List Editor File Recipe Editor
Example)
To use the display trigger settings, it is necessary to set display items of the relevant object in the dialog box.
Example1)
When setting a display trigger condition as follow,
When D100 == 10,
If the condition above is met and it is edited that part screen is displayed on a basic screen to show the operation
state of the operation line, it will operate as follows:

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-42
Not displayed on XGT Panel Screen
D100 != 10
D100 == 10
Displayed on XGT Panel Screen

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-43
.
Operation types and execution conditions are as follows:

Condition
Type
Execution Condition Operation if the condition is met
Bit On (a) Displayed only when bit is
turned On
The relevant object will be displayed only when the bit device set on
the operation condition is turned On.
Example. In case of [Bit part], the part screen will be displayed only
when the state of bit device %IX0.0.0 is On in the dialog box above.
Bit Off (b) Displayed only when bit is
turned Off
The relevant object will be displayed only when the bit device set on
the operation condition is turned Off.
Example. In case of [Bit part], the part screen will be displayed only
when the state of bit device %IX0.0.0 is Off in the dialog box above.
Range (c) Displayed only when the
Word device range is met
The relevant object will be displayed only when the designated
condition statement is met.
Example. In case of [Bit part], the part screen will be displayed only
when the value of the target device set on the operation condition
meets the condition of the set range.
Multi Bit
(d)
Displayed depending on the
result of logical calculation
of the bit devices On/Off
state
Refer to the following [Multi Bit].

Chapter 16 Object Setting
16-44

Notice
(1) If any change in device size or type is made in the Range, the previous condition statement will be deleted.
(2) The constant on the Range can have the following range depending on its device size and type:
Device Size Device Type Minimum Value Maximum Value
16bit Signed Decimal -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned Decimal 0 65535
16bit Binary-Coded
Decimal(BCD)
0 9999
32bit Signed Decimal -2147483648 2147483647
32bit Unsigned Decimal 0 4294967295
32bit Binary-Coded
Decimal(BCD)
0 99999999

[Multi Bit Detailed Description]
(1) Decide the number of bit after selecting Multi Bit
(2) If clicking the set button, the [Multi Bit Condition] dialog box appears to allow the user to set devices as many as
the number of the bit devices

Item Description
Device Set devices that will be subject to multi bit conditions.
Value Select either On or Off state on which the criteria to meet the conditions of the bit device is based.
Condition Select a method to meet the conditions.
Continuous Address
Setting
Automatically set devices as many as the number of the set devices continuously starting from the set device.

Condition Description
AND Those conditions are met only when all of the On/Off Conditions of each bit device are matched.
OR Those conditions are met when any one of On/Off Conditions of each bit device is matched.

Chapter 17 Object

17-1

Chapter 17 Object
Objects are the items in the display which are displayed differently according to the monitoring data values.
17.1 Lamp Object
17.1.1 Overview
The lamp changes the forms of circles, quadrangles or graphics according to the conditions adjusted to the state of the device
connected to the PLC.
17.1.2 Lamp Types

Types Description
Bit lamp The lamp has different forms according to On/Off of the relevant device.
Word lamp The lamp has different forms according to the conditions of the value range of the relevant
device.

Note
(1) If not connected to the PLC device,a lamp is not displayed in XGT Panel.
(2) Do not overlay a lamp on another object. It might not be displayed correctly.
17.1.3 Bit Lamp Setting Items
The form and text of a lamp change according to the state of the relevant device value as follows.
[Method]
(a) Create a bit lamp in the screen.
(b) Set the object device in [Basic] of the bit lamp.
(c) Set the image according to On/Off in [Display] of the bit lamp.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
(d) Set the texts according to On/Off in [Text] of the bit lamp.
(
See 16.3 Text Setting)
Device State ON
Device State OFF

Chapter 17 Object
17-2
(1) Basic

Items Settings
Device (a) Sets the device to be referred to in the relevant object.
You can set it by using the device button or directly enter it on the keyboard.
Description (b) Enters description on the relevant object.

a b
Chapter 17 Object

17-3

(2) Display
The On/Off image, pattern and color are specified for the bit lamp to be displayed.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)

Items Settings
Transparent BG image (a) Doesn’t display the object image, selectable per each ON, OFF status
ON (b) When selected, sets the properties to be displayed at ON.
OFF (c) When selected, sets the properties to be displayed at OFF.
Image type (d) Selects who to display the form of the image.
Not Change Color/Pattern: selects different images for On and Off.
Same Image & Change Color/Pattern in On/Off: selects the same image for On and Off, but sets
different colors and patterns.
Blink (e) Sets the Blink speed of the image. (Not used, slow, normal and fast)
Library (f) Selects the form to display in the library.
Open (g) Directly sets the image from the file.
Pattern (h) Selects the pattern of a figure.
Pattern FG color (i) Sets the foreground color of the pattern.
Pattern BG color (j) Sets the background color of the pattern.
Frame color (k) Sets the frame color.

e f g h
a b c d
i
j
k

Chapter 17 Object
17-4
(3) Text
This is setting the text to be displayed on the bit lamp object image.
(
See 16.3 Text Setting)

Terms Settings
Use caption (a) Decides whether to use text display.
ON (b) Selects the next function and then sets the text to display when the relevant device turns ON.
OFF (c) Selects the next function and then sets the text to display when the relevant device turns OFF.
Text entry area (d) Enters the texts to display.
If a text is brought from the text table, you cannot directly enter in the text entry area.
Font (e) Sets the font type.
From Text Table (g) This is not directly entering texts, but is set when entered through the previously set text table.
Text Table (h) Open the text table when selecting a text in the text table.
Select a desired text in the text table.
The selected text maintains the color and form of the texts set in the text table.
On <-> Off Copy (d) In case of Off-> On copy, the text and form set as OFF is copied at ON.
In case of On->Off copy, the text and form set as ON is copied at OFF.
Delete On caption (i) Erases the texts which have been set so far.
Size (j) Sets the text size.
Width Ratio(k) You can establish character’s vertical ratio with a percentage to extend or reduce the character
width. The ratio of character width is vertical ratio to character size (j) and the available setting value
ranges from 1% to 600%. A user can select the ratio from combo box or input the value directly.

a
b c
d e
g
h
d
i
k
m
l
n
o
p
j
l

Chapter 17 Object

17-5

 

Terms Settings
Change the property of text
table (l)
This is set when you indirectly enter texts (select in the text table) and change the text color and
type(Bold, Italic, Strikeout, Underline) set in the text table.
Color (m) Sets the color of texts.
Font Style (n) Sets the text form (Bold, Italic, Strikeout, Underline). You can select two or more of them at a time.
Horizontal Alignment (o) Selects the horizontal location of texts (left, center, right).
Vertical Alignment (p) Selects the vertical location of texts (top, middle, bottom).

(4) Detail

Items Settings
Offset(a) Set when you use the offset function.
Device(b, c) Set when you determine the device address by adding the device value set by the offset device to the
device to monitor.
It is set in the same size and form as the device to be referred to, which has been set in the basic items.

a b c
Chapter 17 Object
17-6
17.1.4 Word Lamp Setting Items
As follows, the lamp shape and text change according to the device value.
[Method]
(a) Create word lamp in the window.
(b) Set the object device at IW0.0.2 in [Basic] of word lamp.
(c) Make the following four conditional expressions in [Basic] of the word lamp. ($V refers to the object device)
(d) Set images corresponding to the default value, case 1, case 2, case 3 and case 4 in [Display] of the word lamp.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
(e) Set texts corresponding to the default value, case 1, case 2, case 3 and case 4 in [Text] of the word lamp.
(
See 16.3 Text Setting)
Device IW0.0.2 value is 1 Device IW0.0.2 value is 2
Device IW0.0.2 value is 3 Device IW0.0.2 value is 4
$V == 1
$V == 2
$V == 3
$V == 4

Chapter 17 Object

17-7

(1) Basic

Items Settings
Device (a) Sets the device to be referred to in the object. You can either set by using the device button or
directly enter it on the keyboard.
Size (b) Sets the data size of the device (16 bit, 32 bit).
Type (c) Sets the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD).
Create and delete
conditional expression, up
and down (d)
Creates the conditional expressions to display the lamp.
(
See 16.4 Conditional Sentence Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting
Type Description
Create Creates a new range condition of the relevant word device value.
Delete Deletes the range condition of the created word device value.
Up Shifts the sequence of the range condition of the created word device
value upward.
Down Shifts the sequence of the range condition of the created word device
value downward.
Case list (e) Defines the conditions of the state.
Up to 8 states can be registered.
Description (f) Enters description on the relevant object.

b c
d
e
f
a

Chapter 17 Object
17-8
(2) Display
Sets the image, pattern and color to display the word lamp when conditions are met.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)

Items Settings
Doesn’t display the object image, selectable per each ON, OFF status
State (b) Selects each state number and sets the image properties to display when the corresponding condition
number is met.
The number of state numbers is the number of the conditional sentences set in the basic items including
the default value.
The image to display when the conditional sentence set in the [Basic] is met is set. The default value is
displayed when the conditional sentence set in the [Basic] is not met.
Blink (c) Sets the Blink speed of the image (Not used, slow, normal, fast).

Transparent BG
Image (a) a
b
d e g
h
i
j
f
c

Chapter 17 Object

17-9

 

Items Settings
Library (d) The shape to be displayed according to the state of the relevant device is selected in the library.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Open (e) The user selects directly the image file in addition to the image specified in the XP-Builder system. If a
bitmap file, JPEG or GIF file is used as the image of the switch or lamp, press the [Open] ( )
button to invoke a dialog box for registering images.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Image type (f) Selects in which type to display the image.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Pattern (g) Selects the pattern of the figure.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Pattern FG color
(h)
Sets the foreground color of the pattern.
((
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Pattern BG color
(i)
Sets the background of the pattern.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Frame color (j) Sets the frame color.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)

Image Type Description
Not Change Color/Pattern
1. You can select On and Off images in the raster, vector or
user image list.
2. You can select an image by clicking on [Open]
( ).
3. You can select a different image for On and Off
respectively.
4. You cannot apply a pattern to the image.
Same Image & Change
Color/Pattern
1. You can select On and Off images in the vector image
list(not the raster and user image list).
2. You cannot select an image by clicking on [Open]
( ).
3. You can select only one image for On and Off.
4. You can apply a pattern to set On and Off images
differently.

Chapter 17 Object
17-10
(3) Text
This is selecting the text to be displayed on the bit lamp object image.
(
See 16.3 Text Setting)

Items Settings
Use caption (a) Decides whether to use text display.
Text entry box (b) Enters the text to display.
If a text is brought from the text table, you cannot directly enter in the text entry box.
From text table (c) This is selected when you select and enter a text in the text table instead of directly entering it.
State (d) Selects each state number and then sets the text properties to display when the corresponding
condition number is met.
The number of state numbers is that of the conditional sentences set in the basic item including the
default value.
Text table (e) Opens the text table when selecting a text in the text table. You can choose a desired text in the text
table. The selected text maintains the color and form of the text set in the text table.

a b c
d
e
f
g
i
j
k
l
h
m
n

Chapter 17 Object

17-11

 

Items Settings
The text set in each state should be selected in the same text table and if it is selected in a different text
table, the last selected text table is specified.
Delete caption (f) Deletes all the set captions.
Font (g) Sets the font type.
Size (h) Sets the size of texts.
Width Ratio(k) You can establish character’s vertical ratio with a percentage to extend or reduce the character width.
The ratio of character width is vertical ratio to character size (j) and the available setting value ranges
from 1% to 600%. A user can select the ratio from combo box or input the value directly.
Change the property
of text table (j)
This is set when you indirectly enter texts (select in the text table) and change the text color and form
(Bold, Italic, Strikeout, Underline) set in the text table.
Color (k) Sets the color of texts.
Font Style (l) Sets the text types (Bold, Italic, Strikeout, Underline). You can select two or more of them at a time.
Horizontal alignment
(m)
Sets the horizontal position of character
Vertical alignment (n) Sets the vertical position of character

(4) Operation

Items Settings
Use script (a) Select this when you want to use script.
Select script (b) The list of all the scripts inserted and edited in the project window is displayed in the combo box.
Select the script for the word lamp to operate in the combo box.
Script contents (c) The contents of the selected script are displayed.

a b c
Chapter 17 Object
17-12
Note
(1) If you delete a selected script, an error occurs in data check.
(5) Extended Setting

Items Settings
Offset (a) Set the offset device when you use the offset function.
Device (b, c) Set when you determine the device address by adding the device value set by the offset device to
the device to monitor.
It is set in the same size and form as the device to be referred to, which has been set in the basic
items.

a b c
Chapter 17 Object

17-13

17.1.5 Items to establish N-Phase Lamp
In the case of bit lamp object, the shape of lamp and character are changed depending on one PLC Device status. On the other
hand, in the case of N-Phase Device lamp, the shape of lamp and character are changed depending on the max. 5pcs PLC
device status as below.
Ex.) Monitoring Device (Bit Device) : P0000, M0000

Priority Status No. Bit Device Status Image color Displayed Character 깜빡임 상태
High Status 0 P0000 : OFF
M0000 : OFF
Blue Normal Operation No
Status 1 P0000 : ON
M0000 : OFF
Red Stop Fast
Status 2 P0000 : OFF
M0000 : ON
Yellow Caution Slow
Low Status 3 P0000 : ON
M0000 : ON
Purple Alarm Normal

Status 0 Status1
Status 2 Status 3

Chapter 17 Object
17-14
[Methods]
(a) Create N-Phase Lamp at the screen.
(b) Establish 4 statuses at N-Phase Lamp’s [Basic Items]
(c) Designate the method to change status as [Status Change by bit combination] at N-Phase Lamp’s [Basic Items].
(d) Set Device 1 as P0000, Device 2 as M0000 at N-Phase Lamp’s [Basic Items]
(d) Set the appropriate image for Default value, Condition 0, Condition 1, Condition 2, Condition 3 at N-Phase Lamp’s [Display
Items]. (
Refer to 3.2 Display Functions Setting.)
(e) Set the appropriate image for Default value, Condition 0, Condition 1, Condition 2, Condition 3 at N-Phase Lamp’s [Display
Items]. (
Refer to 3.3 Character Setting.)
(1) Basic Items

Item Description
The number of
statuses (a)
Setting the number of statuses to be displayed for the object.
They can be established from min. 3 to max. 16.

a
b
c
d

Chapter 17 Object

17-15

 

Item Description
Method to change
status (b)
You can set the method to change device status.
The description to change device status with the number of devices statuses are as below.
Method The max.
number of
statuses
Operation and the change of status
By Bit 5 EA It respectively displays On, Off status with one lamp, using
PLC’s bit device up to 4EA.
Ex. When setting the bit device for P0, P1, P2, P3, each status
is as below.
By Bit
combination
16 EA It respectively displays On, Off status combining each bot device
address status with one lamp, using PLC’s bit device up to 4EA.
Ex. When setting the bit device for P0, P1, P2, P3, each status
is as below.
Device (c) You can set the device to be referred for the object via device button or keyboard input. Between 2 and 4
devices are available and device setting is different depending on the methods to change status with the
number of statuses. (
Refer to the number of statuses, methods to change status)
Explanation(d) You can input explanation for the object.

Status P0 P1 P2 P3 Display
(Ex.)
Status 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
Status 2 ON OFF OFF OFF
Status 3 OFF ON OFF OFF
Status 4 OFF OFF ON OFF
Status 5 OFF OFF OFF ON
Status P0 P1 P2 P3 Display
(Ex.)
Status 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
Status 2 ON OFF OFF OFF
Status 3 OFF ON OFF OFF
Status 4 ON ON OFF OFF
Status 5 OFF OFF ON OFF
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Chapter 17 Object
17-16
(2) Display mode
You can select the image, pattern based on device status. Setting color and pattern details can be different depending on image
format.
(
Refer to 17.1.4 [Display Setting ]of Word Lamp.)
(3) Displaying Character
You can establish character displayed depending on PLC’s internal device status.
(17.1.4. Refer to 17.1.4 [Character Setting] of Word Lamp.)
Chapter 17 Object

17-17

17.2 Switch Object
17.2.1 Overview
The switch executes one or more functions by touching the screen and provides different functions by type.
17.2.2 Switch Types

Types Description
Bit switch The switch controlling On/Off of the relevant bit address.
Word switch Executes the script, enters a fixed value, adds or reduces the value.
Changes Screen Switch This switch is for switching the window.
You can set the window screen, base screen and previous window and so on.
Special switch This switch is for carrying out the key code, alarm, logging-related actions, printing, language
switching, script operation and other storage-related actions.
Multi switch A switch for setting all functions and carrying multiple functions.

A switch does not carry out any operation or action other than those above.
17.2.3 Bit Switch Setting Items
(1) Basic
a
b
i
c
d
e
f
g
h

Chapter 17 Object
17-18

Items Settings
Device(a) Sets the device to be referred to in the relevant object.
You can set it by using the device button or directly enter it on the keyboard.
Action Type(b) Sets which operation to carry out for the relevant bit device when you touch the switch.
Use Lamp
Conditions (c)
If you try to control a lamp with other method not turning it On when switch is touched at XGT Panel,
you can select the function.
Mode(d) Selecting the conditions for a lamp control.
Bit: If the set device bit is On, a lamp will be On.
Word: If the set device value is proper for setting conditions, a lamp will be On.
Copy to lamp (e) The basic device address of bit switch is copied to lamp conditions’ bit device address.
Copy to main (f) Lamp conditions’ bit device address is copied to the basic device of bit switch.
Bit word device, size,
shape,
expression(g)
When lamp form is bit, set the device to be referred at the object.
When lamp form is word, set the size, kinds of devices with the conditions for On mode.
Size: 16 bits, 32 bits
Type: Decimal number with sign, Decimal number without sign, BCD

Operation Description
On Turns ON the relevant bit device value in the PLC when you
touch the switch. The state is preserved.
Off Turns OFF the relevant bit device value in the PLC when you
touch the switch. The state is preserved.
Momentary Turns ON the relevant bit device value in the PLC only when
you are touching the switch. Otherwise it turns OFF.
Alternative Switches the relevant bit device value ON/OFF when you touch
the switch.
If the object device is ON or OFF before you press the switching
switch, it switches to OFF or ON respectively.

Chapter 17 Object

17-19

 

Items Settings
Device: The device to be referred at lamp conditions
Expression: The condition for displaying On is designated as conditional expression.
Using lamp offset (h) Setting offset device for bit or word device established by lamp conditions.
Description (i) Inputs description of object.

(2) Display
This is selecting the color (On color, Off color), image (On image, Off image) and pattern (On pattern, Off pattern) according to
the device state. The settings of the color and pattern vary according to the image type setting.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Chapter 17 Object
17-20
Note
In case of using [General]-[Basic]-[Use Lamp Condition] , you can set the blink at the [Display].
Chapter 17 Object

17-21

(3) Text
This is setting the text according to the state of the device connected to the PLC on the object.
(
See 16.3 Text Setting)
(4) Detail
a
b
d
c e
f

Chapter 17 Object
17-22

Items Settings
Security level(a) Set when you use the security function.
Level(b) You can use the security function if you select this.
The security level ranges between 1 and 9.
(
See 16.7 Security Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)
Action delay(c) This is set when you use the action delay function.
Type and time(d) If you select this, the delay time after the switch is touched until it operates is set.
The delay types you can set according to the operation types selected in [Basic] are as follows.

Delay Type Description
On delay The corresponding bit device value is changed according to the
operation set in [Basic] when you continue pressing the switch
for the set duration.
The delay time is set after being selected.
Off delay The operation set in [Basic] (On, Off, momentary, alternative) is
conducted when you press the switch and it recovers to the
previous state when you hold it for the set period of time.
Press twice If you press once, a check dialog box is invoked. If you click on
the OK button, the operation set in [Basic] (On, Off, momentary,
alternative) is conducted. If you do not hold the OK button for the
set period of time, the dialog box disappears automatically.
Operation type of [Basic] Delay types available
On Operates after delay, returns after operation and delay,
double check
Off Operates after delay, returns after operation and delay,
double check
Momentary N/A
(In this case, operation occurs only while the switch is
being hold. The act of holding the switch is not perceived
as a delay for the set period of time. Therefore, you
cannot set the delay function)
Alternative Operates after delay, double check
time
Switch pressed
t
Operates
t + set time
Set time
time
Operates
t
Returns
t + set time
Set time

Chapter 17 Object

17-23

 

Items Settings
Example 1. The operation type is set as [Momentary] in the [Basic] of the switch.
You cannot set operation delay.
Example 2. The operation type is set as [Alternative] in the [Basic] of the switch.
The Off delay function is deleted in the combo box.
3. The operation type is set as [ON] in the [Basic] of the switch.
You can set all delay operation functions.
Offset in [Write]
operation(e)
Sets the offset device when you use the offset function.
Device(f) Set when you determine the device address by adding the device value set by the offset device to
the device to monitor.

Chapter 17 Object
17-24
(5) Operation Condition Setting

Items Settings
Use Action Condition (a) Selects whether to use the operation condition.
Type (b) Decides in which operation condition to operate the object.
On bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is ON.
Off bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is OFF.
Range: carries out the object operation when the Range condition of the word device is met.
Multiple Bit: carries out the object when the logical operation result of the multiple bit devices is
met.
Device (c) Sets the bit or word device to use for the operation condition.
You can enter a bit device when On or Off bits are set.
You can enter a word device when the Range is set.
Range (d) Sets the size, type and Range condition when the operation condition is the Range.
Size: 16 bit, 32 bit
Type: signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD
Device: the device to be referred to for the lamp condition
Condition: the Range condition is set in a conditional expression.
Multi Bit (e) Sets the bit device when the operation condition is multiple bit.
Set the number of multiple bits, click on Setting ( ) and then set the condition of
the multiple bit.
(See 16.6 Operation Condition Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)

a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 17 Object

17-25

17.2.4 Word Switch Setting Item
(1) Basic

Items Settings
f
Device (a) Sets the device to be referred to in the object. You can either set by using the device button or directly
enter it on the keyboard.
Data size (b) Sets the data size of the device (16 bit, 32 bit).
Data type (c) Sets the data form of the device (signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD).
Action type (d) Selects the type of the operation to carry out.
Types Description
Set Writes the set value in the device.
Add Adds the set value to the device value.
Sub. Subtract the set value from the device value.
Script Carries out the set script.
Increasing the value of
specific place
It increases only bit value of specific place in word device.
In the case of value addition, the value is added to the
current device value as many as operand established by
a user, however, the value of specific place just increases
as many as set value .
Third place

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
a
e
c
b
d
f

Chapter 17 Object
17-26

Items Settings
For example, supposing that device values are as above
and place value is 3, when operating a switch in XGT
Panel, the device value will be changed as below.
Third place
Decreasing the value of
specific place
It decreases only bit value of specific place in word
device.
In the case of value subtraction, the value reduced from
the current device value as many as operand established
by a user, however, the value of specific place just
decreases as many as set value .
Operand (e) Sets the value to write in the object device.
The operand can be set as a fixed constant, set device value or script operation result value and so
on.
If the operand is saved in a script, the final value is applied to the corresponding device after the script
operation is all completed. The procedure is as follows.
1. Write the value from the reference device specified in the word switch and save it in a
temporary variable referring to the reference device.
2. Carry out the script for the read value.
3. Apply the value stored in the temporary variable to the reference device after the script is
completed.

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
Operand Type Description
Constant Sets the fixed value when you write a fixed value in the
word device in the writing mode.
Indirect Sets Indirect and the device when you write the value of
the word device specified in the writing mode word
device.
Script Set when you execute a certain script other than adding,
subtracting or writing a particular device value or a fixed
value.
Data Type
It sets the data type to be increased or reduced for
Increasing ·Decreasing the value of specific place. If the
related device value established with BCD data is A~F,
word switch does not run.
The number of digits
It sets the number of digits for Increasing ·Decreasing the
value of specific place.
If device size is 16 bit, you can set it as 1~4 and 32bit,
1~8.

Chapter 17 Object

17-27

 

Items Settings
- In the flowchart above, the script result value refers to the value of the temporary variable at the time
when the script is finished. That is, the script is not affected by a change of the reference device value
while the script is being carried out.
- Even if the reference device value has been changed by using the direct variable while the script is
being carried out, the changes during the period of time remains because the temporary variable
value is written in the reference device after the script is finished. Accordingly, if the reference device
is used within the script in XP-Builder, a message appears which reads “[Warning 2012] The
reference device exists in the specified script script_name. An unintended result might occur.”
Reading value from object device
Applying result of script to object
device
Description (f) Enters description in the corresponding object.

Note
(1) If you enter the operand in a fixed constant, the possible range of the constant value is as follows according to the size and
type of the reference device. If you set the fixed value beyond the range, a warning is released and it would not be entered.

Device Size Device Type Minimum Maximum
16bit Signed decimal -32768 32767
16bit Unsigned decimal 0 65535
16bit BCD 0 9999
32bit Signed decimal -2147483648 2147483647
32bit Unsigned decimal 0 4294967295
32bit BCD 0 99999999

Script conducted by using input
value

Chapter 17 Object
17-28
(2) Display
This is selecting the color (On color, Off color), image (On image, Off image) and pattern (On pattern, Off pattern) according to
the device state. The settings of the color and pattern vary according to the image type setting.
(
See 16.2 Display function Setting)
Note
In case of using [General]-[Basic]-[Use Lamp Condition] , you can set the blink at the [Display].
Chapter 17 Object

17-29

(3) Text
(See 16.3 Text Setting)
(4) Detail
a
b
d
e
c

Chapter 17 Object
17-30

Items Settings
Security level (a) Set when you use the security function.
Level (b) You can use the security function if you select this.
The security level ranges between 1 and 15.
(
See 16.7 Security Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)
Method)
You can operate the related switches in XGT Panel only you have set a password in [Common]-
[Project Properties]-[Security Setting] of XP-Builder and enter the password above the security level
set in the word switch.
Action delay (c) You cannot set this function in the switch word.
The switch word does not provide the operation delay function.
Offset in [Write]
operation (d)
Set when you use the offset function.
Device (e) Set when you determine the device address by adding the device value set by the offset device to
the device to monitor.
It is set in the same size and form as the device to be referred to, which has been set in the basic
items.

(5) Lamp Condition
a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 17 Object

17-31

 

Items Settings
Use lamp condition (a) Decides whether to control the lamp in a way other than turning ON the lamp when you touch
the switch in XGT Panel.
Type (b) Selects the condition for lamp control.
Bit: turns the lamp ON when the set device bit is On.
Word: turns the lamp ON when the set device value meets the set condition.
Bit device (c) Sets the device to be referred to in the corresponding object when the lamp type is a bit.
Word device, size, type and
expression (d)
Sets the device size, type and condition while ON when the lamp type is a word.
Size: 16 bit, 32 bit
Type: signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD
Device: the device to be referred to for the lamp condition
Expression: the condition for On display is set in a conditional expression.
Use Lamp Offset (e) Sets offset device to bit or word device set in the Lamp Condition

Chapter 17 Object
17-32
(6) Operation Condition Setting

Items Settings
Use Action condition
(a)
Selects whether to use the operation condition.
Type (b) Decides in which operation condition to operate the object.
On bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is ON.
Off bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is OFF.
Range: carries out the object operation when the range condition of the word device is met.
Multiple Bit: carries out the object when the logical operation result of the multiple bit devices is met.
Device (c) Sets the bit or word device to use for the operation condition.
You can enter a bit device when On or Off bits are set.
You can enter a word device when the range is set.
Range (d) Sets the size, type and Range condition when the operation condition is the range.
Size: 16 bit, 32 bit
Type: signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD
Device: the device to be referred to for the lamp condition
Condition: the Range condition is set in a conditional expression.
Multiple bit (e) Sets the bit device when the operation condition is multiple bit.
Set the number of multiple bits, click on Setting ( ) and then set the condition of the
multiple bit.
(See 16.6 Operation Condition Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)

a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 17 Object

17-33

17.2.5 Change Screen Switch Settings
You can edit the following three screens, which are the basic screen, operation screen and emission screen, and shift to each of them
by using the change screen switch in XGT Panel.
[Method]
(1) Edit the change screen switch in the basic screen and set the screen to shift to as [Operation Screen].
(2) Edit the change screen switch in the emission screen and set the screen to shift to as [Operation Screen].
(3) Edit the change screen switch in the operation screen and set the screen to shift to as [Basic Screen].
Basic Screen Emission Screen Operation Screen
Basic Emission Screen Operation Screen

Chapter 17 Object
17-34
(1) Basic

Items Settings
Screen Type (a) Select the type of screen to shift to.
Screen type: base screen, global window 1, global window 2
Screen No. (b) Sets the number of screen to shift to.
You can specify the number either by directly entering it or by using the Search button ( ).
If you click on the button, the specified type of screen is shown in a small size as follows.
[When the screen type is the base screen]
The base screen list is shown in smaller size.

a
b
c
d

Chapter 17 Object

17-35

 

Items Settings
Screen No. (b) [When the screen type is global window 1]
The window screen list is shown in smaller size.
If you use the Search button, you can specify the screen number by selecting the screen to shift to in
the downsized screen and clicking on the OK button.
Screen Change Type
(c)
Description (d) Enter description in the relevant object.

Type Description
Fixed screen Set the screen number of the screen to shift to.
(For how to set the number, see Screen No.(b))
Previous
screen
This is set when you shift to the previous screen.
In this case, do not set the screen number of the screen to shift to.
If you set the previous screen, you can shift to the immediately previous
window by touching the change screen switch.
If the window where the change screen switch is is the first monitoring
window, you do not shift to another window.

Chapter 17 Object
17-36
(2) Display
(See 16.2 Display function Setting)
(3) Text
(See 16.3 Text Setting)
Chapter 17 Object

17-37

(4) Detail Items

Items Settings
Security level (a) Set when you use the security function.
Level (b) You can use the security function if you select this.
The security level ranges between 1 and 9.
(
See 16.7 Security Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)
Method)
You can operate the related switches in XGT Panel only you have set a password in [Common]-
[Project Properties]-[Security Setting] of XP-Builder and enter the password above the security
level set in the word switch.
Action delay (c) You cannot use this function in change screen, which does not provide the operation delay
function.
Offset in [Write] operation (d) You cannot use the offset function in Change Screen Switch. Change Screen Switch does not
provide the offset function.

a
b
c
d

Chapter 17 Object
17-38
(6) Operation Condition Setting

Items Settings
Use Action Condition (a) Selects whether to use the operation condition.
Type (b) Decides in which operation condition to operate the object.
On bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is ON.
Off bit: carries out the object operation when the operation condition device is OFF.
Range: carries out the object operation when the Range condition of the word device is met.
Multiple Bit: carries out the object when the logical operation result of the multiple bit devices is met.
Device (c) Sets the bit or word device to use for the operation condition.
You can enter a bit device when On or Off bits are set.
You can enter a word device when the Range is set.
Range (d) Sets the size, type and Range condition when the operation condition is the Range.
Size: 16 bit, 32 bit
Type: signed decimal, unsigned decimal, BCD
Device: the device to be referred to for the lamp condition
Condition: the Range condition is set in a conditional expression.
Multi bit (e) Sets the bit device when the operation condition is multiple bit.
Set the number of multiple bits, click on Setting ( ) and then set the condition of the
multiple bit.
(See 16.6 Operation Condition Setting of Chapter 16 Object Setting)

a
b
c
d
e

Chapter 17 Object

17-39

17.2.6 Special Switch Settings
(1) Basic

Items Settings
Special Switch
function items
Special switch functions are classified into two steps. Select the function you need
Items are as follows.
Items Sub items
History alarm viewer 1. Check All Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer
2. Check Selected Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer
3. Delete Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Page
4. Delete All Occurrence No.
5. Delete Recovered All Data in Alarm Viewer
6. Delete Selected Line in Alarm Viewer
7. Go to History Alarm Viewer Detail
8. History Alarm Filter
9. History Alarm Viewer Line Down
10. History Alarm Viewer Line up
11. History Alarm Viewer Page Down
12. History Alarm Viewer Page Up
13. Occurrence No. of Selected Alarm
14. Print History Alarm
15. Selected History Alarm Viewer Line Up
16. Selected History Alarm Viewer Page Down

Chapter 17 Object
17-40

Items Settings
Logging Viewer 1. Logging Viewer Line Down
2. Logging Viewer Line Up
3. Logging Viewer Page Down
4. Logging Viewer Page Up
Alarm Navigator 1. Alarm Navigator Viewer Line Down
2. Alarm Navigator Viewer Line Up
Logging Trend 1. Next Log Trend Data
2. Previous Log Trend Data
3. The First Log Trend Data
4. The Last Log Trend Data
Memo Pad 1. Change memo Mode
2. Next Memo
3. Pen Setting
4. Previous Memo
5. Redo Memo
6. Reset Memo
7.
Storage of memo
8. Indo Memo
Recipe 1. File Recipe Manager and Transfer
2. General Recipe Manager
3. Recipe Editor
ETC 1. Change Runtime Language
2. Close Popup Window
3. Data List Editor
4. Key Switch
5. Next Cursor
6. Previous Cursor
7. Print Screen
8. Program Monitoring
9. Run Other Application
10. Runtime Exit
For detail of each item, refer to following contents.
Detail item Set detail item according to sub item.
Detail item
Description Inputs description of each item.

Chapter 17 Object

17-41

You can choose from the following functions.

Items Settings
Print Screen The screen displayed when the switch is pressed in XGT Panel is printed.
The contents of the screen are printed in the specified printing location, which you can set in [Common]-[Project
Property setting]-[Auxiliary Settings]-[Screen Capture]-[Output]. Printing operates as follows according to the
specified printing location.
Change
Runtime
Language
This is the function of switching languages in XGT Panel when you press the special switch.
The language to switch to is selected as follows in XP-Builder.
Languages can be selected from the languages registered in [Common]-[Project Property Setting]-[Language]-
[Runtime Language List].

Items Description
Save as file
Saved as a bitmap file in the path specified in [Common]-[Project Property
Setting]-[Storage Settings]-[Backup Storage]-[Capture Image].
If the screen capture image location is not set, it is not saved in a file.
Runtime
Print
Printed by the USB printer currently connected to XGT Panel.
If no printer is plugged, a system alarm occurs reading that no printer is
connected. (The system alarm operates only when it is set in [Common]-[Project
Property Setting]-[Auxiliary Settings]-[System Alarm Window].) A system alarm is
restored if you connect a USB printer and retry printing.

Chapter 17 Object
17-42

Items Settings
Key switch This is the switch for entering values in the text input unit or numeric input unit. It sets key codes to be operated
in XGT Panel as follows.
You can set numbers, alphabet, special signs (Esc, Clear, etc.). When you touch the specified key special
switch for operation in XGT Panel, the specified texts are entered in the text input unit or number input unit
which is waiting for entry.

Chapter 17 Object

17-43

 

Items Settings
Print History
Alarm
Only the history alarm data of the group selected when you press the special button is printed.
An alarm group can be chosen from the history alarm list. If no alarm group has been made, you cannot edit a
special switch.
Runtime Exit The current monitoring is terminated and you go back to the menu screen of the XGT Panel series when you
press the special switch.
Go to History
Alarm Viewer
Detail
When an alarm occurs according to the set history alarm condition, additional information related to the alarm
might be necessary. In such a case, a window is invoked which has been edited by using objects and so on to
gain additional information.
The detailed procedure is as follows.
1. Edit the detailed window screen by using an object.
2. In the history alarm list of the common data, setup the detail window change.
3. Set View Details in the history alarm viewer object.
4. Touch the column of which the details you want to see of the history alarm data in the XGT Panel
series.
5. Touch the special switch for viewing detailed history alarm.
6. The previously built pop-up view details window is invoked.

Chapter 17 Object
17-44

Items Settings
History Alarm List of Common Data
History Alarm View Object
Select a column of which the details you want to see in the history alarm view object and touch the [Go to
History Alarm Viewer Detail] switch to invoke the relevant window screen.

Chapter 17 Object

17-45

 

Items Settings
History alarm
Viewer
Type Function
Page up If there are more history alarms than those displayed in the XGT Panel window,
multiple pages of history alarms are created. If you press a special switch in
XGT Panel, the history alarm contents of the page immediately prior to the
currently displayed page are shown.
Page down If there are more history alarms than those displayed in the XGT Panel window,
multiple pages of history alarms are created. If you press a special switch in
XGT Panel, the history alarm contents of the page immediately next to the
currently displayed page are shown.
Line up The alarm contents in the column above the current history alarm contents are
shown when you press the special switch.
Line down The alarm contents a column after the current history alarm contents are shown
when you press the special switch.
.
Delete
selected Line
in Alarm
viewer
The data selected in View History Alarm is deleted when you select particular history alarm data in View History
Alarm and press the special switch. The alarm data which has not been restored is not deleted.
Delete All
Alarm Data in
Alarm viewer
This is for deleting all the alarm data in the currently displayed page in View History Alarm. The alarm data
which has not been restored is not deleted.
Acknowledge
selected
Alarm Data in
Alarm Viewer
The data selected in View History Alarm is checked when you select particular history alarm data in View
History Alarm and press the special switch. In this case, the check time is recorded.
Acknowledge
All Alarm Data
in Alarm
Viewer
This is for checking all the alarm data in the currently displayed page in View History Alarm. In this case, the
check time is recorded in all the alarm data of the current page.

Chapter 17 Object
17-46

Items Settings
Logging
vertical list
view
Type Function
Page up If there are more logging contents than those displayed in the XGT Panel window,
multiple pages of logging contents are created. If you press a special switch in
XGT Panel, the logging contents of the page immediately prior to the currently
displayed page are shown.
Page down If there are more logging contents than those displayed in the XGT Panel window,
multiple pages of logging contents are created. If you press a special switch in
XGT Panel, the logging contents of the page immediately next to the currently
displayed page are shown.
Line up The logging contents in the column above the current logging contents are shown
when you press the special switch.
Line down The logging contents in the column after the current logging contents are shown
when you press the special switch.
Logging
horizontal list
view
Logging No. Process 1 process 2 process 3 process 4 process100
1 11 21 31 41 101
2 12 22 32 42 102
3 13 23 33 43 103
4 14 24 34 44 104
[Actual Logging Data]
[Logging Data displayed at XGT-Panel screen]
Fixed row Unfixed row

Logging
No.
process 1 process 2 process 3
1 11 21 31
2 12 22 32
3 13 23 33
4 14 24 34

Chapter 17 Object

17-47

 

Items Settings
The actual logging data and that displayed at XGT Panel are as above, their functions are as below.
Type Functions
Next page
view in the
horizontal
direction
When the logging data of the horizontal direction is more than those displayed at XGT
Panel screen, you can use this switch. At unfixed rows, it shows the logging data of the
right next page from the current one with keeping the fixed row.
[Logging Data displayed at XGT-Panel screen]
In the above case, although there are some data in the last row on right side, it is
displayed as being cut since display area is not enough.
Fixed row Unfixed row
Previous
page view in
the horizontal
direction
When the logging data of the horizontal direction is more than those displayed at XGT
Panel screen, you can use this switch. At unfixed rows, it shows the logging data of the
right previous page from the current one with keeping the fixed row.
Next Row View If logging data in horizontal direction is more than the number of data displayed at XGT
Panel screen, you can use the switch. At unfixed rows, it shows the logging data of the
next row from the current one with keeping the fixed row.
[Logging data displayed at XGT-Panel screen]

Logging No. process 1 process 4 process 5
1 11 41 51
2 12 42 52
3 13 43 53
4 14 44 54
Logging No. process 1 process 4 process
5
1 11 41 5
2 12 42 5
3 13 43 5
4 14 44 5
Logging No.
Process 1 Process 3 Process 4
1 11 31 41
2 12 32 42
3 13 33 43
4 14 34 44
Fixed row Unfixed row

Chapter 17 Object
17-48

Items Settings
Previous row
View
If logging data in horizontal direction is more than the number of data displayed at XGT
Panel screen, you can use the switch. At unfixed rows, it shows the logging data of the
previous row from the current one with keeping the fixed row.
First row view It shows the logging data of the first row at Logging Data View of XGT Panel among
generated logging data.
Last row view It shows the logging data of the last row at Logging Data View of XGT Panel among
generated logging data.
If the object area is larger than the area displayed to the last row as above, remaining
area will be filled with gray color.
Alarm
Navigator
Viewer
Type Function
Line up The alarm group in the column above the current alarm search panel contents is
shown when you press the special switch.
Line down The alarm group in the column after the current alarm search panel contents is
shown when you press the special switch.
History alarm
filter
This is for filtering the specified filtering objects of all the history alarm data that have occurred and displaying
them in the history alarm view object.
Filtering objects are as follows.

Logging No. Process 1 Process 100
1 11 101
2 12 102
3 13 103
4 14 104
Type Function
Occurrence Displays all the history alarm data of which the alarm has occurred.
Acknowledge Displays all the checked history alarm data of all the history alarm data which
occurred.
The history alarm data checked by using the special switch is the object now.
Recovery Displays all the history alarm data which has been restored of all the history
alarm data which occurred.

Chapter 17 Object

17-49

 

<
Items Settings
Logging
Trend
Previous Data
View
You can see the logging data generated prior to the data displayed at logging trend now. Supposing that the
number of displayed data is 9EA with 18EA of logging data, if you try to see the logging data obtained prior to
the current data, you can use the special switch [Logging Trend Previous Data View]. You can also establish the
number of data to be transferred.
Previous logging trend data Current logging trend data